Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Root Search
para has 1 results
        Root Word (Pāṇini Dhātupāṭha:)Full Root MarkerSenseClassSutra
√pārapārakarmasamāptau10293
Preverbs Search
 
para has 1 results
Preverb WordMeaning
parāaway, forth
Amarakosha Search
Results for para
WordReferenceGenderNumberSynonymsDefinition
brahmā1.1.16-17MasculineSingularprajāpatiḥ, viścasṛṭ, aṇḍajaḥ, kamalodbhavaḥ, satyakaḥ, ātmabhūḥ, pitāmahaḥ, svayaṃbhūḥ, abjayoniḥ, kamalāsanaḥ, vedhāḥ, vidhiḥ, pūrvaḥ, sadānandaḥ, haṃsavāhanaḥ, surajyeṣṭhaḥ, hiraṇyagarbhaḥ, caturāsanaḥ, druhiṇaḥ, sraṣṭā, vidhātā, nābhijanmā, nidhanaḥ, rajomūrtiḥ, parameṣṭhī, lokeśaḥ, dhātā, virañciḥbramha
kākaḥ2.5.22MasculineSingularcirañjīvī, parabhṛt, sakṛtprajaḥ, karaṭaḥ, maukuliḥ, vāyasaḥ, ātmaghoṣaḥ, balipuṣṭaḥ, ekadṛṣṭiḥ, balibhuk, dhvāṅkṣaḥ, ariṣṭaḥ
kaphoṇiḥ2.6.81Ubhaya-lingaSingularkūrpara
kokilaḥ2.5.21MasculineSingularparabhṛtaḥ, pikaḥ, vanapriyaḥ
makarandaḥMasculineSingularpuṣparasaḥ
om2.4.12MasculineSingularevam, paramam
pakṣma3.3.128NeuterSingulardhīḥ, paramātmā
para3.3.199MasculineSingularsvacchandaḥ, mandaḥ
paraidhitā2.10.17MasculineSingular‍‍parācitaḥ, pariskandaḥ, parajātaḥ
paramānnam2.7.26NeuterSingularpāyasam
paramparākam2.7.28NeuterSingularśamanam, prokṣaṇam
parānnaḥ3.1.19MasculineSingularparapiṇḍādaḥ
paratantraḥ3.1.14MasculineSingularnāthavān, parādhīnaḥ, paravān
punaḥ3.3.261MasculineSingularsvargaḥ, paraḥlokaḥ
sādhuḥ3.3.108MasculineSingularkṣaudram, madyam, puṣparasaḥ
sajjanam2.8.33NeuterSingularuparakṣaṇam
śaṃbhuḥMasculineSingularkapardī, kapālabhṛt, virūpākṣaḥ, sarvajñaḥ, haraḥ, tryambakaḥ, andhakaripuḥ, vyomakeśaḥ, sthāṇuḥ, ahirbudhnyaḥ, paśupatiḥ, mahānaṭaḥ, maheśvaraḥ, īśānaḥ, bhūteśaḥ, giriśaḥ, kṛttivāsāḥ, ugraḥ, śitikaṇṭhaḥ, mahādevaḥ, kṛśānuretāḥ, nīlalohitaḥ, bhargaḥ, gaṅgādharaḥ, vṛṣadhvajaḥ, bhīmaḥ, umāpatiḥ, īśaḥ, gajāriḥ, śūlī, śarvaḥ, candraśekharaḥ, girīśaḥ, mṛtyuñjayaḥ, prathamādhipaḥ, śrīkaṇṭhaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, trilocanaḥ, dhūrjaṭiḥ, smaraharaḥ, tripurāntakaḥ, kratudhvaṃsī, bhavaḥ, rudraḥ, aṣṭamūrtiḥ, śivaḥ, īśvaraḥ, śaṅkaraḥ, khaṇḍaparaśuḥ, mṛḍaḥ, pinākī(51)shiva, god
saṃkulamMasculineSingularkliṣṭam, parasparaparāhṛtaminconsistent
śatruḥ2.8.10MasculineSingularārātiḥ, śātravaḥ, ahitaḥ, durhṛd, sapatnaḥ, para, dasyuḥ, vipakṣaḥ, dveṣaṇaḥ, vairī, pratyarthī, abhighātī, amitraḥ, dviṭ, dviṣan, ripuḥ
śilājatuḥ2.9.105NeuterSingularprāṇaḥ, ‍piṇḍaḥ, goparasaḥ, bolaḥ
sopaplavaḥ1.4.10MasculineSingularuparaktaḥeclipsed sun or moon
surā2.10.39FeminineSingularva‍ruṇātmajā, halipriyā, madyam, pari‍srutā, prasannā, para‍srut, kaśyam, ‍‍kādambarī, gandhokṣamā, hālā, madirā, irā
vicikitsāFeminineSingularsaṃśayaḥ, sandehaḥ, dvāparadoubt
vraścanaḥ2.10.33FeminineSingularpatraparaśuḥ
vyasanārtaḥ3.1.42MasculineSingularuparaktaḥ
karpara2.6.69MasculineSingularkapālaḥ
puṣparathaḥ2.8.52MasculineSingular
tatpara3.1.7MasculineSingularprasitaḥ, āsaktaḥ
dvāpara3.3.170MasculineSingulardrumaḥ, śailaḥ, arkaḥ
Monier-Williams Search
Results for para
Devanagari
BrahmiEXPERIMENTAL
परmf(ā-)n. (1. pṛ-; ablative sg. m. n. p/arasmāt-, rāt-; locative case p/arasmin-, re-; Nominal verb plural m. p/are-, rās-, rāsas-; see ) far, distant, remote (in space), opposite, ulterior, farther than, beyond, on the other or farther side of, extreme View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. previous (in time), former View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. ancient, past View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. later, future, next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. following, succeeding, subsequent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. final, last View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. exceeding (in number or degree), more than View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. better or worse than, superior or inferior to, best or worst, highest, supreme, chief (in the Comparative degree meanings [where also -tara-],with ablative,rarely genitive case or in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound';exceptionally paraṃ śatam-,more than a hundred literally"an excessive hundred, a hundred with a surplus" ; parāḥ koṭayaḥ- ) etc.
परmf(ā-)n. strange, foreign, alien, adverse, hostile View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. other than, different from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. left, remaining View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परmf(ā-)n. concerned or anxious for (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. another (different from one's self), a foreigner, enemy, foe, adversary etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. a following letter or sound (only in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' mfn. exempli gratia, 'for example' ta-para-,having t-as the following letter, followed by t-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. (scilicet graha-) a subsidiary soma-graha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. Name of a king of kosala- with the patronymic āṭṇāra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. of another king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. of a son of samara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. (sc. prāsāda-) of the palace of mitravindā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परm. or n. the Supreme or Absolute Being, the Universal Soul View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परn. remotest distance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परin compound for ras-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परबलn. the foe's army View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परबलीयस्mfn. each more important than the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभागm. superior power or merit, excellence, supremacy ( parabhāgatā -- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभागm. good fortune, prosperity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभागm. the last part, remainder View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभागताf. parabhāga
परभाग्यn. another's wealth or prosperity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभाग्योपजीविन्mfn. living upon another's fortune View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभाषाf. a foreign language View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभावmf(ā-)n. loving another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभावm. the being subsequent or second member in a compound (see -bhūta-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभेदक() mfn. destroying enemies. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभेदन() mfn. destroying enemies. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृत्mfn. nourishing another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृत्m. a crow (see next) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृतm. "nourished by another", the Kokila or Indian cuckoo (supposed to leave its eggs to be hatched by the crow) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृताf. the female Kokila View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृतमयmf(ī-)n. consisting entirely of cuckoos View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृतिकाf. a female cuckoo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृतिकाf. Name of a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृत्यmfn. to be nourished or supported by another ( parabhṛtyatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभृत्यत्वn. parabhṛtya
परभूin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभूजातिनिर्णयm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभूमिf. a foreign or hostile country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभूमिष्ठmfn. being in it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभूप्रकरणn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभूषणn. another's ornament (wrong reading for pari-bh-and para-dūṣaṇa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परभूतmfn. following or subsequent (said of words) on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परब्रह्मन्n. the Supreme Spirit or brahman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परब्रह्मन्n. Name of anUp. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परब्रह्मानन्दबोधm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परब्रह्मप्रकाशिकाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परब्रह्मस्तोत्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परब्रह्माष्टोत्तरशतनामन्n. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परब्रह्मोपनिषद्f. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परचक्रn. the army of a foe (Scholiast or Commentator"a hostile prince") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परचक्रसूदनm. destroyer of it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परच्छन्दm. another's will ( paracchandānuvartana nuvartana- n.following it ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परच्छन्दmfn. depending on another's will, subservient (also -vat-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परच्छन्दानुवर्तनn. paracchanda
परच्छिद्रn. another's fault or defect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परचिन्ताf. thinking of or caring for another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परचित्तज्ञानn. knowing the thoughts of another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परचित्तज्ञानn. knowledge of the thoughts of others, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदारm. sg. or plural another's wife or wives etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदारm. adultery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदाराभिगमनn. approaching or touching or courting another's wife or wives, adultery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदाराभिमर्शm. approaching or touching or courting another's wife or wives, adultery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदारभुज्m. one who takes or approaches or enjoys another's wife or wives, an adulterer () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदारपरिग्रहm. one who takes or approaches or enjoys another's wife or wives, an adulterer () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदारिन्m. one who takes or approaches or enjoys another's wife or wives, an adulterer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदारोपसेवनfn. approaching or touching or courting another's wife or wives, adultery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदेशm. another or a foreign or a hostile country (opp. to sva-d-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदेशसेविन्mfn. living abroad, a traveller View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदेशिन्mfn. foreign, exotic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदेशिन्m. a foreigner or a traveller View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदेवताf. the highest deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदेवतास्तुतिf. Name of a hymn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परधनn. another's wealth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परधनास्वादनसुखn. feeding luxuriously at another's expense View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परधर्मm. another's duty or business, the duties of another caste View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परधर्मm. another's peculiarity ( paradharmatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परधर्मत्वn. paradharma
परध्यानn. intent meditation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदोषin -kīrtana- n. the proclaiming of another's faults, censoriousness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदोषज्ञmfn. knowing another's faults View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परद्रव्यn. plural another's property View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परद्रव्यापहारकmfn. robbing another's property View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परद्रोहm. injuring another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परद्रोहकर्मधीmfn. injuring another in deed or thought View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परद्रोहिन्mfn. tyrannizing over another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदुःखn. another's pain or sorrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परदूषणm. (sc. saṃdhi-) peace purchased by the entire produce of a country (varia lectio para-bhūṣaṇa-and pari-bh-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परद्वेषिन्mfn. hating another, inimical to another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परगामिन्mfn. idem or 'mfn. being with or relating to another ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परगतmfn. being with or relating to another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परगेहवासm. dwelling in another's house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परग्लानिf. the subjugation of a foe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परग्रन्थिm. "extreme point of a limb", an articulation, joint View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परगृहवास m. dwelling in another's house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परगुण(in the beginning of a compound) the virtues of another ( paraguṇagrāhin -grāhin- mfn.assuming them) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परगुणmfn. beneficial to another or to a foe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परगुणग्राहिन्mfn. paraguṇa
परःin compound for ras-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परहंसm. equals parama-h- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परहन्m. "foe-killer", Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परहितmfn. friendly, benevolent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परहितn. another's welfare View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परहितग्रन्थm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परहितरक्षितm. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परहितसंहिताf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःकृष्णmfn. more than black, extremely dark View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःपुंसाf. (a wife) dissatisfied with her husband View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःपुरुषmfn. higher than a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःसहस्र(; p/araḥ-sahasra- ) mf(ā-)n. plural more than 1000. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःसामन्mfn. (p/a-) having superfluous or surplus sāman-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःसामन्m. plural Name of particular sacrificial days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःषष्टmfn. plural more than 60 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःशतmf(-)n. plural more than 100 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःशतmf(-)n. containing more than 100 verses View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःशतर्ग्गाथmfn. (r-for -) equals para-ṛk-śata-gātha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परःश्वस्ind. equals para-śv- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परैधितm. "nourished by another", the Indian cuckoo (see para-bhṛta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परैधितm. a servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परजmfn. being behind another, inferior View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परजmfn. coming from a foe
परजनm. another person, a stranger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परजनm. (coll.) strangers (opp. to sva-j-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परजन्मन्n. a future birth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परजन्मिकmfn. relating to it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परजातm. "born of another", a stranger or servant (varia lectio -jita-,"conquered by another") . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परज्ञानमयmf(ī-)n. consisting in knowledge of the Supreme Being View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परक in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' equals para-,"the following sound or word", exempli gratia, 'for example' iti-śabda-p-, followed by the word iti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकालmfn. relating to a later time, mentioned later (opp. to pūrva--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकलत्रn. another's wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकलत्राभिगमनn. approaching another's wife, adultery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकरगतmfn. being in another's hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकर्मन्n. service for another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकर्मनिरतm. "engaged in service for another"a servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकार्यn. another's business or affair View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकथाf. plural talk about another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकायप्रवेशनn. entering another's body (a supernatural art) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परखातकmfn. dug by another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकीयmf(ā-)n. belonging to another or a stranger, strange, hostile ( parakīyatā -- f.) (nipāna- n.a tank belonging to another ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकीयाf. another's wife or a woman dependent on others ( parakīyātva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकीयताf. parakīya
परकीयात्वn. parakīyā
परक्रमm. doubling the other (id est second) letter of a conjunction of consonants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परक्रान्तिf. the greatest declination, inclination of the ecliptic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परक्राथिन्m. Name of a kuru- warrior View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकृतिf. the action or history of another, an example or precedent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकृत्यn. another's business or affair View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकृत्यmfn. busy for another, hostile View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकृत्यपक्षm. the hostile party View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परक्षेत्रn. another's field or wife (see kṣetra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परक्षेत्रn. the body in another life (see kṣetriya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परक्षुद्राf. plural the very short verses (of veda-) (see kṣudrasūkta-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परकुलm. an otter, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकm. the other or future world etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकबाधm. loss of the future world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकगmfn. going or gone to the future world, dying, dead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकगमm. dying, death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकगमनn. dying, death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकगतmfn. going or gone to the future world, dying, dead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकहस्तmfn. holding in hand (id est quite certain of) the other world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकस्थानn. the state of (being in) the other world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकवहmf(ā-)n. (a river) flowing in or toward the other world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकविधिm. rites for the other world, funeral rites View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परलोकयानn. equals -gama- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्ind. afterwards, later View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्ind. (with ablative) beyond, after (exempli gratia, 'for example' paraṃ vijñānāt-,beyond human knowledge; astam-ayāt p-,after sunset; mattaḥ p-,after me; ataḥ p-or param ataḥ-,after this, farther on, hereafter, next; itaḥ p-,henceforward, from now; tataḥ p-or tataś ca p-,after that, thereupon; smāt p-[for smāt p-],no more of this, enough) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्ind. in a high degree, excessively, greatly, completely View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्ind. rather, most willingly, by all means View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्ind. I will, so be it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्ind. at the most, at the utmost, merely, no more than, nothing but View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्ind. but, however, otherwise (paraṃ tu-or paraṃ kiṃ tu- idem or 'ind. at the most, at the utmost, merely, no more than, nothing but '; yadi p-,if at all, perhaps, at any rate; na-p-,not-but; na paraṃ-api-,not only-but also; paraṃ na-api na-,not only not-but not even; na paraṃ-yāvat-,not only-but even) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमmf(ā-)n. (superl. of p/ara-) most distant, remotest, extreme, last etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमmf(ā-)n. chief, highest, primary, most prominent or conspicuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमmf(ā-)n. best, most excellent, worst (meṇa cetasā-,with all the heart; ma-kaṇṭhena-,"with all the throat", roaring, speaking aloud) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमmf(ā-)n. (with ablative) superior or inferior to, better or worse than View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमm. Name of 2 authors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमn. highest point, extreme limit (catur-viṃśati-p-,at the utmost 24) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमn. chief part or matter or object (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).= consisting chiefly of, completely occupied with or devoted to or intent upon) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमn. (also parama--in compound;See below) very much, excessively, excellently, in the highest degree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमभास्वरmfn. excessively radiant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमभट्टारकm. a paramount sovereign, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमब्रह्मचारिणीf. Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमब्रह्मन्n. the Supreme Spirit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमब्रह्मण्यmfn. most kind to Brahmans, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमचेतस्n. all the heart View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमदm. highest degree of intoxication, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमदारुणmfn. very dreadful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमधर्मात्मन्mfn. very dutiful or virtuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमादीश्वर(l) m. Name of Scholiast or Commentator on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमद्रुm. Amyris Agallocha View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमदुःखितmfn. deeply afflicted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमदुर्मेधस्mfn. exceedingly stupid. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाद्वैतm. "the highest being without a second", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाद्वैतn. pure, non-duality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमगहनmfn. very mysterious or profound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमागमin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमागमचूडामणिसंहिताf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमागमसारm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमगतिf. any chief resource or refuge (as a god or protector) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमगतिf. final beatitude View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमगवm. an excellent bull View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाहm. an excellent day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसm. an ascetic of the highest order, a religious man who has subdued all his senses by abstract meditation etc. (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसधर्मनिरूपणn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसकवचmn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसनिर्णयm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसपद्धतिf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसपञ्चाङ्गn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसपरिव्राजकाचार्यm. Name of śaṃkarācārya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसपरिव्राजकधर्मसंग्रहm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसपरिव्राजकोपनिषद्f. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसपटलmn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसप्रियाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंससहस्रनामन्n. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंससंहिताf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसस्तवराजm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसस्तोत्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसोपनिषद्f. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसोपनिषद्धृदयn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमहंसोपासनप्रकारm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाह्लादनmfn. most delightful or agreeable, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमैश्वर्यn. supremacy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमजाf. equals prakṛti- (prob. corrupted) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमज्याmfn. holding supreme power (as indra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमकmf(ikā-)n. the most excellent, highest, best, greatest, extreme (wrong reading pār-and paramika-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमकाण्डm. or n. a very auspicious moment, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमकण्ठonly in ṭhena-kruś-, to try with all one's throat id est might View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाख्यmfn. called supreme, considered as the highest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमक्रान्तिf. equals para-kr- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमक्रान्तिज्याf. the sine of the greatest declination View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमक्रोधिन्m. idem or 'mfn. extremely angry ' , Name of one of the viśve-devā-s
परमक्रुद्धmfn. extremely angry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाक्षरn. the sacred syllable"Om"or brahmā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमलघुमञ्जूषाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमम्ind. yes, very well View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परममहत्mfn. infinitely great View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परममन्युमत्mfn. deeply distressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परममोक्षm. final emancipation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमामृतn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमनन्दm. Name of a teacher (wrong reading for n-?; see parān-under para-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमानन्दm. supreme felicity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमानन्दm. the Supreme Spirit, soul of the universe etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमानन्दm. Name of several authors (also -cakravartin-, -dāsa-, -deva-, -nātha-, -pāṭhaka-, -bhaṭṭācārya-, -yogīndra-, -sarasvatī-, śrama-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमानन्दलहरीस्तोत्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमानन्दमाधवस्तवm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमानन्दतन्त्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाङ्गनाf. an excellent or beautiful woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमणिm. "excellent jewel", Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमान्नn. "best food", rice boiled in milk with sugar (offered to gods or deceased ancestors) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमन्थु m. Name of a son of kakṣeyu- (varia lectio markṣa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमन्त्र varia lectio for mātra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाणुm. an infinitesimal particle or atom (30 are said to form a mote in a sun-beam) etc. (see bhṛtya-p-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाणुm. the passing of a sun-beam past an atom of matter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाणुn. 1/8 of a mātrā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाणुकारणवादm. the atomistic system of the vaiśeṣika-s, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाणुमयmf(ī-)n. consisting merely of atoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाणुताf. infinite minuteness, the state of an atom View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाण्वङ्गकm. "subtle-bodied", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमन्युm. Name of a son of kakṣeyu- (varia lectio markṣa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमापद्f. the greatest misfortune View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपदn. the highest state or position, eminence, final beatitude View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपदनिर्णायकm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपदसोपानn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपदात्मवत्mfn. whose essence is the highest of all states (id est brahmā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमापक्रमm. equals para-krānti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमापमm. "greatest declination", the inclination of a planet's orbit to the ecliptic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपरमmfn. highest or most excellent of all View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमप्रभm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमप्रीतmfn. exceedingly rejoiced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाप्सरस्f. an excellent āpsara-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपुंस्m. the Supreme Spirit, Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपुरुषm. idem or 'm. the Supreme Spirit, Name of viṣṇu- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपूरुषm. equals -pur- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपुरुषमहोत्सवप्रायश्चित्तn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपुरुषप्रार्थनामञ्जरीf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमपुरुषसंहिताf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमारm. Name of a son of the ṛṣi- śaunaka- and ancestor of bhoja-deva- (see -mṛtyu-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाराध्यm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरहस्यn. the deepest mystery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरहस्यजपसंग्रहm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरहस्यसंहिताf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरहस्यवादm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरहस्योपदेशसंग्रहm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरहस्योपनिषद्f. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरजm. a supreme monarch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमरसm. "most excellent beverage", buttermilk mixed with water View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमर्द्धिकm. (ma-ṛddhika-) excessively fortunate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्हतm. "most excellent arhat-", Name of kumāra-pāla- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमर्क्ष(equals ma-ṛkṣa-) m. Name of a king (varia lectio para-manthu-and -manyu-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमर्म(for -marman-), in -jña- mfn. knowing the secret plans or intentions of another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमर्मभाषणn. telling another's secrets View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमर्षिm. (ma-ṛṣi-) a great or divine sage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्तmfn. much pained or depressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्तवत्ind. very piteously View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थm. the highest or whole truth, spiritual knowledge etc. (in the beginning of a compound; ena-, āt-,in reality) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थm. any excellent or important object View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थm. the best sense View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थm. the best kind of wealth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थभाज्mfn. partaking of the highest truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थबोधm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थदरिद्रmfn. really poor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थदर्शनm. Name of a samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थमत्स्यm. a real fish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थनिर्णयm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थप्रदीपिकाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थप्रकाशm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थप्रपाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसंदर्भm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसंग्रहm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसंवृतिसत्यनिर्देशm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसारm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसारसंग्रहm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसारसंक्षेपविवृतिf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसरित्f. really a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसत्यn. the real or entire truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थस्तुतिf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थसुप्तmfn. really asleep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थताf. the highest truth, reality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थतस्ind. in reality, really, in the true sense of the word etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थविद्m. one who knows the highest truth, a philosopher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थविन्दmfn. acquiring knowledge of truth, obtaining the best kind of wealth etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमार्थविवेकm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमर्यm. a bodhi-sattva- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमसंहिताf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमसंहृष्टmfn. equals -prīta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमसम्मतmfn. highly esteemed, much revered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमसंतुष्टmfn. highly pleased or satisfied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमसमुदयmfn. very auspicious or successful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमासनm. (with śākta-s) Name of an author of mantra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमसर्वत्रind. everywhere, throughout View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमशिव(with ācārya-and vendra-sarasvatī-) m. Name of authors. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमशोभनmfn. exceedingly brilliant or beautiful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमस्वधर्मन्mfn. most exact in the observance of the duties of one's own (caste or tribe) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतn. a different opinion or doctrine, heterodoxy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमताf. (m/a--) highest position or rank View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमताf. highest end or aim View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतभङ्गm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतभञ्जनn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतकालानलm. Name of a pupil of śaṃkara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतखण्डनसंग्रहm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतस्ind. in the highest degree, excessively View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतस्ind. worst of all View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतत्त्वn. the highest truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतत्त्वप्रकाशिकाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमतत्त्वरहस्योपनिषद्f. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमाटिकm. Name of a school of the yajus- (see vaṭ-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मm. a particular personification View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मin compound equals tman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मगतिप्रकाशm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मकmf(ikā-)n. the highest, greatest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्ममयmf(ī-)n. being entirely the soul of the universe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मन्m. all the heart (only instrumental case = parameṇa cetasā-, column 1) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मन्m. the Supreme Spirit etc. (see ) .
परमात्मप्रकाशm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मसंदर्भm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मस्तवm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्मविनोदm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमात्रm. or n. (with Buddhists) a particular high number (varia lectio -mantra-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमावधिm. utmost term or limit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमावटिकm. plural Name of a school of the white yajus-, (see ṭika-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमविस्मितmfn. greatly surprised or amazed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमव्योम्निकmfn. dwelling in the highest heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमायुस्mfn. reaching to a very advanced age View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमायुषm. Terminalia Tomentosa View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमे locative case of ma- in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेक्षुm. Name of a son of anu- (varia lectio meṣu-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेशm. the supreme lord, Supreme Being, Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेशस्तोत्रावलीf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठmfn. standing at the top, supreme, superior View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठm. Name of brahma- or any supreme deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठाf. a kind of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिm. a superior or a chief god of the jaina-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्mfn. standing at the head, highest, chief, principal etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. Name of any supreme being, of agni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. of prajā-pati- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. a son of prajā-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. of brahmā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. of garuḍa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. of manu- cakṣus- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. (with jaina-s) equals -ṣṭhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. the teacher of the teacher of any one's teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. a kind of virāj- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. a kind of ammonite View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. Name of a son of aja-mīḍha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. of a son of indradyumna- (Devadyumna) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन्m. dual number viṣṇu- and śrī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिन equals -ṣṭh/in- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्ठिनीf. Ruta Graveolens
परमेष्ठिताf. supremacy, superiority View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरm. the supreme lord, Supreme Being, God View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरm. of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरm. of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरm. of any eminent prince or illustrious man etc. (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरm. a jaina- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरm. Name of several authors ( parameśvarīya rīya- n.a work of parameśa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरn. (sc. liṅga-) Name of a liṅga- sacred to śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरदत्तm. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरपञ्चमुखध्यानn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरपञ्चरत्नn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरप्रणिधानn. meditation on God View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वररक्षितm. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरसाक्षात्कारm. intuitive perception of God View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरसंहिताf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरास्तित्ववादिन्m. one who asserts the existence of God View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरस्तोत्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरस्तुतिf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरताf. supremacy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरतन्त्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरत्वn. supremacy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरवर्मन्m. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरीf. Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरीf. of sītā- ( parameśvarīdāsābdhi -dāsābdhi- m.Name of work) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेश्वरीदासाब्धिm. parameśvarī
परमेश्वरीयn. parameśvara
परमेष्वासm. an excellent archer, ( parameṣvāsatā -- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमेष्वासताf. parameṣvāsa
परमोक्षनिरासकारिकाf. plural "memorial rules for preventing another's final beatitude", Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमोपासकm. an excellent"server"or layman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परmfn. one following the other, proceeding from one to another (as from father to son), successive, repeated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परm. a great great-grandson or great-grandson with his descendants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परm. a species of deer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्पराf. an uninterrupted row or series, order, succession, continuation, mediation, tradition ( paramparayā rayā- ind.by tradition, indirectly) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्पराf. lineage, progeny View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्पराf. hurting, killing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परभोजनn. eating continually View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परम्ind. successively. uninterruptedly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्पराप्राप्तmfn. received by tradition ()
परम्परासम्बन्धm. an indirect conjunction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परतस्ind. successively continually, mutually View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परावाहनn. an indirect means of conveyance (exempli gratia, 'for example' the horse which draws a carriage) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परम्परयाind. paramparā
परम्परायातmfn. received by tradition ()
परमृत्युm. a crow (see -māra-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परंतपmfn. destroying foes (said of heroes) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परंतपm. Name of a son of manu- tāmasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परंतपm. of a prince of magadha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परमुखचपेटिकाf. "slap in the face of another", Name of a controversial work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परणmfn. (1. pṛ-) crossing (see aritra--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परणn. wrong reading for pāraṇa-, reading View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परणn. Name of a town View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परनन्दपुराणn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परनिन्दाf. reviling others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परनिपातm. the irregular posteriority of a word in a compound (opp. to pūrva-n-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परनिर्मितवशवर्तिन्m. "constantly enjoying pleasures provided by others", Name of a class of deities (see ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परनिर्वाणn. the highest nirvāṇa- (with Buddhists) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपदn. the highest position, final emancipation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपाकm. another's food or meal etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपाकनिवृत्तm. one who cooks his own food without observing a particular ceremony
परपाकरतm. one who lives upon others but observes the due ceremonies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपाकरुचिm. a constant guest at others' tables View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपाकोपभोजिन्mfn. eating another's or a stranger's food View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपक्षm. the other side, hostile party, enemy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपक्षm. Name of a son of anu- (varia lectio paramekṣu-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपारभूतm. Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपराकm. immolating an animal at a sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपरिभवm. humiliation or injury suffered from others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपरिग्रहm. another's property View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपरिग्रहm. another's wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपरीणmf(ā-)n. hereditary, traditional View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपरितmfn. forming an uninterrupted series, continuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपरिवादm. equals -nirvā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपत्नीf. the wife of another or of a stranger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपौरवतन्तवm. Name of a son of viśvāmitra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपिण्डin -puṣṭaka- m. "nourished by another's food", a servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपिण्डादm. "eating another's food" idem or 'in -puṣṭaka- m. "nourished by another's food", a servant ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परप्रकाशक m. Name of 2 poets View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परप्रणवm. Name of 2 poets View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परप्रवादिन्m. a false teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परप्रयोजनmf(ā-)n. useful or beneficial to others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परप्रेष्यत्वn. the service of another, slavery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुरंजयmfn. conquering an enemy's city (said of heroes) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुरंजयm. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुरप्रवेशm. entering an enemy's city (as a supernatural art), sāṃkhya-s. Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुरुषm. the husband of another woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुरुषm. "the Supreme Spirit", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपूरुषm. the husband of another woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपूर्वाf. a woman who has had a former husband View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपूर्वापतिm. her husband View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपूर्वत्वn. the state of preceding that which ought to follow on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टmfn. nourished by another or a stranger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टm. the Kokila or Indian cuckoo (see -bhṛt-below and anya-p-) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टाf. a female cuckoo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टm. a harlot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टm. a parasitical plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टm. Name of a daughter of a king of kauśāmbi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टमहोत्सवm. "the cuckoo's great feast", a mango tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परपुष्टमयmf(ī-)n. being a cuckoo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पररमणm. "a strange lover", a paramour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परराष्ट्रn. the country of an enemy on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परऋक्शतगाथmfn. containing 100 verses of the veda- as well as gāthā-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पररुm. a species of pot-herb (varia lectio pavaru-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पररूपn. the following or subsequent sound ( pararūpatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पररूपत्वn. pararūpa
परश्in compound for ras-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. beyond, further, off, away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. in future, afterwards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. (as preposition with accusative) on the other side of, beyond, higher or more than View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. (with instrumental case) idem or 'ind. (as preposition with accusative) on the other side of, beyond, higher or more than' (also par/a en/ā-or en/ā par/aḥ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. without View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. (with ablative) beyond, on the other side of (also en/ā par/aḥ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. exclusive of, except, without View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. (with locative case) over, more than (only triṃś/ati tr/ayas par/aḥ-,three more than thirty id est 33) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्ind. (often in compound with numerals to express a surplus or superiority; see prec. and under paraḥ-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशm. a species of gem View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशक्तिm. Name of an author of mantra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसम्बन्धm. relation or connection with another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसम्बन्धिन्mfn. related or belonging to another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसंचारकm. plural Name of a people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसंगतmfn. associated or engaged id est fighting with another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसंज्ञकm. "called Supreme", the soul View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशरीरावेशm. equals -kāya-praveśana- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशासनn. the order of another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसस्थानmfn. equals -savarṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसात्कृto give (a woman) into the hands of another id est in marriage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशव() () mfn. fr. paraśu- (see pāraśavya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसवर्णmfn. homogeneous with a following letter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसवर्णीभूto become homogeneous etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशव्य() mfn. fr. paraśu- (see pāraśavya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्चत्वारिंशmfn. plural more than forty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परसेवाf. service of another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशिवm. Name of an author of mantra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशिवमहिमस्तोत्रn. Name of a stotra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशिवेन्द्रसरस्वतीm. Name of an author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्मैdat, of para- in compound (see ātmane-and ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्मैभाषmfn. idem or 'mfn. taking those terminations ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्मैभाषाf. equals -pada- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्मैपदn. "word for another", the transitive or active verb and its terminations View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्मैपदn. (plural) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्मैपदिन्mfn. taking those terminations View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्पmfn. (r/as-) protecting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्पn. () equals -tv/a- n. () protection. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्पाm. a protector, protecting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परmf(ā-)n. (fr. Nominal verb sg. m.of para-+ para-; see anyo'nya-) mutual, each other's View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परmf(ā-)n. plural like one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परind. so also in the beginning of a compound (see below) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परrarely in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' exempli gratia, 'for example' avijñāta-parasparaiḥ-,"not knowing each other" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परादिन्mfn. consuming one another or one's own kind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परहतmfn. killed by one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परहितn. one another's happiness or welfare View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परज्ञm. "knowing one another", a friend, an intimate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्पराक्रन्दिन्mfn. calling to one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परम्ind. (mostly in the oblique cases of m. sg. am-, eṇa-, āt-, asya-) one another, each other, with or from one another, one another's, mutually, reciprocally etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परामिषताf. the being one another's prey View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परानुमतिf. mutual concurrence or assent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परप्रीतिf. mutual delight or content View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परसख्यn. mutual friendship View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परसमागमm. the meeting one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्पराश्रयmfn. mutual, reciprocal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्पराश्रयm. mutual dependence (especially as a fault in argument) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परस्थितmfn. standing opposite to one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परसुखैषिन्mfn. wishing one another's happiness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परविबन्धनmfn. vibandhana
परस्परविरुद्धmfn. opposed to one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परविवादm. quarrelling with one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परव्यावृत्तिf. mutual exclusion, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परोपकारm. mutual assistance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परोपकारिन्m. an ally or associate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्परोत्पीडनn. mutual pressing or squeezing, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्रयm. dependence on others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्रयm. a refuge to enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्रयmfn. clinging to others, dependent on others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्रयाf. a parasitical plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्रीf. another's good fortune View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्तरम्() ind. further away, further View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्तराम्ind. () further away, further View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्तराम्ind. parastarām par-, further and further away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्तात्ind. (p/ar-) further away, further on, towards (opp. to avastāt-, arvāk-;with genitive case) beyond, above etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्तात्ind. from afar off, from before or behind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्तात्ind. aside, apart View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्तात्ind. hereafter, afterwards, later (opp. to pūrvam-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्थानn. another place, strange place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्त्रीf. the wife of another or an unmarried woman depending on another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुm. a hatchet, axe, the axe of a woodcutter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुm. () a thunderbolt etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुm. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुm. wrong reading for parśu- q.v ([ confer, compare Greek ,, etc.]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुचिm. Name of a son of manu- auttama- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुधरm. "axe-bearer", Name of gaṇeśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुधरm. of paraśu-rāma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुहस्ताf. "axe in hand", Name of a female attendant on devī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुमत्mfn. having an axe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुपलाशm. the blade of an axe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुफाण्टm. or n. an infusion warmed by a heated axe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामm. " rama- with the axe", Name of one of the three rāma-s (son of jamad-agni- and sixth avatāra- of viṣṇu-, he was a typical Brahman and his history typifies the contests between the brahman-s and kṣatriya-s) (also -ka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामm. Name of a prince and of several authors (also with garjara-, deva-, miśra-, muni-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामजयन्तीf. the third day in the light half of vaiśākha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामप्रकाशm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामप्रतापm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामसूत्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामावतारm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुरामावतारकथनn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुवनn. "forest of axes", Name of a hell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुवनप्रदुर्भावm. "forest of axes", Name of a hell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परशुवनसहस्रनामन्n. "forest of axes", Name of a hell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वn. sg. or plural another's property etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वmfn. equals sarvasva-bhūta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वादायिन्mfn. taking or seizing another's property () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्वधm. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) a hatchet, axe (also written parasv-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्वधायुधmfn. armed with an axe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्वधिन्mfn. furnished with an axe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वग्रहm. seizing another's property View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वहरणn. equals -graha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वहृत्mfn. taking or seizing another's property () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्वन्m. a kind of snake (see next) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्वस्ind. the day after to-morrow (see paraḥ-śvas-under paras-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परश्वत् m. a kind of snake (see next) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वत्m. (prob.) the wild ass (see prec. and pārasvata-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वत्वn. another's right ( parasvatvatvāpādāna -tvādāna- n.conferring a right upon another as by gift etc. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वत्वत्वापादानn. parasvatva
परस्वेहाf. desire of another's property View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वोपजीविकmfn. living upon another's property, dependent. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परस्वोपजीविन्mfn. living upon another's property, dependent. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परताf. highest degree, absoluteness, (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') the being quite devoted to or intent upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतःपोषmfn. receiving food from another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतल्पm. plural another's wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतल्पगामिन्m. one who approaches another's wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतम mfn. superl. and Comparative degree of para-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतङ्गण(?) m. plural Name of a people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्रn. a rule or formula for another rite View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्रmf(ā-)n. dependent on or subject to another, obedient (opp. to sva-t-) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्र n. (in the beginning of a compound) dependence on another's will View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्रदृष्टिmfn. one who asserts the dependence of the will View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्रहंसोपनिषद्f. Name of an View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्रताf. () dependence on another's will View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्रीकृतmfn. made dependent, brought into another's power View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतन्त्रीकृतmfn. ceded, sold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतापनm. "paining-foes", Name of a marut- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतरmfn. superl. and Comparative degree of para-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतर्कक m. a beggar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतर्कुकm. a beggar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतस्ind. = ablative of para- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतस्ind. farther, far off, afterwards, behind (itas-paratas-,here-there; sapta puruṣān itaś ca paraś ca-,seven ancestors and seven descendants ; sani parataḥ-,sc. sati-,when san-follows ) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतस्ind. high above (in rank) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतस्ind. (with prec. ablative) after (in time) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतस्ind. beyond, above (in rank) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतस्ind. otherwise, differently View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतस्त्वn. (the state of) being from elsewhere or without View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतत्त्वin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतत्त्वनिर्णयm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतत्त्वप्रकाशिकाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतत्त्ववादm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतीर्थिकm. the adherent of another sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परतोषयितृmfn. gratifying others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परत्रind. elsewhere, in another place, in a future state or world, hereafter etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परत्रind. below id est in the sequel (of a book) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परत्रभीरुm. "one who stands in awe of futurity", a pious or religious man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परत्वn. distance, remoteness, consequence, posteriority, difference, strangeness, superiority to (genitive case) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परत्वn. equals -- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परत्वरत्नाकरm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परौरु(r/a--) mf(-)n. broad on the outside or behind (see paro-varīyas-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परौष्णिह्f. a kind of metre (also paroṣṇih- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवाच्यmfn. blamable by others ( paravācyatā -- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवाच्यn. another's fault or defect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवाच्यताf. paravācya
परवादm. the talk of others, popular rumour or report, slander View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवादm. objection, controversy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवादिन्m. an opponent, controversialist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवाक्यn. words referring to something else, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवल्लभm. plural Name of a people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवाणिm. () a judge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवाणिm. a year View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवाणिm. Name of kārttikeya-'s peacock. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवारणm. one who averts or drives away enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवर्गm. the party or side of another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवशmfn. subject to another's will, subdued or ruled by (compound), subservient, obedient View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवशाक्षेपm. an objection to anything under the pretext of being dependent on another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवस्तुm. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवश्यmfn. equals -vaśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवश्यताf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवत्ind. like a stranger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवत्mfn. subject to or dependent on (instrumental case, genitive case locative case or compound), subservient, obedient View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवत्mfn. helpless, destitute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवत्ताf. subjection, obedience to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवेश्मन्n. another's house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवेश्मन्n. the dwelling of the Supreme View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवीरहन्m. killer of hostile heroes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परवित्तn. another's wealth (wrong reading pari--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परव्रतm. Name of dhṛta-rāṣṭra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परव्याक्षेपिन्mfn. scattering foes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परव्यूहविनाशनm. the destroyer of an enemy's ranks View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परयत्तmf(ā-)n. dependent upon another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परयत्तmf(ā-)n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') wholly subdued or overwhelmed by View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परयोषित्f. another's wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परयुवतिगm. equals -dārin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अधोपरn. the anus. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अदृष्टपरसामर्थ्यm. one who has not experienced the power of an enemy. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आम्नायपरmfn. honouring sacred tradition, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनपरmfn. without another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनपरmfn. having no follower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनपरmfn. single, sole (as Name of brahma-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अन्धपरम्परान्यायm. the rule of the blind following the blind (applied to people following each other thoughtlessly), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनुपरतmfn. uninterrupted, not stopped. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनुशासनपरmfn. obedient. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनूष्मपरmfn. (in grammar) not followed by a sibilant. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अन्यपरmfn. devoted to something else, zealous in something else. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmfn. having nothing beyond or after, having no rival or superior. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. (fr. /apa-), posterior, later, latter (opposed to p/ūrva-;often in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. following View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. western View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. inferior, lower (opposed to p/ara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. other, another (opposed to sv/a-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. different (with ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. being in the west of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरmf(ā-)n. distant, opposite. Sometimes apara- is used as a conjunction to connect words or sentences exempli gratia, 'for example' aparaṃ-ca-, moreover View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरm. the hind foot of an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपर(/am-) ([ ]) n. the future View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरalso (e-), m. plural others (= anye-, used to indicate a various reading), hāla-, Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरभावm. after-existence, succession, continuation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरदक्षिणम्ind. south-west, (gaRa tiṣṭhadgv-ādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरदीक्षिन्mfn. undergoing the later consecration, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरगन्धिकाf. Name (also title or epithet) of a country (= ketumāla-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरगोदानn. (in Buddhist cosmogony) a country west of the mahā-meru-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरगोदानि(?), m. Name (also title or epithet) of one of the four dvīpa-s, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरहैमनmfn. belonging to the latter half of the winter season View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरहेमन्तm. n. the latter part of winter. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरजmfn. born later View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरजन sg. or plural m. inhabitants of the west View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरकालm. a later period View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरकान्यकुब्जm. Name of a village in the western part of kānyakubja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरकायm. the hind part of the body. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरक्तmfn. having a changed colour, grown pale View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरक्तmfn. unfavourable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरलोकm. another world, paradise. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरम्ind. (/aparam-[ ]or apar/am-[ ]) in future, for the future View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरम्ind. again, moreover View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरम्ind. in the west of (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरनिदाघm. the latter part of the summer. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरञ्ज् -rajyate-, to become unfavourable to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरपक्षm. the latter half of the month View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरपक्षm. the other or opposing side, the defendant. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरपक्षीयmfn. belonging to the latter half of the month, (gaRa gahādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आपरपक्षीयmfn. (fr. aparapakṣa-), belonging to the second half (of a month) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरपञ्चालm. plural the western pañcāla-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरपरm.(ās-or e-)fn. plural one and the other, various View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरापरm(ās-or e-)fn. plural another and another, various View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरापरणm. not having descendants or offspring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरप्रणेयmfn. easily led by others, tractable. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरपुरुषm. a descendant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपररात्रm. the latter half of the night, the end of the night, the last watch. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपररात्रिf. the second half of the night, , Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरसद्mfn. being seated behind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरसक्थn. the hind thigh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरशरद्f. the latter part of the autumn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरस्परmfn. "not reciprocal, not one (by) the other", only in compound with -sambhūta- mfn. not produced one by the other View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरस्परmfn. plural one after the other View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरस्परSee 1. a-para-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरस्परSee 2. /apara-.
अपरस्परसम्भूतmfn. not produced one from another or in regular order, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरशुवृक्णmfn. not hewn off with an axe, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरश्वस्ind. the day after to-morrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरश्वस्ind. the day after to-morrow, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरस्वस्तिकn. the western point in the horizon. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरताf. distance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरताf. posteriority (in place or time) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरताf. opposition, contrariety, relativeness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरताf. nearness. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरतmfn. ( ram-), turned off from, unfavourable to (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरतmfn. resting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरतस्ind. elsewhere, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरतस्on the west side, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरत्रind. in another place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरत्रind. (eka-tra-, aparatra-,in one place, in the other place ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरत्वn. equals -- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवm. contest, dispute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवm. discord. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवक्त्राf. a kind of metre of four lines (having every two lines the same). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवल्लभm. Name (also title or epithet) of a people, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवर्षाf. plural the latter part of the rains. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवत्mfn. having nothing following View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवत्See 1. a-para-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवेदनीयn. (Karman) manifesting itself at a subsequent period, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरवोज्झितmfn. free from dispute, undisturbed, undisputed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरयोगmfn. without another addition, unmixed, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपरिपरmfn. not going by a tortuous course View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अरित्रपरणmf(ī-)n. crossing over by means of oars View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अर्थपरmfn. intent on gaining wealth, niggardly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अर्थपरmfn. greedy, covetous, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अस्पर्शपरmfn. not followed by a letter called sparśa- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अस्वाध्यायपरmfn. not devoted to the repetition of the veda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अश्वपरशु(?), m. the rib of a horse, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अतःपरम्ind. henceforth, further on.
अतिपरmfn. one who has over come his enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अतिपरm. a great enemy. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आत्मस्परणmfn. saving the person View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अउपरm. a descendant of upara-, Name of daṇḍa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अउपरवmfn. relating to the hole called upa-rava-, q.v commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अवरपरmf(ā-)n. preceding and following, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अवरपरम्ind. one upon the other , successively (see avaras-par/a-below) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अवरस्परmfn. ([ avara-para-]) having the last first or the hindermost foremost, inverted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बालातपरक्तmfn. red with the morning sunbeams View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बन्धूकपुष्परजस्n. bandhūkapuṣpa
भर्तृशोकपरmfn. absorbed in it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भवानीपरm. or n. Name of a stotra-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भृत्यपरमाणुm. a very humble (literally"an atom of a") servant (see padāti-lava-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ब्रह्मानन्दपरमहंसm. brahmānanda
चापरवm. the whizzing of a bow, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
छलनापरmfn. deceitful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चिकित्सापरतन्त्रn. a med. work, 15 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चिन्तापरmfn. lost in thought View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चित्परn. the Supreme Spirit (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दैवपरmfn. trusting to fate, fatalist (also yaṇa- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दैवपरmfn. fated, willed, predestined View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दैवतपरmfn. worshipper of the gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दक्षिणापरmf(ā-)n. southwestern View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दानपरmfn. devoted to liberality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दानपरताf. liberality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
देवताभ्यर्चनपरmfn. devoted to it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
देवीपरपूजाविधिm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
धनपरmf(ā-)n. fond of money View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
धनुर्वेदपरmfn. devoted to archery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
धर्मपरmfn. intent on virtue, pious, righteous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ध्यानपर() mfn. engaged in meditation, thoughtful. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ध्यानतत्परmfn. lost in meditation, thoughtful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दिष्टपरmfn. relying on fate, fatalist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्रोहपरmfn. full of malice, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्वापरm. n. that die or side of a die which is marked with two spots View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्वापरm. the Die personified View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्वापरm. "the age with the number two", Name of the 3rd of the 4 yuga-s or ages of the world (comprising 2400 years;the yuga-s itself = 2000, and each twilight = 200 years;it is also personified as a god) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्वापरm. Name of a mythology being View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्वापरm. doubt, uncertainty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्वापरच्छन्दस्n. plural a particular class of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्वापरस्तोमm. plural of stoma-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्विरभ्यासाकूपरn. Name of a sāman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
एकपरmfn. of singular importance, more important than any other, first of all (said of dice) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
एकतत्परmfn. solely intent on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
एतत्परmfn. intent on or absorbed in this commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
घटकर्परm. Name of the author of a highly artificial poem called after him (also author of the nītisāra- and mentioned as one of the 9 gems of king vikramāditya-'s court) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
घटकर्परn. the fragments of a pot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
घटकर्परn. Name of ghaṭa-karpara-'s poem View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
घटकर्परकुलकवृत्तिf. Name of a commentator or commentary on the preceding. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गिरिपरmfn. following after gir/i- (as a Name of rudra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गोपरसm. myrrh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ग्राम्येहोपरमm. ceasing from sexual desires View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गुरुतल्परतmfn. idem or 'mfn. idem or 'mfn. one who violates his teacher's bed etc.' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गुरुवृत्तिपरmfn. trying to behave respectfully towards a Guru View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हंसपरमेश्वरm. Name of a tantra- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हतपरमार्थmfn. neglectful of the highest truth (said of the senses) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
इतिपरmfn. followed by iti- (as a word) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ज्ञानपरmfn. wholly devoted to knowledge of Spirit. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कालपरशुधारm. "bearing the axe of Death", all executioner, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्णपरंपराf. the going from one ear to another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परm. a cup, pot, bowl etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परm. the skull, cranium View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परm. the shell of a tortoise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परm. a kind of weapon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परm. Ficus glomerata View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परm. Name of a thief View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परn. a pot, potsherd View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कर्परकm. Name of a thief View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
करुणापरmfn. compassionate, tender View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कौण्डोपरथm. plural Name of a warrior-tribe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कौण्डोपरथीयa prince of that tribe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कौर्परmfn. (fr. kūrp-), being at the elbow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कौतूहलपरmfn. curious, inquisitive. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
केलिपरmfn. wanton, sportive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खाण्डपरशवmfn. (fr. khaṇḍa-paraśu-), belonging to śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खण्डपरशुm. "cutting (his foes) to pieces with an axe", śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खण्डपरशुm. viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खापरm. plural Name of a people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परm. a thief View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परm. a rogue, cheat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परm. the skull View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परm. the half of a skull View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परm. a beggar's bowl or dish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परm. an umbrella or parasol View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्परn. and f(ī-). a kind of mineral substance (used as a collyrium) (see karpara-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्रियापरmfn. attentive to the performance of one's duties View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षमापरmfn. very patient, forbearing. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षुत्परmfn. very hungry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कुलपरम्पराf. the series of generations comprising a race. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कुण्डोपरथm. "Name of a man" See kauṇḍoparatha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कुर्परfor kūrp- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कूर्परm. the elbow commentator or commentary on : the knee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कूर्परm. Name of a village View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
लब्धपरभागmfn. one who has gained preeminence over (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मानपरmf(ā-)n., wholly addicted to pride, very proud or arrogant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मत्परmfn. devoted to me View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मत्परम mfn. devoted to me View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मायाछद्मपरmfn. only intent upon fraud and deceit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मुनिपरम्पराf. a tradition handed down from muni- to muni-, uninterrupted tradition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नपरmn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निःश्वासपरमmf(ā-)n. quite addicted to sighing, melancholy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निक्षेपरक्षाf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निपरणSee ni-pṝ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निपरणn. the putting down or offering (of rice etc. to deceased relatives) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निर्बन्धपरmf(ā-)n. intent upon, desirous of (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नियमपरmfn. observing fixed rules View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नियमपरmfn. relating to or corroborative of a rule View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नृसिंहपरmn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पानपरmfn. addicted to drinking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पापरहितmfn. free from guilt, harmless View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पारम्परmfn. further, future (world) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरmfn. remote and proximate, prior and posterior (as cause and effect), earlier and later, higher and lower, better and worse etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरm. equals -guru- below View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरn. (in logic) a community of properties in a small class under the larger or generic, a species or class between the genus and individual View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरn. Grewia Asiatica View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरदृष्टार्थmfn. knowing the real nature of the remote and proximate etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरगुरुm. a Guru of an intermediate class View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरगुरुm. Name of the goddess durgā- (see parāt-parag-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरैतृ(p/arāp-) mfn. going after another, going in a line (to the next world) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरज्ञmfn. knowing what is remote and proximate etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरताf. higher and lower degree, absolute and relative state, priority and posteriority View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरताf. the state of being both a genus and a species View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरत्वn. higher and lower degree, absolute and relative state, priority and posteriority View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परापरत्वn. the state of being both a genus and a species View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परात्परmfn. superior to the best View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परात्परmfn. senior to the senior (see next) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परात्परगुरुm. the teacher of the teacher of the teacher of a teacher (see, parāpara-g-under para-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परिपरSee a-pari-para-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पार्परm. (only ) a handful of rice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पार्परm. consumption or some other disease View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पार्परm. a filament of the Nauclea Cadamba View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पार्परm. ashes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पार्परm. Name of yama- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पार्परm. equals jarāṭa- (?) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पत्त्रपरशु m. a fine file or saw View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पितृवाक्परmfn. obedient to (the voice of) parents View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रपञ्चमिथ्यात्वानुमानखण्डनपरशुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रसंख्यानपरmfn. engrossed or absorbed in meditation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रत्यक्षपरmfn. setting the highest value on the visible View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रत्यपरmfn. equals -avara- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रवासपरmfn. addicted to living abroad View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रेमपरmfn. intent on love, filled with affection, affectionate, loving, constant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पृथिव्युपरmfn. higher than the earth, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वघटकर्परm. or n. Name of work (prob. the first part of the poem ghaṭa-karpara-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरmfn. being before and behind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरmfn. directed forward and backward, eastern and western etc. ( pūrvāparatva -tva- n. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरmfn. prior and subsequent, first and last View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरmfn. preceding and following, following one another, connected with one another etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरn. that which is before and behind, east and west View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरn. connection View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरn. the proof and thing to be proved View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरदक्षिणmf(ā-)n. eastern, western and southern View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरदिनn. forenoon and afternoon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरग्रन्थm. Name of work
पूर्वापरम्ind. one after another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरप्रयोगm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापररात्रिf. the former and latter half of the night, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरस्मार्तप्रयोगm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वापरत्वn. pūrvāpara
पूर्वापरविरोधm. opposition of prior and subsequent, inconsistency, incongruity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परचनn. making flower into a garland (one of the 64 arts or kalā-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परजस्n. "flower-dust", pollen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परजस्n. (especially) saffron View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परक्तmfn. red as a flower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परक्तmfn. dyed red with vegetable colour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परक्तm. Hibiscus Phoeniceus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परस(or hvaya-) m. (having the name) flower-juice, the nectar or honey of flower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुष्परथm. "flower-chariot", a car for travelling or for pleasure
रहस्यालोचनापरmfn. addicted to pondering over secret things View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रामानुजगुरुपरम्पराf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रामपरmn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसोपरसm. or n. (?) Name of a medical work (also rasoparasaśodhana -śodhana- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसोपरसशोधनn. rasoparasa
रतोपरतसंसुप्तmfn. sleeping after the cessation of sexual enjoyment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रूपरसगन्धस्पर्शवत्mfn. having colour and taste and smell and palpability View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रूपरसस्पर्शवत्mfn. having colour and taste and palpability View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रूपरत्नाकरm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सहस्रपरमmf(ā-)n. the most excellent among thousand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सामगपूर्वापरmn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सामगपूर्वापरmn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शमपरmfn. devoted to quiet, tranquil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
समयभेदोपरचनचक्रn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सम्पर gaRa utkarādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सपरn. a particular high number View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सापरmf(ā-)n. together with the west View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सप्तकृद्भवपरमm. a śrāvaka- in a particular stage of progress View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सर्वापरत्वn. "being beyond all things", final emancipation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सर्वोपरमm. cessation of all things, absolute rest ( sarvoparamatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सर्वोपरमत्वn. sarvoparama
सत्यबोधपरमहंसपरिव्राजकm. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सत्यानन्दपरमहंसपरिव्राजकm. Name of scholar. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सत्यपरmfn. given up to truth, thoroughly honest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सौरपरName of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सेपानकपरम्पराf. a flight of steps, staircase View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शिष्यपरम्पराf. a series or succession of pupils or disciples View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सीतारामपरलीकरm. (?) Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शिवपरn. (prob.) Name of a stotra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शिवापरmfn. "other than propitious", cruel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्लिष्टपरम्परितरूपकn. a continuous series of words having a double meaning (a kind of metaphor) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सोपानपरम्पराf. equals -paṅkti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सोपरmfn. with the under part of the sacrificial post View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्पर raṇa- etc. See column 3. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्परn. Name of particular sāman- days and the texts and sacrifices connected with them ( sparatva -tv/a- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्परणmf(ī-)n. saving, delivering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्परसेSee under root. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्परत्वn. spara
श्रीनिवासब्रह्मतन्त्रपरकालस्वाम्यष्टोत्तरशतn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्रोत्रपरम्पराf. successive oral report or hearsay (rayā-,"by successive oral communication") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्रुतितत्परmfn. having ears, hearing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्रुतितत्परmfn. intent on hearing or studying the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्त्रीपरm. "devoted to women", a libertine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुखपरmfn. fond of ease or comfort, intent on enjoyment (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शुक्लापरmfn. having a white hinder part (said of the body) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुपरमतुरिताf. (with Buddhists) Name of a deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सूपरसm. the taste or flavour of sauce View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शुश्रूषापरmfn. diligent or attentive in service View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सूत्पर(?) n. the distilling of spirituous liquor (= surā-saṃdhāna-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्वपरमण्डलn. one's own and an enemy's country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्वपरप्रतारकmfn. deceiving one's self and others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्वर्गपरmfn. desirous of heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्वार्थपरmfn. intent on one's own advantage, self-interested ( svārthaparatā -- f."selfishness") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्वार्थपरताf. svārthapara
स्वार्थसाधनतत्परmfn. intent upon it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
टापरName of a village, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तपरmfn. followed by t- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तपरकरणn. causing - to follow, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तर्परm. a bell hanging down from the throat of cattle, gaRa kapilakādi- () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परmf(ā-)n. following that or thereupon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परmf(ā-)n. having that as one's highest object or aim, totally devoted or addicted to, attending closely to, eagerly engaged in (locative case [ ]or generally in compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परm. 1/30 of an eye's twinkle View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परताf. scope, design, intention View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परताf. entire devotion or addiction to (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परत्वn. idem or 'f. entire devotion or addiction to (locative case) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परत्वn. aiming at, tending to (a-- negative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्परत्वn. "the state of following behind", inferiority View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
टोपरa small bag View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तूपरmf(- )n. Ved. hornless, (m.) a hornless goat etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तूपरmf(-)n. blunt (yūpa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपचारपरmfn. intent on service or politeness. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपकारपरmfn. intent on doing benefits or good, beneficent. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरmfn. (fr. upa-), situated below, under View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरmfn. posterior, later View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरmfn. nearer, approximate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरm. the lower stone on which the soma- is laid (that it may be ground by means of another stone held in the hand) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरm. the lower part of the sacrificial post View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरm. a cloud View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरm. region View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरच् Causal P. -racayati-, to construct, form, make, prepare, effect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरचितmfn. constructed, formed, made, prepared View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरध् Causal P. -randhayati-, to pain, torment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरज्य ind.p. having dyed or coloured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरज्यdarkening, obscuring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरक्षणn. a guard, outpost View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरक्तmfn. dyed, coloured, coloured red View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरक्तmfn. heated, inflamed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरक्तmfn. afflicted, distressed (especially by rāhu-;said of sun and moon), eclipsed etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरक्तmfn. influenced or affected by View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरक्तm. Name (also title or epithet) of rāhu-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरम्P. A1. () -ramati-, -te-, to cease from motion, stop ; to cease from action, be inactive or quiet (as a quietist) ; to pause, stop (speaking or doing anything) etc. ; to leave off, desist, give up, renounce (with ablative) commentator or commentary on ; to await, wait for ; to cause to cease or stop ; to render quiet : Causal -ramayati-, to cause to cease or stop ; to render quiet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरमm. cessation, stopping, expiration View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरमm. leaving off, desisting, giving up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरमm. death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरमणn. the abstaining from worldly actions or desires View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरमणn. ceasing, discontinuance.
उपरमत्वn. the state of ceasing from (all worldly desires and actions) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरम्भ्P. -rambhati-, to cause to resound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरन्ध्रn. a minor hole or cavity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरन्ध्रn. Name of a particular part of the body of a horse (probably a hollow place or depression on the flanks or ribs; see randhra- ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरञ्ज् Causal P. -rañjayati-, to influence, affect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरञ्जकmfn. dyeing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरञ्जकmfn. affecting, influencing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरञ्ज्यmfn. to be dyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरञ्ज्यmfn. to be affected or influenced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरसm. a secondary mineral (as red chalk, bitumen etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरसm. a secondary feeling or passion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरसm. a secondary flavour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतmfn. ceased, stopped, quiet, indifferent, patient etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतmfn. dead etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतmfn. ceasing to exist, disappeared, non-existing, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतmfn. withdrawn or retired from, left off, given up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतरासmfn. ceasing to play or dance. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतारिmfn. one whose foes are quiet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतारिmfn. having no foe, being at peace with all. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतशोणिताf. (a woman) whose menses have ceased View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतस्पृहmfn. one in whom desire has ceased, free from desire. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतातिind. (upa-r/a-) in the proximity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतातिind. a circumference View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतविषयाभिलाषmfn. one whose desire after worldly things has ceased. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरथ्याf. a side-street, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतिf. cessation, stopping View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतिf. death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरतिf. desisting from sensual enjoyment or any worldly action, quietism, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरत्नn. a secondary or inferior gem View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरवm. ( ru-), a hole (over which the soma- is ground;so called from its increasing the sound of the grindstones) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपरव() mfn. eclipsed, obscured, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ऊष्मपरmfn. followed by an ūṣman- sound See above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वंशपरम्पराf. family succession, lineage, descent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वायुपरमाणुm. a primary aerial atom View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वेदिपरm. plural Name of a country and people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विचारपरm. Name of a king, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विध्वस्तपरगुणmfn. one who detracts from the merits of another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विग्रहपरmfn. intent on war, engaged in fighting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यपरm. Name of a king of the vidyādhara-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विपथावपातपरताf. the inclination to go in wrong ways (or pursue evil courses) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विषयोपरमm. cessation or abandonment of sensual pleasures View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विश्वासपरमmfn. wholly possessed of confidence, thoroughly trustful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
व्युपरम्A1. -ramate- (Epic also ti-; ind.p. -ramam-;in augmented forms not separable from vy-upā-ram-below) , to leave off or pause variously ; to come to an end, cease ; to desist from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
व्युपरमm. pause, cessation, interruption View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
व्युपरमm. end, close (of day) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
व्युपरमम्ind. See vy-upa-ram- above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
व्युपरतmfn. rested, stopped, ceased, desisted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
यथापरम्ind. (prob.) as otherwise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
Apte Search
Results for para77 results
para पर a. [पॄ-भावे-अप्, कर्तरि अच्-वा] (Declined optionally like a pronoun in nom. voc. pl., and abl. and loc. sing. when it denotes relative position) 1 Other, different, another; see पर m also. -2 Distant, removed, remote; अपरं भवतो जन्म परं जन्म विवस्वतः Bg.4.4. -3 Beyond, further, on the other side of; म्लेच्छदेशस्ततः परः Ms.2.23;7.158. -4 Subsequent, following, next to, future, after (usually with abl.); बाल्यात् परामिव दशां मदनो$ध्युवास R.5.63; Ku.1.31. -5 Higher, superior; सिकतात्वादपि परां प्रपेदे परमाणुताम् R.15.22; इन्द्रियाणि पराण्याहु- रिन्द्रियेभ्यः परं मनः । मनसस्तु परा बुद्धिर्यो बुद्धेः परतस्तु सः ॥ Bg.3.42. -9 Highest, greatest, most distinguished, pre-eminent, chief, best, principal; क्षत्रात् परं नास्ति Bṛi. Up.1.4.11. न त्वया द्रष्टव्यानां परं दृष्टम् Ś.2; Ki.5.18; परतो$पि परः Ku.2.14 'higher than the highest'; 6.19; Ś7.27. -7 Having as a following letter or sound, followed by (in comp.). -8 Alien, estranged, stranger. -9 Hostile, inimical, adverse, -1 Exceeding, having a surplus or remainder, left over; as in परं शतम् 'exceeding or more than a hundred. -11 Final, last. -12 (At the end of comp.) Having anything as the highest object, absorbed or engrossed in, intent on, solely devoted to, wholly engaged or occupied in; परिचर्यापरः R.1.91; so ध्यानपर, शोकपर, दैवपर, चिन्तापर &c. -रः 1 Another person, a stranger, foreigner; oft. in pl. in this sense; यतः परेषां गुणग्रहीतासि Bv.1.9; Śi.2.74; see एक, अन्य also. -2 A foe, an enemy, adversary; उत्तिष्ठमानस्तु परो नोपेक्ष्यः पथ्यभिच्छता Śi.2.1; Pt.2.158; R.3.21. -3 The Almighty; तावदध्यासते लोकं परस्य परचिन्तकाः Bhāg.3.32.8. -रम् 1 The highest point or pitch, culminating point. -2 The Supreme Sprit; तेषामादित्यवज्ज्ञानं प्रकाशयति तत् परम् Bg.5.16. -3 Final beatitude; असक्तो ह्याचरन् कर्म परमाप्नोति पूरुषः Bg.3.19. -4 The secondary meaning of a word. -5 (In logic) One of the two kinds of सामान्य or generality of notion; more extensive kind, (comprehending more objects); e. g. पृथ्वी is पर with respect to a घट). -6 The other or future world; परासक्ते च वस्तस्मिन् कथमासीन्मनस्तदा Mb.6.14.55. Note-The acc., instr. and loc. singulars of पर are used adverbially; e. g. (a) परम् 1 beyond, over, out of (with abl.); वर्त्मनः परम् R.1.17. -2 after (with abl.); अस्मात् परम् Ś.6.24; R.1.66;3.39; Me.12; भाग्यायत्त- मतः परम् Ś.4.17; ततः परम् &c. -3 thereupon, thereafter. -4 but, however. -5 otherwise. -6 in a high degree, excessively, very much, completely, quite; परं दुःखितो$स्मि &c. -7 most willingly. -8 only. -9 at the utmost. (b) परेण 1 farther, beyond, more than; किं वा मृत्योः परेण विधास्यति Māl.2.2. -2 afterwards; मयि तु कृतनिधाने किं विदध्याः परेण Mv.2.49. -3 after (with abl.) स्तन्यत्यागात् परेण U.2.7. (c) परे 1 afterwards, thereupon; अथ तेन दशाहतः परे R.8.73. -2 in future. -Comp. -अङ्गम् the hinder part of the body. -अङ्गदः an epithet of Śiva. -अणुः See परमाणु; Bhāg.1.14.11. -अदनः a horse found in the country of Persia or Arabia. -अधिकारचर्चा officiousness, meddlesomeness. -अधीन a. dependent on another, subject, subservient; अन्नमेषां पराधीनं देयं स्याद्भिन्नभाजने Ms.1.54,83; H.1.119. -अन्तः final death. (-ताः) m. (pl.) N. of a people. -अन्तकः an epithet of Śiva. -2 a frontier. -अन्तकालः the time of death; ते ब्रह्मलोकेषु परान्तकाले परामृताः परिमुच्यन्ति सर्वे Muṇḍ.3.2.6. -अन्न a. living or subsisting on another's food. (-न्नम्) the food of another; परगृहललिताः परान्नपुष्टाः Mk.4.28. ˚परिपुष्टता being fed with the food of others; Y.3.241. ˚भोजिन् a. subsisting on the food of others; रोगी चिरप्रवासी परान्नभोजी परावसथशायी । यज्जीवति तन्मरणं यन्मरणं सो$स्य विश्रामः ॥ H.1.12. -अपर a. 1 far and near, remote and proximate. -2 prior and posterior. -3 before and beyond, earlier and later. -4 higher and lower, best and worst. (-रः) a Guru of an intermediate class. (-रम्) (in logic) a property intermediate between the greatest and smallest numbers, a species (as existing between the genus and individual); e. g. पृथ्वी which is पर with _x001F_1respect to a घट is अपर with respect to द्रव्य; द्रव्यत्वादिक- जातिस्तु परापरतयोच्यते Bhāṣā. P.8. -अभिध्यानम् self-conceit; high opinion for self or body (देहाभिमान); स्वयं पराभिध्यानेन विभ्रंशितस्मृतिः Bhāg.5.14.1. -अमृतम् rain. -अयण (अयन) a. 1 attached or devoted to, adhering to. -2 depending on, subject to. -3 intent on, solely devoted to or absorbed in (at the end of comp.); प्रभुर्धनपरायणः Bh.2.56; so मोह˚; अथ मोहपरायणा सती विवशा कामवधूर्विबोधिता Ku.4.1; अग्निहोत्र˚ &c. -4 connected with. -5 being a protector (त्राता); अबर्हाश्चरणैर्हीनाः पूर्वेषां वः परायणाः Mb.1.23.4. -6 leading or conducive to. -(णम्) 1 the principal or highest objest, chief aim, best or last resort; एतत् परायणम् Praśna Up.1.1; तपसश्च परायणम् Rām.1.21.1; Mb.12.179.12. -2 essence, sum. -3 Ved. going away, departure, exit. -4 firm devotion. -5 a universal medicine, panacea. -6 a religious order. -अर्थ a. 1 having another aim or meaning. -2 intended or designed for another, done for another. (-र्थः) 1 the highest interest or advantage. -2 the interest of another (opp. स्वार्थ); स्वार्थो यस्य परार्थ एव स पुमानेकः सतामग्रणीः Subhāṣ.; R.1.29. -3 the chief or highest meaning. -4 the highest object (i.e. sexual intercourse). -5 the supreme good (मोक्ष); ज्ञात्वा प्रजहि कालेन परार्थमनुदृश्य च Mb.12.288.9. -6 Something else. Hence परार्थता or परार्थत्व means 'being subsidiary to something else; परार्थता हि गुणभावः ŚB. on MS.4.3. -7 an object which is meant for another's use (Sāṅ. Phil.); सङ्घातपरार्थत्वात् त्रिगुणादिविपर्ययादधिष्ठानात् Sāṅ. K.17. ˚वादिन् a. speaking for another; mediator, substitute. -अर्थिन् a. striving for the supreme good. (-र्थम् -र्थे) ind. for the sake of another. -अर्धम् 1 the other part (opp. पूर्वार्ध); the latter half; दिनस्य पूर्वार्धपरार्धभिन्ना छायेव मैत्री खलसज्जनानाम् Bh.2.6. -2 a particular high number; i. e. 1,,,,,; एकत्वादिपरार्धपर्यन्ता संख्या T. S. -अर्धक a. One half of anything. -अर्ध्य a. 1 being on the farther side or half. -2 most distant in number; हेमन्तो वसन्तात् परार्ध्यः Śat. Br. -3 most excellent, best, most exalted, highly esteemed, highest, supreme; R.3.27;8.27;1.64;16;39; आबद्धप्रचुरपरार्ध्यकिंकिणीकः Śi.8.45. -4 most costly; Śi.4.11; श्रियं परार्ध्यां विदधद् विधातृभिः Bu. Ch.1.1. -5 most beautiful or lovely, finest; R.6.4; परस्परस्पर्धिपरार्ध्यरूपाः पौरस्त्रियो यत्र विधाय वेधाः Śi.3.58. -6 Divine: असावाटीत् सङ्ख्ये परार्ध्यवत् Bk.9.64. (-र्ध्यम्) 1 a maximum. -2 an infinite number. -अवर a. 1 far and near; परावराणां स्रष्टारं पुराणं परमव्ययम् Mb.1.1.23. -2 earlier and later. -3 prior and posterior or subsequent. -4 higher and lower. -5 traditional; पुनाति पङ्क्तिं वंश्यांश्च सप्त सप्त परावरान् Ms.1. 15. -6 all-including; परावरज्ञो$सि परावरस्त्वम् Mb.3.232. 18. (-रा) descendants. (-रम्) 1 cause and effect. -2 the whole extent of an idea. -3 the universe. -4 totality. ˚ज्ञ, ˚दृश् a. knowing both the past and the future; परावरज्ञो ब्रह्मर्षिः Mb.1.6.5. -अवसथ- शायिन् a. sleeping in another's house; H.1.12. -अहः the next day. -अह्णः the afternoon, the latter part of the day. -आगमः attack of an enemy. -आचित a. fostered or brought up by another. (-तः) a slave. -आत्मन् m. the Supreme Spirit. -आयत्त a. 1 dependent on another, subject, subservient; परायत्तः प्रीतेः कथमिव रसं वेत्तु पुरुषः Mu.3.4. -2 Wholly subdued or overwhelmed by. -आयुस् m. an epithet of Brahman; नाहं परायुर्ऋषयो न मरीचिमुख्या जानन्ति यद्विरचितं खलु सत्त्वसर्गाः Bhāg.8.1.12. -आविद्धः 1 an epithet of Kubera. -2 of Viṣṇu. -आश्रय a. dependent upon another. (-यः) 1 dependence upon another. -2 the retreat of enemies. (-या) a plant growing on another tree. -आसङ्गः dependence upon another. -आस्कन्दिन् m. a thief, robber. -इतर a. 1 other than inimical; i. e. friendly, kind. -2 one's own; विधाय रक्षान् परितः परेतरान् Ki.1.14. -ईशः 1 an epithet of Brahman. -2 of Viṣṇu. -इष्टिः N. of Brahman. -इष्टुका a cow which has often calved. -उत्कर्षः another's prosperity. -उद्वहः the Indian cuckoo. -उपकारः doing good to others, benevolence, beneficence, charity; परोपकारः पुण्याय पापाय परपीडनम्. -उपकारिन् a. benevolent, kind to others. -उपजापः causing dissension among enemies; परोपजापात् संरक्षेत् प्रधानान् क्षुद्रकान् अपि Kau. A.1.13. -उपदेशः advising others; परोपदेशे पाण्डित्यम्. -उपरुद्ध a. besieged by an enemy. -उपसर्पणम् approaching another; begging. -ऊढा another's wife. -एधित a. fostered or brought up by another. (-तः) 1 a servant. -2 the (Indian) cuckoo. -कर्मन् n. service for another. ˚निरतः a servant. -कलत्रम् another's wife. ˚अभिगमनम् adultery; वरं क्लैब्यं पुसां न च परकलत्राभिगमनम् H.1.116. -कायप्रवेशनम् entering another's body (a supernatural art). -कारः The deeds of the enemy; राज्ञः समीपे परकारमाह प्रज्ञापनैषा विबि- धोपदिष्टा Kau. A.2.1. -कार्यम् another's business or work. ˚निरतः 1 a benevolent man. -2 a slave, servant. -काल a. relating to a later time, mentioned later. -कृतिः an example or precedent, a passage descriptive of the doings of men; MS.6.7.26. -क्रमः doubling the second letter of a conjunction of consonants. -क्रान्तिः f. inclination of the ecliptic. -क्षेत्रम् 1 another's body. -2 another's field; ये$क्षेत्रिणो बीजवन्तः परक्षेत्रप्रवापिणः । ते वै सस्यस्य जातस्य न लभन्ते फलं क्वचित् ॥ Ms.9.49. -3 another's wife; तौ तु जातौ परक्षेत्रे Ms.3.175. -गामिन् a. 1 being with another. -2 relating to another. -3 beneficial to another. -गुण a. beneficial to another. (-णः) the virtue of another; परगुणपरमाणून् पर्वतीकृत्य नित्यम् Bh.2.78. -ग्रन्थिः joint (as of a finger); an articulation. -ग्लानिः f. subjugation of an enemy; आत्मोदयः परग्लानिर्द्वयं नीतिरितीयती Śi.2.3. -चक्रम् 1 the army of an enemy. -2 invasion by an enemy, one of the six itis q. v. -3 a hostile prince. -छन्द a. dependent. (-दः) 1 the will of another. -2 dependence. ˚अनुवर्तनम् following the will of another. -छिद्रम् a weak or vulnerable point of another, a defect in another. -ज a. 1 stranger. -2 coming from a foe. -3 inferior. -जनः a stranger (opp. स्वजन); शक्तः परजने दाता Ms.11.9. -जन्मन् n. a future birth. -जात a. 1 born of another. -2 dependent on another for livelihood. (-तः) a servant. -जित a. 1 conquered by another. -2 maintained by another. (-तः) the (Indian) cuckoo. -तन्त्र a. dependent on another, dependent, subservient. -तन्त्रम् (a common group of) subsidiaries belonging to another; जैमिनेः परतन्त्रापत्तेः स्वतन्त्रप्रतिषेधः स्यात् MS.12.1.8. (see तन्त्रम्). -तर्ककः a suppliant, beggar; Dānasāgara, Bibliotheca Indica, 274, Fascicule 1, p.15; also परतर्कुक. -तल्पगामिन् m. One who approaches another man's wife. -तार्थिकः The adherent of another sect. -दाराः m. (pl.) another's wife; ˚अभिगमनम्, ˚अभिमर्षः Adultery. -दारिन् m. an adulterer. -दुःखम् the sorrow or grief of another; विरलः परदुःखदुःखितो जनः; महदपि परदुःखं शीतलं सम्यगाहुः V.4.13. -देवता the Supreme Being. -देशः a hostile or foreign country. -देशिन् m. a foreigner. -द्रोहिन्, -द्वेषिन् a. hating others, hostile, inimical. -धनम् another's property. -धर्मः 1 the religion of another; स्वधर्मे निधनं श्रेयः परधर्मो भयावहः Bg.3.35. -2 another's duty or business. -3 the duties of another caste; परधर्मेण जीवन् हि सद्यः पतति जातितः Ms.1.97. -ध्यानम् absolute meditation or contemplation; ध्येये मनो निश्चलतां याति ध्येयं विचिन्तयत् । यत् तद् ध्यानं परं प्रोक्तं मुनिभिर्ध्यानचिन्तकैः ॥ Garuḍa P. -निपातः the irregular posteriority of a word in a compound; i. e. भूतपूर्वः where the sense is पूर्वं भूतः; so राजदन्तः, अग्न्याहितः &c. -निर्वाणम् the highest निर्वाण; (Buddh.). -पक्षः the side or party of an enemy. -पदम् 1 the highest position, eminence. -2 final beatitude. -परिग्रह a. see पराधीन; स्ववीर्यविजये युक्ता नैते पर- परिग्रहाः Mb.7.144.22. -हः another's property (as wife &c); यथा बीजं न वप्तव्यं पुंसा परपरिग्रहे Ms.9.42-3. -परिभवः humiliation or injury suffered from others. -पाकनिवृत्त a. One who does not depend on others for his sustenance and performs the पञ्चयज्ञs faultlessly and takes food in his own house. -पाकरत a. one who depends upon others for his sustenance but performs the usual ceremonies before cooking; पञ्चयज्ञान् स्वयं कृत्वा परान्नमुपजीवति । सततं प्रातरुत्थाय परपाकरतस्तु सः ॥ -पाकरुचिः having a liking for others' food; परपाकरुचिर्न स्यादनिन्द्या- मन्त्रणादृते Y.1.112. -पिण्डः another's food, food given by another. ˚अद् a., ˚भक्षक a. one who eats another's food or one who feeds at the cost of another; यादृशो$हं परपिण्डभक्षको भूतः Mk.8.25/26; (-m.) a servant. ˚रत a. feeding upon another's food; परपिण्डरता मनुष्याः Bh. -पुरञ्जयः a conqueror, hero. -पुरुषः 1 another man, a stranger. -2 the Supreme Spirit, Viṣṇu. -3 the husband of another woman. -पुष्ट a. 1 fed or nourished by another. -2 Stranger. (-ष्टः) the (Indian) cuckoo. ˚महोत्सवः the mango tree. -पुष्टा 1 the (Indian) cuckoo. -2 a parasitical plant. -3 a harlot, prostitute. -पूर्वा a woman who has or had a former husband; Ms.3.166; पतिं हित्वा$पकृष्टं स्वमुत्कृष्टं या निषेवते । निन्द्यैव सा भवेल्लोके परपूर्वेति चोच्यते Ms.5.163. -प्रतिनप्तृ m. son of the great grand son. -प्रपौत्रः (see प्रतिनप्तृ). -प्रेष्यः a servant, menial, slave. -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit; cf. लीने परे ब्रह्मणि Bh. परे ब्रह्मणि को$पि न लग्नः Śaṅkara (चर्पटपञ्जरिका 7). -भागः 1 another's share. -2 superior merit. -3 good fortune, prosperity. -4 (a) excellence, superority, supremacy; दुरधिगमः परभागो यावत् पुरुषेण पौरुषं न कृतम् Pt.1.33;5.34. (b) excess, abundance, height; स्थलकमलगञ्जनं मम हृदय- रञ्जनम् जनितरतिरङ्गपरभागम् Gīt.1; आभाति लब्धपरभागतया- धरोष्ठे R.5.7; Ku.7.17; Ki.5.3;8.42; Śi.7.33; 8.51;1.86;12.15. -5 the last part, remainder. -भाव a. loving another. -भावः the being second member in a compound. -भाषा a foreign tongue. -भुक्त a. enjoyed or used by another; परभुक्तां च कान्तां च यो भुङ्क्ते स नराधमः । स पच्यते कालसूत्रे यावच्चन्द्रदिवाकरौ ॥ Brav. P. -भूत a. following, subsequent (as words). -भृत् m. a crow (said to nourish the cuckoo). -भृत a. nourished by another. -भृतः, -ता the (Indian) cuckoo; (so called because she is nourished by another i. e. by a crow); प्रागन्तरिक्षगमनात्- स्वमपत्यजातमन्यैर्द्विजैः परभृताः खलु पोषयन्ति Ś.5.22; Ku.6.2; R.9.43; Ś.4.1. -भतम् 1 another's opinion. -2 different opinion or doctrine; heterodoxy. -मर्मज्ञ a. knowing the secrets of another. -मृत्युः a crow. -रमणः a married woman's gallant or paramour; स्वाधीने पररमणे धन्यास्तारुण्यफलभाजः Pt.1.18. -लोकः the next (or furture) world; परलोकनवप्रवासिनः प्रतिपत्स्ये पदवीमहं तव Ku. 4.1. ˚गमः, ˚यानम् death. ˚विधि funeral rites; परलोक- विधौ च माधव स्मरमुद्दिश्य (निबपेः सहकारमञ्जरीः) Ku.4.38. -वश, -वश्य a. subject to another, dependent, dependent on others; सर्वं परवशं दुःखं सर्वमात्मवशं सुखम्. -वाच्यम् a fault or a defect of another; प्रकटान्यपि नैपुणं महत् परवाच्यानि चिराय गोपितुम् Śi.16.3. -वाणिः 1 a judge. -2 a year. -3 N. of the peacock of Kārtikeya. -वादः 1 rumour, report. -2 Objection, controversy. -वादिन् m. a disputant, controversialist. -वेश्मन् n. the abode of the Supreme Being. -व्रतः an epithet of Dhṛitarāṣṭra. -शब्दः a word expressive of something else; परशब्दस्य परत्र वृत्तौ तद्वद् भावो गम्यते ŚB. on MS.7.2.1. -श्वस् ind. the day after tomorrow. -संगत a. 1 associated with another. -2 fighting with another. -संज्ञकः the soul. -सवर्ण a. homogeneous with a following letter (in gram.). -सात् ind. into the hands of another. ˚कृता a woman given in marriage. -सेवा service of another. -स्त्री another's wife. -स्वम् another's property; व्यावृता यत् परस्वेभ्यः श्रुतौ तस्करता स्थिता R.1.27; Ms.7.123. ˚हरणम् seizing another's property. -हन् a. killing enemies. -हित a. 1 benevolent. -2 profitable to another. -तम् the welfare of another; सन्तः स्वयं परहिताभिहिताभियोगाः Bh.
parakīya परकीय a. 1 Belonging to another; अर्थो हि कन्या परकीय एव Ś.4.22; Ms.4.21. -2 Stranger, hostile. -या Another's wife, a woman not one's own, one of the three main kinds of heroines; see अन्यस्त्री and S. D.18 et seq.; cf. also अप्रकटपरपुरुषानुरागा परकीया । सा च द्विधा । परोढा कन्यका च । कन्यकायाः पित्राद्यधीनतया परकीयता । Rasamañjarī. परंजनः parañjanḥ परंजयः parañjayḥ परंजनः परंजयः An epithet of Varuṇa.
parama परम a. [परं परत्वं माति-क Tv.] 1 Most distant, last. -2 Highest, best, most excellent, greatest; प्राप्नोति परमां गतिम् Ms.4.14;7.1;2.13. -3 Chief, principal, primary, supreme; सर्वथा ब्राह्मणाः पूज्याः परमं दैवतं हि तत् Ms.9.319. -4 Exceeding, extreme. -5 Adequate, sufficient; परमं यत्नमातिष्ठेत् स्तेनानां निग्रहे नृपः Ms.8.32. -6 Worst. -7 Higher than, superior to; न मन्ये वाणि- ज्यात् किमपि परमं वर्तनमिह Pt.1.11. -मम् The utmost or highest; the chief or prominent part; (at the end of comp.) consisting principally of, solely occupied with; कामोपभोगपरमा एतावदिति निश्चिताः Bg.16.11; Ms.6.96. -मम् ind. 1 A particle of assent, acceptance or agreement (well, very well, yes, be it so); ततः परममित्युक्त्वा प्रतस्थे मुनिमण्डलम् Ku.6.35. -2 Exceedingly, very much; परमक्रुद्धः &c. -Comp. -अक्षरम् the sacred syllable 'om' or Brahmā. -अङ्गना an excellent woman. -अणुः an infinitesimal particle, an atom; सिकतात्वादपि परां प्रपेदे पर- माणुताम् R.15.22; परगुणपरमाणून् पर्वतीकृत्य नित्यम् Bh.2.78; पृथ्वी नित्या परमाणुरूपा T. S; (a परमाणु is thus defined:-- जालान्तरस्थसूर्यांशौ यत् सूक्ष्मं दृश्यते रजः । भागस्तस्य च षष्ठो यः परमाणुः स उच्यते ॥ Tarka K., or less accurately:-- जाला- न्तरगते रश्मौ यत् सूक्ष्मं दृश्यते रजः । तस्य त्रिंशत्तमो भागः परमाणुः स उच्यते ॥) ˚अङ्गकः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -अद्वैतम् 1 the Supreme Spirit. -2 pure unitarianism. -अन्नम् rice boiled in milk with sugar. -अपमः the inclination of a planet's orbit to the ecliptic. -अर्थः 1 the highest or most sublime truth, true spiritual knowledge, knowledge about Brahman or the Supreme Spirit; इदं हि तत्त्वं परमार्थभाजाम् Mv.7.2. -2 truth, reality, earnestness; परिहासविजल्पितं सखे परमार्थेन न गृह्यतां वचः Ś.2.19; oft in comp. in the sense of 'true' or 'real'. ˚मत्स्याः R.7.4. Mv.4.3. -3 any excellent or important object. -4 the best sense. -5 the best kind of wealth. ˚दरिद्र really poor; Mk. ˚भाज a. partaking of the highest truth; Mv. ˚विद् a philosopher. -अर्थतः ind. truly, really, exactly, accurately; विकारं खलु परमार्थतो$ज्ञात्वा$नारम्भः प्रतीकारस्य Ś.4; उवाच चैनं परमार्थतो हरं न वेत्सि नूनं यत एवमात्थ माम् Ku.5.75; Pt.1.136. -अहः an excellent day. -आत्मन् m. the Supreme Spirit or Brahman; न च योगविधेर्नवेतरः स्थिरधीरा परमात्मदर्शनात् R.8.22; स्वर्गापवर्गयो- र्मार्गमामनन्ति मनीषिणः । यदुपास्तिमसावत्र परमात्मा निरूप्यते ॥ Kusum. -आनन्दः 'supreme felicity', Supreme Spirit. -आपद् f. the greatest calamity or misfortune. -आयु- धम् the wheel (चक्र); शूलैः प्रमथिताः केचित् केचित्तु परमायुधैः Rām.6.58.12. -आर्यः a Bodhisattva (q. v.). -इष्वासः an excellent archer. -ईशः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -ईश्वरः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 of Indra. -3 of Śiva. -4 the Almighty god, the Supreme Being. -5 N. of Brahman. -6 a universal monarch, sovereign of the world; see चक्रवर्तिन्. -ऋषिः a great sage. -ऐश्वर्यम् supremacy. -काण़्डः, -ण्डम् a very auspicious moment. -क्रान्तिः f. the sine of the greatest declination. -गतिः f. 1 any chief object or refuge (as a god). -2 final beatitude, emancipation. -गवः an excellent bull or cow. -गहन a. very myserious, profound. -तत्त्वम् the highest truth. -धर्मात्मन् a. very dutiful, virtuous. -पदम् 1 the best position, highest rank. -2 final beatitude; विष्णोः पदे परमे मध्व उत्सः Rv.1.154.5. -परम a. most excellent of all. -पुंस् the Supreme Spirit; N. of Viṣṇu. -पुरुषः, -पूरुषः the Supreme Spirit. -प्रख्य a. celebrated, renowned. -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit. -मुद्रा f. One of the poses of goddess त्रिपुरा. -रसः butter-milk mixed with water. -राजः a supreme monarch. -समुदय a. very auspicious or successful; परमसमुदयेनाश्वमेधेन चेष्ट्वा Mk.1.4. -सम्मत a. highly esteemed; much revered. -हंसः an ascetic of the highest order, one who has controlled and subdued all his senses by abstract meditation; cf. कुटीचक; कुटीचको बहूदकः हंसश्चैव तृतीयकः । चतुर्थः परमो हंसो यो यः पश्चात् स उत्तमः ॥ Hārītāsmṛiti. ˚परिव्राजकाचार्यः N. of Śaṅkarāchārya.
paramaka परमक a. Highest, most excellent, best &c.; also परमिक; चतुर्णामात्मजानां हि प्रीतिः परमिका मम Rām.1.2.11.
paramatā परमता 1 Highest rank, position; यद्यपि राजा परमतां गच्छति ब्रह्मैवान्तत उपनिश्रयति Bṛi. Up.14.11. -2 Highest aim or end.
paramataḥ परमतः ind. In the highest degree, exceedingly, very much.
parameṣṭha परमेष्ठ a. Superior, supreme. -ष्ठः 1 An epithet of Brahman. -2 A deity.
parameṣṭhin परमेष्ठिन् a Standing at the head, highest, chief; परमेष्ठिनां प्रभुः Bhāg.1.89.58. -m. 1 An epithet of Brahman. -2 Of Śiva. -3 Of Viṣṇu. -4 Of Garuḍa. -5 Of Agni. -6 Any spiritual teacher. -7 (with Jainas) An Arhat.
paraṃpadam परंपदम् 1 The abode of Viṣṇu. -2 Eternal felicity. -3 A high position.
parapara परंपर a. One following the other; परंपराणां भक्षिष्ये वानराणां मृतं मृतम् Rām.4.56.5. -2 Successive, repeated. -रः 1 A great-grandson. -2 A kind of deer. -रा 1 An uninterrupted series, regular series, succession; महतीयं खल्वनर्थपरंपरा K.13; कर्णपरंपरया 'from ear to ear, by hear-say'; परंपरया आगम् 'to be handed down in regular succession'. -2 A row, line, collection, assemblage (of regular things); तोयान्तर्भास्करालीव रेजे मुनिपरंपरा Ku.6.49; R.6.5,35,4;12.1. -3 Method, order, due arrangement; एवं परंपराप्राप्तमिमं राजर्षयो विदुः Bg.1.2. -4 Race, family, lineage. -5 Injury, hurting, killing. -Comp. -यात a. received by tradition. -वाहनम् an indirect means of conveyance (such as horse which draws the carriage). -सम्बन्धः an indirect conjunction; cf. P.VIII.1.24 com. -रम् ind. Successively, one after the other.
paraṃparāka परंपराक a. Immolating an animal at a sacrifice.
paraṃparīṇa परंपरीण a. 1 Obtained by succession or descent, hereditary; लक्ष्मीं परंपरीणां त्वं पुत्रपौत्रीणतां नय Bk.5.15. -2 Traditional.
paraṃparita परंपरित a. Continuous, forming a series.
paraṃtapa परंतप a. [cf. P.III.2.39] Annoying or vexing others, subduing one's enemy; Bg.4.2; यः कश्चन रघूणां हि परमेकः परंतपः R.15.7. -पः A hero, conqueror.
paraṃtapa परंतप a. Destroying foes (a hero).
parañjaḥ परञ्जः 1 An oil-mill. -2 The blade of a sword. -3 Foam. -4 A scymitar. -जा The sounds of instruments at festivals. -जम् Indra's sword.
paras परस् ind. (Rarely used by itself in classical Sanskrit) 1 Beyond, further, more than; परोरजः सवितुर्जातवेदः Bhāg.5.7.14. -2 On the other side of. -3 Far away, at a distance -4 With the exception of. -5 Ved. In future, afterwards. -Comp. -कृष्ण a. very black. -पुंसा Ved. a woman not satisfied with her husband (and therefore seeking for a paramour). -पुरुष a. higher than a man. -शत a. more than a hundred; स जवेन पतन् परःशतानां पततां ब्रात इवारवं वितेने Ki.13.26; Śi. 12.5. -श्वस् ind. the day after tomorrow. -सहस्र a. more than a thousand; परःसहस्राः शरदस्तपांसि तप्त्वा U. 1.15; परःसहस्रैः पिशाचैः Mv.5.17.
paraśaḥ परशः A kind of stone or gem, the touch of which is said to turn other metals, such as iron, into gold; perhaps the philosopher's stone.
paraspara परस्पर a. 1 Mutual; परस्परस्य मर्माणि ये न रक्षन्ति जन्तवः । त एव निधनं यान्ति वल्मीकोदरसर्पवत् ॥ Pt.3.186; परस्परां विस्मय- वन्ति लक्ष्मीमालोकयांचक्रुरिवादरेण Bk.2.5. -2 (pl.) Like one another; Mb.12. -pron., a. Each other, one another (used in the sing. only; often in comp.); परस्परस्योपरि पर्यचीयत R.3.24;7.38; अविज्ञातपरस्परैः अपसर्पैः 17.51; परस्पराक्षिसादृक्ष्यम् 1.4;3.24. Note:-The acc. and abl. singulars are often used adverbially in the sense of 'mutually', reciprocally', 'one another', 'by, from' or 'to one another'. 'against one another' &c.; see परस्परं भावयन्तः श्रेयः परमवाप्स्यथ Bg.3.11;1.9; R.4. 79;6.46;7.14,53;12.94. -Comp. -अदिन् a. consuming one another; परस्परादिनस्स्तेनाः (भवन्ति) Ms.12.59. -ज्ञः a friend. -विलक्षण a. mutually opposing; परस्पर- विलक्षणा गुणविशेषाः Sāṅ. K.36. -व्यावृत्तिः f. mutual exclusion. -स्थित a. standing opposite to one another. परस्मैपदम् parasmaipadam परस्मैभाषा parasmaibhāṣā परस्मैपदम् परस्मैभाषा 'A voice for another', one of the two voices in which verbs in Sanskrit are conjugated; आत्मनेपदनिमित्तहीनाद् धातोः परस्मैपदं स्यात्.
parastāt परस्तात् ind. 1 Beyond, on the other side of, further than (with gen.); आदित्यवर्णं तमसः परस्तात् Bg.8.9. -2 Hereafter, afterwards; परस्तादवगम्यते Ś.1. -3 Higher than. -4 Ved. From above. -5 Aside, apart.
paraśuḥ परशुः [परं-शृणाति, शॄ-कु डिच्च; cf. Uṇ.1.34.] 1 An axe, a hatchet, a battle-axe; तर्जितः परशुधारया मम R.11.78. -2 A weapon in general. -3 A thunderbolt. -Comp. -धरः 1 an epithet of Paraśurāma. -2 of Gaṇeśa. -3 a soldier armed with an axe. -मुद्रा a kind of pose in Tantraśāstra. -रामः 'Rāma with the axe', N. of a celebrated Brāhmaṇa warrior, son of Jamadagni and the sixth incarnation of Viṣṇu. [While young he cut off with his axe the head of his mother Reṇukā at the command of his father when none of his other brothers was willing to do so; (see जमदग्नि). Some time after this, king Kārtavīrya went to the hermitage of his father, and carried off his cow. But Paraśurāma, when he returned home, fought with the king and killed him. When his sons heard this they became very angry, and repaired to the hermitage, and on finding Jamadagni alone, they shot him dead. When Paraśurāma, who was not then also at home, returned, he became very much exasperated, and made the dreadful vow of exterminating the whole Kṣatriya race. He succeeded in fulfilling this vow, and is said to have 'rid the earth thrice seven times of the royal race'. He was afterwards, destroyer of the Kśatriyas as he was, defeated by Rāma, son of Daśaratha, though quite a boy of sixteen (see R.11.68- 91). He is said to have at one time pierced through the Krauñcha mountain, being jealous of the might of Kārtikeya; cf. Me.57. He is one of the seven chirajivins and is believed to be still practising penance on the Mahendra mountain; cf. Gīt 1. :-- क्षत्रियरुधिरमये जगदपगतपापं स्नपयसि पयसि शामतभवतापम् । केशव धृतभृगुपतिरूप जय जगदीश हरे ।]. -वनम् N. of a certain part of hell.
paraśva परश्व (स्व) धः A hatchet, a battle-axe; धारां शितां रामपरश्वधस्य संभावयत्युत्पलपत्रसाराम् R.6.42.
paratas परतस् ind. 1 From another; सन्तः स्वतः प्रकाशन्ते गुणा न परतो नृणाम् Bv.1.12. -2 From an enemy; यशस्तु रक्ष्यं परतो यशोधनैः R.3.48. -3 Further, more (than), beyond, after, over (often with abl.); यो बुद्धेः परतस्तु सः Bg.3.42. -4 Otherwise. -5 Differently. -6 Further, afterwards.
parathā परथा ind. (like अन्यथा) Otherwise; Cholachampūkāvya 5.5; P.4; P.13.
paratra परत्र ind. 1 In another world, in a future birth; परत्रेह च शर्मणे R.1.69; Ku.4.37; Ms.3.275;5.166; 8.127. -2 In the sequel, further or later on. -3 Hereafter, in future. -त्रम् Future world. -Comp. -भीरुः one who stands in awe of the future world, a pious or religious man.
paratvam परत्वम् 1 The following of another letter, posteriority. -2 Distinction, difference. -3 Remoteness. -4 Consequence, result. -5 Enmity, hostility. -6 Priority of place or time, proximity, one of the 24 guṇas of the Vaiśeṣikas.
paravat परवत् a. 1 Dependent upon or subject to another, ready to obey; सा बाला परवतीति मे विदितम् Ś.3.2; भगवन्- परवानयं जनः R.8.81;2.56; oft. with instr. or loc. of person; भ्रात्रा यदित्थं परवानसि त्वम् R.14.59. -2 Deprived of strength, rendered powerless; परवानिव शरीरोपतापेन Māl.3. -3 Completely under the influence of (another), not master of oneself, overpowered or overcome; विस्मयेन परवानस्नि U.5; आनन्देन परवानस्मि U.3; साध्वसेन Māl.6. -4 Devoted to.
paravattā परवत्ता Subjection to another, dependence; न हि सुलभवियोगा कर्तुमात्मप्रियाणि प्रभवति परवत्ता V.5.17.
atipara अतिपर a. One who has vanquished his enemies. -रः A great or superior enemy.
anapara अनपर a. Having no other or second, having no follower, sole; तदेतद् ब्रह्मापूर्वमनपरम् Bṛ. Up.2.5.19.
anuparata अनुपरत a. 1 Not dead. -2 Not stopped, uninterrupted.
apara अपर a. (treated as a pronoun in some senses) 1 Having nothing higher or superior, unrivalled. matchless; without rival or second (नास्ति परो यस्मात्); स्त्रीरत्नसृष्टिर- परा प्रतिभाति सा मे Ś.2.1; cf. अनुत्तम, अनुत्तर. -2 [न पृणाति संतोषयति पृ अच्] (a) Another, other (used as adj. or subst.). वासांसि जीर्णानि यथा विहाय नवानि गृह्णाति नरो$पराणि Bg.2.22. (b) More, additional; कृतदारो$परान् दारान् Ms.11.5. (c) Second, another Pt.4.37; स्वं केशवो$पर इवाक्रमितुं प्रवृत्तः Mk.5.2 like another (rival) Keśava. (d) Different; other; अन्ये कृतयुगे धर्मास्त्रेतायां द्वापरे$परे Ms. 1.85; Ks.26.235; Pt.4.6 (with gen.). (e) Ordinary, of the middle sort (मध्यम); परितप्तो$प्यपरः सुसंवृतिः Śi. 16.23. -3 Belonging to another, not one's own (opp. स्व); यदि स्वाश्चापराश्चैव विन्देरन् योषितो द्विजाः Ms.9.85 of another caste. -4 Hinder, posterior, latter, later, (in time space) (opp. पूर्व); the last; पूर्वां सन्ध्यां जपंस्तिष्ठेत्स्वकाले चापरां चिरम् Ms.4.93; रात्रेरपरः कालः Nir.; oft. used as first member of a genitive Tatpuruṣa comp. meaning 'the hind part,' 'latter part or half'; ˚पक्षः the latter half of a month; ˚हेमन्तः latter half of a winter; ˚कायः hind part of the body &c.; ˚वर्षा, ˚शरद् latter part of the rains, autumn &c. -5 Following, the next. -6 Western; पयसि प्रतित्सुरपराम्बुनिधेः Śi.9.1. पूर्वापरौ तोयनिधी वगाह्य Ku. 1.1; Mu.4.21 -7 Inferior, lower (निकृष्टः); अपरेयमि- तस्त्वन्यां प्रकृतिं विद्धि मे पराम् Bg.7.5. -8 (In Nyāya) Non-extensive, not covering too much, one of the two kinds of सामान्य, see Bhāṣā P.8. (परं = अधिकवृत्ति higher अपरम् = न्यूनवृत्ति lower or अधिकदेशवृत्तित्वं परं, अल्पदेशवृत्तित्वं अपरम् Muktā.) -9 Distant; opposite. When अपर is used in the singular as a correlative to एक the one, former, it means the other, the latter; एको ययौ चैत्ररथप्रदेशान् सौराज्य- रम्यानपरो विदर्भान् R.5.6; when used in pl. it means 'others', 'and others', and the words generally used as its correlatives are एके, केचित्-काश्चित् &c., अपरे, अन्ये; केचिद् रक्तपटीकृताश्च जटिलाः कापालिकाश्चापरे Pt.4.34; एके समूहुर्बलरेणुसंहतिं शिरोभिराज्ञामपरे महीभृतः Śi.12.45 some-others; शाखिनः केचिदध्यष्ठुर्न्यमाङ्क्षुरपरे$म्बुधौ । अन्ये त्वलङ्घिषुः शैलान् गुहास्त्वन्ये न्यलेषत ॥ केचिदासिषत स्तब्धा भयात्केचिदघूर्णिषुः । उदतारिषुरम्भोधिं वानराः सेतुनापरे Bk. 15.31.33. -रः 1 the hind foot of an elephant; बद्धापराणि परितो निगडान्यलावीत् Śi.5.48 (Malli. चरमपादाग्राणि). -2 An enemy (न पृणाति सन्तोषयति). -रा 1 Western direction, the west अपरां च दिशं प्राप्तो वालिना समभिद्रुतः Rām.4.46.18. -2 The hind part of an elephant. -3 Sacred learning, learning the four Vedas with the 6 Aṅgas. -4 The womb; the outer skin of the embryo. -5 Suppressed menstruation in pregnancy. -री Ved. The future, future times; उतापरीभ्यो मघवा विजिग्ये Rv.1.32.13. -रम् 1 The future, any thing to be done in future (कार्य); तदेतद्ब्रह्मापूर्वमपरमनन्तम् Bṛi. Ār. Up. (नास्ति अपरं कार्यं यस्य). -2 The hind quarter of an elephant. -रम् adv. Again, moreover, in future, for the future; अपरं च moreover; अपरेण behind, west of, to the west of (with gen. or acc.). [cf. Goth. afar; Germ. aber, as in aberglauben]. -Comp. -अग्नि (अग्नी dual) 1 the southern and western fires (दक्षिण and गार्हपत्य). -2 the last fire i. e. used at the funeral ceremony (˚ग्निः). -अङ्गम् one of the 8 divisions of गुणीभूतव्यङ्ग्य (the second kind of काव्य) mentioned in K. P.5. In this the व्यङ्ग्य or suggested sense is subordinate to something else; अगूढमपरस्याङ्गम्; अपरस्य रसादेर्वाच्यस्य वा (वाक्यार्थीभूतस्य) अङ्गं रसादि अनुरणनरूपं वा; e. g. अयं स रसनोत्कर्षी पीनस्तनविमर्दनः । नाभ्यूरुजघनस्पर्शी नीवीविस्रंसनः करः ॥ where शृङ्गार is subordinate to करुण. -अन्त a. living at the western borders. (-न्तः) 1 the western border or extremity, the extreme end or term. the western shore. -2 (pl.) the country or inhabitants of the western borders near the Sahya mountain; अपरान्तजयोद्यतैः (अनीकैः) R.4.53 Western people. दशार्णाश्चापरान्ताश्च द्विपानां मध्यमा मताः Kau.A.1.2. -3 the kings of this country. -4 death, Pātañjala Yogadarśana 3.22. ˚ज्ञानम् anticipation of one's end. -5 the hind foot of an elephant; मृदुचलदपरान्तोदीरितान्दूनिनादम् Śi.11.7;18.32. -6 Islander, inhabitant of an island (द्वीपवासिन्) कोट्यापरान्ताः सामुद्रा रत्नान्युपहरन्तु ते Rām.2.82.8. -अन्तकः 1. = ˚अन्तः pl. -2 N. of a song; अपरान्तकमुल्लोप्यं मद्रकं प्रकरीं तथा । औवेणकं सरोबिन्दुमुत्तरं गीतकानि च ॥ Y3.113; ˚अन्तिका N. of a metre consisting of 64 mātrās. -अपराः, -रे, -राणि another and another, several, various. -अपरम् ind. Further and further (उत्तरोत्तरम्); अहं हि वचनं त्वत्तः शुश्रूषुरपरापरम् Mb.5.136.14. -अर्धम् the latter or second half. -अह्न [fr.अहन् changed to अह्न P.II. 4.29, V.4.88.] the latter part of the day, the afternoon, closing or last watch of the day; Ms.3.278; अपराह्णशीतलतरेण शनैरनिलेन Śi.9.4; ˚तन, ˚ह्णेतन belonging to this time; ˚कृतं P.II.1.45. -इतरा the east. -कान्य- कुब्ज a. situated in or belonging to the western part of Kānyakubja. -कालः later period. -गात्रम् a minor limb (hand, foot etc.); कोपप्रसादापरगात्रहस्तः (सुप्तः क्षितौ) रावणगन्धहस्ती) Rām.6.19.1. -गोदानम् (also गोडनि or गोडानि) N. of a country to the west of Mahāmeru (according to Buddhistic ideas). -ज a. born later or at the end of the world. (-जः) the destroying fire. -जनः an inhaditant of the west, the western people. -दक्षिणम् ind. in the south-west (belonging to the तिष्ठद्गु class). -पक्षः 1 the second or dark half of the month. -2 the other or opposite side; a defendant (in law). -पञ्चालाः the western Pañchālas. -पर a. one and the other, several, various; अपरपराः सार्थाः गच्छन्ति P.VI.1.144. Sk. several caravans go; (अपरे च परे च सकृदेव गच्छन्ति). -पाणिनीयाः the pupils of Pāṇini living in the west. -प्रणेय a. easily led or influenced by others, docile, tractable. -भावः 1 being another or different, difference. -2 succession, continuation. -रात्रः [अपरं रात्रेः] the latter or closing part of night, the last watch of night (P.V.4.87); उत्थायापररात्रान्ते प्रयताः सुसमाहिताः Bhāg.8.4.24. ˚कृतम् P.II.1.45. -लोकः the other world, the next world. Paradise. -वक्त्रा, -क्त्रम् N. of a metre. -वैराग्यम् a kind of Vairāgya mentioned by Patañjali (दुष्टानुश्राविकविषयवितृष्णस्य वशीकारसंज्ञं वैराग्यम्). -सक्थम् the hind thigh. -स्वस्तिकम् the western point in the horizon. -हैमन a. belonging to the latter helf of winter (P.VII.3.11).
apara अपरता त्वम् 1 Being another or different (one of the 24 Guṇas); difference, opposition, contrariety, relativeness. -2 Nearness. -3 Distance, posteriority (in time or space).
aparatra अपरत्र adv. In another place, elsewhere; एकत्र or क्वचित्-अपरत्र in one place-in another place; in the first casein the second case.
aparathā अपरथा ind. In another manner; जलदकालमबोधकृतं दिशामपरथाप रथावयवायुधः Śi.6.41. ध्रुवं ज्ञाने दोषः कथमपरथा दुर्व्यवहृतिः Mv.3.36.
aparavat अपरवत् a. Like what follows.
aparaspara अपरस्पर n. [अपर-पर] 1 One after another, uninterrupted, continued (as applied to an action); अपरस्पराः क्रियासातत्ये P.VI.1.144; सुट् निपात्यते; ˚राः सार्था गच्छन्ति, सततमविच्छेदेन गच्छन्तीत्यर्थः Sk. -2 One another (अन्योन्य); अपरस्परसंभूतं किमन्यत्कामहैतुकम् Bg.16.8.
aparañj अपरञ्ज् (Used in pass. only) To be disaffected or discontented (with abl.); नयहीनादपरज्यते जनः Ki.2.49; K.287.
aparakta अपरक्त a. 1 Colourless, bloodless, pale; श्वासापरक्ताधरः Ś.6.6. -2 Discontented, dissatisfied, disaffected; चन्द्रगुप्तादपरक्ताः Mu.1.
aparatiḥ अपरतिः f. 1 Cessation (= अपरति q. v.); -2 Dissatisfaction.
aparavaḥ अपरवः 1 Contest, dispute (about the enjoyment of property); ˚उज्झित uncontested, undisputed (as possession of any thing). -2 Ill-repute.
aparaspara अपरस्पर a. [अ-परस्पर] Not reciprocal, not mutual; असत्यमप्रतिष्ठं ते जगदाहुरनीश्वरम् । अपरस्परसंभूतं किमन्यत्कामहैतुकम् ॥ Bg.16.8 (Mr. Telang renders ˚र by 'produced by union of male and female', caused by lust, where अपरस्पर must be supposed to be connected with अपरस्पर under अपर q. v.)
aparāparaṇa अपरापरण a. Destitute of descendants or offspring.
aparipara अपरिपर a. Ved. Not going by a tortuous course. Av.18.2.46.
āparapakṣīya आपरपक्षीय a. Belonging to the second half (of a month); कुर्यादापरपक्षीयं मासि प्रौष्ठपदे द्विजः (श्राद्धं पित्रोः) Bhāg.7.14.19.
upara उपर a. Ved. 1 Being below, under. -2 Posterior, later. -3 Nearer. -रः 1 The lower stone on which the Soma plant is laid that it may be ground by means of other stones (ग्रावन्); त्वचं पृञ्चन्त्युपरस्य योनौ Rv.1.79.3. -2 The lower part of the sacrificial post. -3 A cloud. -4 A region, direction.
uparatāti उपरताति ind. In the proximity, near to; विश्वाँ अर्य उपरताति वन्वन् Rv.7.48.3;1.151.5.
uparañj उपरञ्ज् 4 U. or in pass. To be red; to be eclipsed; उपरज्यते भगवान् चन्द्रः Mu.1. -Caus. 1 To colour, tint, dye. -2 To affect, grieve, distress.
uparakta उपरक्त p. p. 1 Afflicted, overtaken by calamity, distressed. -2 Eclipsed; K.314. -3 Tinged, coloured; द्विषद्द्वेषोपरक्ताङ्गसङ्गिनीः Śi.2.18. -क्तः 1 The sun or moon in eclipse. -2 Rāhu.
uparajya उपरज्य ind. Darkening, obscuring, तमश्चन्द्रमसीवेदमुपर- ज्यावभासते Bhāg.4.29.7.
uparañjaka उपरञ्जक a. 1 Dyeing. -2 Affecting, influencing.
uparakṣaḥ उपरक्षः A body-guard.
uparakṣaṇam उपरक्षणम् A guard, an out-post.
uparatnam उपरत्नम् [उपमितं रत्नेन उप गौणे वा] A secondary or inferior gem; उपरत्नानि काचश्च कर्पूरोश्मा तथैव च । मुक्ताशुक्ति- स्तथा शङ्ख इत्यादीनि बहून्यपि ॥ गुणा यथैव रत्नानामुपरत्नेषु ते तथा । किं तु किंचित्ततो हीना विशेषो$यमुदाहृतः ॥
uparathyā उपरथ्या A bye-road, minor road; तथा रथ्योपरथ्याश्च Rām.5.53.21.
uparam उपरम् 1 P. (Sometimes Ā. also) 1 To cease, end, terminate; संगतावुपरराम च लज्जा Ki.9.44,13.69; इत्युक्त्वो- परराम; युद्धमुपारमत् ceased &c. -2 To cease or desist from, stop (oft. with pres, part.); व्यापादयन्नोपरराम Pt. 1; or with abl.; Bg.2.35; Bk.8.54;9.51; or with inf.; Ki.4.17; or by itself; Bk.8.55. -3 To be quiet or calm; यत्रोपरमते चित्तम् Bg.6.2. -4 To await, wait for; Śat Br.2.2.1-2;3.8.2-29. -5 To make quiet (= Caus). -Caus. To cause to cease, stop, make quiet or still.
uparata उपरत p. p. 1 Stopped, ceased; उपरतान्यस्मिन् कुले व्रतानि Mbh. on P.I.4.11; रजस्युपरते Ms.5.66. -2 Dead; अद्य दशमो मासस्तातस्योपरतस्य Mu.4. -3 Withdrawn or retired from; रणात्, कलहात् &c. भयाद्रणादुपरतम् Bg.2.34. -4 One who is disgusted with the world and has retired from it. -Comp. -अरि a. having no foe. -कर्मन् a. ceasing from works, not relying on worldly acts. -विषयामिलाष a. one who has renounced all desire for worldly things. -शोणिता (a woman) whose menses have ceased. -स्पृह a. void of desire, indifferent to worldly attachments or possessions.
uparatiḥ उपरतिः f. 1 Ceasing, stopping. -2 Death. -3 Abstaining from sexual enjoyment. -4 Indifference. -5 Abstaining from prescribed acts; the conviction that ceremonial acts are futile and ceasing to rely on them. -6 Intellect.
upara उपर (रा) मः 1 Ceasing, stopping; ending; भवप्रवाहोप- रमं पदाम्बुजम् Bhāg.1.8.36. -2 Abstaining from, giving up. -3 Death.
uparamaṇam उपरमणम् 1 Abstaining from sexual pleasures. -2 Refraining from ceremonial acts. -3 Ceasing, stopping.
uparambh उपरम्भ् P. To cause to resound; जातहर्ष उपरम्भति विश्वम् Bhāg.1.35.12.
uparavaḥ उपरवः A sort of hole used in the extraction of Soma juice (सोमाभिषबाङ्गो गर्ताकारो देशभेदः); name of certain holes which increase the sound of the stones when Soma juice is being extracted); cf. also पीठपादचतुष्टयाकारो बाहुमात्रो गर्तभेद उपरवः । ŚB. on MS.11.4.52.
uparasaḥ उपरसः 1 A secondary mineral, (red chalk, bitumen, माक्षिक, शिलाजित &c). -2 A secondary passion or feeling. -3 A subordinate flavour.
auparaidhikaḥ औपरैधिकः A staff made of the wood of the Pilu tree.
karpara कर्परः 1 An iron sauce-pan, a frying-pan. -2 A pot or vessel in general (as of a potter). -3 A pot-sherd, piece of a broken jar; as in घटकर्पर; जीयेय येन कविना यमकैः परेण तस्मै वहेयमुदकं घटकर्परेण Ghaṭ.22. -4 The skull. -5 A kind of weapon. -6 A back-bone; न्यञ्चत्कर्परकूर्म Māl.5.22. -रम् A pot, pot-sherd.
kūrpara कूर्परः 1 The elbow; Śi.2.19. -2 The knee.
kharpara खर्परः 1 A thief. -2 A rogue, cheat. -3 A beggar's bowl. -4 The skull. -5 A piece of a broken jar, potsherd. -6 An umbrella. -रम् = खर्परी q. v. खर्परीका kharparīkā खर्परी kharparī खर्परीका खर्परी A kind of collyrium.
ṭopara टोपरः A small bag.
para तूपरः Ved. A hornless beast, particularly a goat; तमसा ये च तूपरा अथो बस्ताभिवासिनः Av.11.9.22.
dvāpara द्वापरः रम् [द्वाभ्यां सत्यत्रेतायुगाभ्यां परः पृषो˚ Tv.] 1 N. of the third Yuga of the world; Ms.9.31; अष्टौ शत- सहस्राणि वर्षाणां मानुषाणि तु । चतुःषष्टिः सहस्राणि वर्षाणां द्वापरं युगम् ॥ Matsya P. -2 The side of a die marked with two points. -3 Doubt, suspense, uncertainty. -4 A kind of deity; द्वापरं शकुनिः प्राप धृष्टद्युम्नस्तु पावकम् Mb.18.5.21; N.13.37.
parātpara परात्परः The Supreme Being. -a. Supreme; परात्परं पुरुषमुपैति दिव्यम्.
paripara परिपरः A tortuous or round-about way; see अपरिपर.
pāraṃpara पारंपर a. Further, future. -री Regular succession, order.
pārpara पार्परः 1 A handful of rice. -2 Consumption (क्षयरोग). -3 Ashes. -4 A filament of Kadamba. -5 N. of Yama.
vyuparamaḥ व्युपरमः Cessation, stop, close; खरस्नायुच्छेदक्षणविहितवेग- व्युपरमः (v. l. व्युपशमः) Māl.5.34.
vyuparata व्युपरत p. p. Rested, stopped; अन्तःप्राणावरोधव्युपरतसकल- ज्ञानरुद्धेन्द्रियस्य Mk.1.1.
sūtparam सूत्परम् The distillation of sprituous liquor.
Macdonell Vedic Search
Results for para6 results
para pár-a, a. farther, ii. 12, 8; higher, x. 15, 1; remote, x. 15, 10 [pṛ pass].
parama para-má, spv. a. farthest, iv. 50, 3; x. 14, 8; 129, 7; highest, i. 154, 5. 6; ii. 35, 14; iv. 50, 4.
paras par-ás, adv. far away, ii. 35, 6; beyond, x. 129, 1. 2.
paraṣtād paráṣ-tād, adv. from afar, vi. 54, 9; above, x. 129, 5.
upara úpa-ra, cpv. a. later, x. 15, 2 [Av. upara ‘upper’, Gk. ὕπερο-ς ‘pestle’, Lat. s-uperu-s ‘upper’].
ekapara eka-pará, a. too high by one, x. 34, 2.
Macdonell Search
Results for para70 results
para a. [leading beyond: √ 2. pri], 1. of place: farther, than (ab.); remoter, ulterior; opposite (shore); next (life); 2. of time: past, previous; future, subsequent; following (ab.); latest, extreme (age), high (time); 3. of amount: exceeding, more than (ab., --°ree;); remaining over; 4. of sequence: following, coming next after (ab., --°ree;); repeated: each successive; 5. of degree: superior, higher, better, worse, than (ab.; rarely --°ree;); supreme, pre-eminent, best; utmost, deepest, greatest; 6. of range: transcending (ab.); 7. of relation: other; alien, strange, hostile; different, from (ab.); m. descendant; stranger; adversary, foe, enemy; universal soul, the Absolute; n. remotest distance; height, summit, acme; supreme bliss; extreme limit (--°ree;); further or wider meaning of a word (--°ree;, a. synonymous with); chief aim, main thing: --°ree;, a. having -as the main thing=intent on, absorbed in, deeply affected with, mainly consisting in, chiefly meant for, altogether based on; -m, ad. afterwards, subsequently; beyond, after (ab.); highly, excessively; completely; at the most; nothing but, only; however, but; atah param, beyond that; after that; next; hereafter; still further; itah param, henceforth; tatah or tatas ka --, id.; thereupon; na½asmât param, no more of that, enough; na param - api, not only--but also; na param--yâvat, not only--but even; yadi param, if at all, perhaps; param tu or kim tu, however, but; param na--api na, not only not--but also not.
parabrahman n. supreme Brahman; -bhâga, m. supreme state, pre-eminence: -tâ, f. high position, pre-eminence; -bhâgya½upagîvin, a. living on another's fortune; -bhûmishtha, a. abiding in a foreign country; -bhûshana, m., v. r. for -dûshana; -bhrita, (pp., nourished by others), m., â, f. Indian cuckoo: -maya, a. consisting altogether of cuckoos; -bhedana, a. foe-piercing.
paracintā f. thought for others; -kkhidra, n. another's failings or weak points; -gana, m. stranger; -tantra, a. dependent on another; dependent on (--°ree;): î-kri, make dependent; make over to another, sell.
paradāra m. sg. & pl. another man's wife; adultery; -dûshana, m. ruin of the foe, peace in which the enemy seizes the revenue of the country; -desa, m. another place; foreign country; enemy's territory; -dosha-gña, a. knowing the faults of others; -dravya, n. pl. goods of others: -½apahâraka, a. stealing others' property; -droha, m. hostility towards others: -karma-dhî, a. injuring others in deed or thought; -dhana, n. another's property; -dharma, m. law or duties of another or of another caste; another's peculiarity.
parahita n. welfare of others.
paraḥsahasra a. pl. more than a thousand.
paraḥśata a. more than 100; containing more than 100 verses.
parakaragata pp. passed into the hands of others.
parakathā f. pl. talk about others; -kara-gata, pp. being in the hands of another or others; -karman, n. service for others; -kalatra½abhigamana, n. adultery; -kârya, n. another person's business oraffair; -kâla, a. belonging to a later time, subsequent.
parakīya a. belonging to another or others; hostile.
parakṛta pp. done or committed by another; -kriti, f. act of another; analogous case, precedent; -kritya, n. another person's business or affair; a. belonging to the enemy's party, supporting the enemy's cause: -paksha, m. hostile party; -kshetra, n. another's field; another man's wife; -gata, pp. belonging to another; -gâmin, a. benefiting another; relating to another (adjective); -guna, m. pl. or °ree;--, other people's merits: -grâhin, a. recognising the merits of others; -geha-vâsa, m. sojourn in another's house; -glâni, f. laxity of the enemy.
parama spv. farthest, remotest, extreme, last; highest, chief, primary; su preme, transcendant; most excellent, best, greatest; worst; better, greater, worse, than (ab.); n. extreme limit; chief aim, main thing: only --°ree; a. amounting at the most to; wholly occupied with, doing nothing but, solely intent on, engrossed with: -m, ad. very well, yes (expressing assent); °ree;--, ad. extremely, exceedingly, greatly, very.
paramaka a. most excellent, supreme, highest, best, greatest; worst.
paramāṇu m. infinitesimal por tion, atom: -tâ, f. atomic nature, -kârana vâda, m. doctrine of atoms, Vaiseshika system.
paramanyumat a. deeply dis tressed; -marma-gña, a. knowing the secret designs of others.
paramapuṃs m. supreme soul, ep. of Vishnu; -purusha, m. id.
paramarṣi m. great sage.
paramaśobhana a. exceedingly beautiful; -samhrishta, pp. exceedingly rejoiced; -hamsa, m. ascetic of the highest order; universal soul; -½akshara, n. syllable om or the Absolute; -½a&ndot;ganâ, f. most excellent woman.
paramatā f. highest position, supremacy; summit, highest aim; -dâruna, a. very dreadful; -duhkhita, pp. deeply afflicted.
paramata n. opinion of others.
paramātman m. supreme or universal soul; -½âtma-tâ, f., -tva, n. abst. n.; -½ânanda, m. supreme joy; -½anna, n. (best food), rice boiled in milk; -½âpad, f. greatest misfortune; -½artha, m.highest or whole truth, true state of the case, reality: °ree;--, -tas, in., ab. in reality, -bhâg, a. possessed of the highest truth.
parameṣṭhin a. standing at the head or in the highest place, supreme; m. lord, ep. of various gods or divine beings.
parameśvara m. mighty or supreme lord, prince; God: -tâ, f., -tva, n. sovereignty, lordship.
parameṣvāsa m. excellent bowman; -½upâsaka, m. zealous Buddhist layman.
parapara a. one after another, successive: -m, ad. in regular succession; â, f. uninterrupted line, unbroken series, regu lar succession; mediateness: in. indirectly; (â)-prâpta, pp. handed down by tradition, -½âyâta, pp. id.
paraṃśakti f.: only in. with all one's might; to the best of one's ability.
paraṃtapa a. vexing the foe; N. of a prince of Magadha.
parapakṣa m. party of the enemy; -patnî, f. another's wife; -parigraha, m. another's property; another's wife; -pari bhava, m. humiliation of others; -parivâda, m. speaking ill of others; -pâka, m.another's food or table; -pinda, n. another's cake; -puram-gaya, a. conquering the city or cities of the foe; -purusha, m. another man, stranger; -pushta, (pp.) m. Indian cuckoo: â, f.; N. of a princess; -pushta-maya, a.(î) being a perfect cuckoo; -pûrvâ, f. woman having had another husband before, woman previously married: -pati, m. husband of a woman married before; -prayogana, a. useful to or benefiting others.
paras (V.) ad. [√ 2. pri: cp. tir-as] further, beyond, away, afar; in future, later; prp. with ac. beyond, more than; with in., id.; without; with ab. beyond, except.
parasevā f. service of others.
parasmaipada n. (word for an other), transitive form, personal endings of the active (gr.).
paraspara a.: ac. each other; in. by or with each other; g. of each other; °ree;--, -tas, -m, ad. each other, mutually; -gña, a. knowing one another, intimate; -vyâvritti, f. mutual exclusion; -sthita, pp.standing op posite each other; -½âdin, a. devouring one another; -½amisha-tâ, f. condition of being one another's prey; -½âsraya, m. mutual de pendence, petitio principii; a. mutual; -½upa-kâra, m. mutual benefit.
parastarām ad. further.
parastāt ad. prp. with g. afar, fur ther, beyond; above, higher than; from above, before, or behind; afterwards, later: (d) ava gamyata eva, what follows can be guessed.
parasthāna n. foreign country; strange place.
paraśu m. axe, hatchet: (u)-mát, a. provided with an axe; -râma, m. Râma with the axe, ep. of Râma, son of Gamadagni.
parasva n. sg. & pl. property of others: -½âdâyin, a. appropriating the property of others.
paraśvadha m. axe, hatchet.
paraśvas ad. day after to-morrow.
para f. absoluteness; highest degree.
paratara cpv. greater, more.
paratas ad. 1.=ab. of para, a. highest; belonging to another; m. stranger; 2. further; henceforward, afterwards; high up; with ab. high above, over (of power or rank); after (of time); itas--paratas,here--there; before--after.
paratra ad. in the other world, here after; below (in a book): -bhîru, a. anxious about the next world.
paratva n. remoteness; posteriority; superiority, to (g.); intentness or emphasis on (--°ree;).
parayoṣit f. wife of another man; -ramana, m. second lover, paramour; -loka, m. the other or future world: -½arthin, n. seeking heaven; -vat, 1. ad. like a stranger; -vat, 2. a. depending on another; ready to obey (lc.); dependent on (in., g.); devoted to, a prey to (--°ree;): -tâ, f. readiness to gratify or obey, complaisance; -varga, m. party of others; -vasa, a. dependent on the will of another, subservient; overpowered by, a prey to (--°ree;): -m kri, overcome; -vâkya, n. fault of another; -vâda, m. talk of others, rumour; detraction; objection; -vîra-han, a. slayer of the warriors of the enemy; -vyâ kshepin, a. scattering foes; -vyûha-vinâsana, m. destroyer of the ranks of the enemy.
atatpara a. not intent on that.
aparathā ad. otherwise.
aparatva a-para-tva, ˚ka n. not being far (ph.).
aparatas apara-tas, ˚tra ad. elsewhere.
aparajaladhi m. western ocean.
aparakta pp. bleached, pale.
apara n. future; -kârya, n. later transaction.
apara a. hinder, further; later, fol lowing; western; to the west of (ab.); inferior; other; different from (ab.); opposite; strange, unusual: -m, ad. subsequently, in the future, after; moreover, besides; to the west of (ab.); m. elephant's hind foot.
aparasparasaṃbhūta pp. not produced one from the other.
aparaśuvṛkṇa pp. not felled with an axe.
aparapakṣa m. second half of the lunar month; -râ⃛rá, m., i, f. second half of the night; -vaktra, n. a metre.
uparati f. cessation; quiescence; death; -rama, m. cessation; relinquishment; decease: -na, n. cessation from (ab.), -tva, n. quiescence.
upara cpv. lower; later; nearer; m. the nether stone (on which Soma is pounded).
ekatatpara a. solely intent on; -tamá (or é-), spv. one among many; -tara, a. cpv. one of two (sts.=eka-tama); -tas, ad. =ab. of eka; from or on one side; ekatas-ekatas or anyatas, on the one side--on the other; here--there; (á)-tâ, f. unity, union, identity: -m api-yâ, be united with (in.); -tâna, a. intent on one object only (often --°ree;): -tâ, f. abst. n.; -tâla, a. having but one fan-palm; -tîrthin, a. inhabiting the same hermitage; -to-dant, a. having teeth in one jaw only; -tra=lc. of eka, one; in one place, together; -trimsá, a. thirty-first; -trimsat, f. (é-) thirty-one; -tva, n. unity; union; identity; singular (gr.); -m gam, be united with (in.); -d&asharp;, ad. simultaneously; some times; once upon a time, one day; -duhkha, a. having the same pains; -drisya, fp. alone worthy to be seen; -drishti, f. gaze directed to a single object, unaverted gaze; -devatyã, a. sacred to a single deity; -desa, m. some place; part; identical spot; -dhana, 1. n. one part of the property; 2. m. pitcher with which water is drawn for a certain rite; â, f. pl. (sc. âpas) the water drawn with it;3. a. having as the single, i. e. highest treasure, quite filled with (--°ree;); -dharma, a. homogeneous; -dharmin, a. id.; -dh&asharp;, ad. singly, simply; at once, together; continuously; -naksha trá, n. lunar mansion consisting of a single star, whose name occurs simply (without pûrva or uttara); -narâdhipa, m. emperor.
karpara m. bowl; pot; n. potsherd.
kūrpara m. elbow; sts. knee.
para a. unhorned; m. hornless goat.
dvāpara m. n. die or side of die marked with two points; also personified; third cosmic age (lasting 2000 years).
parāpara n. the further and the nearer; the earlier and the later (cause and effect); the higher and the lower, the better and the worse: -tâ, f. condition of being both genus and species; absoluteness and relativity; -tva, n. id.; priority and posteriority; absoluteness and relativity.
pāraṃpara a. relating to the other side: with loka, m. the other world: î-ya, a. traditional, handed down; -ya, n. uninterrupted succession, oral tradition: -krama½â gata, pp. or -½âgata, pp. handed down in regular succession.
bhṛtyaparamāṇu m. mean est atom of a servant=most humble servant; -bhâva, m. condition of a servant; -vritti, f. maintenance of servants.
mānapara a. excessively proud: â, f. N.; -parikhandana, n. loss of honour; -purahsaram, ad. with marks of honour; -prâna, a. valuing honour like one's life; -bha&ndot;ga, m. loss of honour, mortification, indignity; -bhadra-ka, m. kind of pavilion; -bhâg, a. receiving honour from (--°ree;); -bhrit, a. proud; -mahat, a. great in pride, exces sively proud.
śliṣṭaparaṃparitarūpaka n. continuous chain of ambiguities (a kind of metaphor); -rûpaka, n. ambiguity as a metaphor; -½âkshepa, m. expression of dissatisfaction by means of equivocation (rh.); -½ukti, f. ambiguous expression.
sparaṇa V. a. (î) saving, delivering √ spri].
svaparapratāraka a. de ceiving oneself and others.
Vedic Index of
Names and Subjects
Results for para70 resultsResults for para10 results
para āṭṇāra (‘Descendant of Atnāra ’) appears in the later Samhitās and the Brāhmanas as one of the ancient great kings who won sons by performing a particular sacrifice. In the śatapatha Brāhmana he is styled Hairanyanābha, de­scendant of Hiranyanābha,’ and in the śāñkhāyana śrauta Sūtra he is called Para Ahlāra Vaideha, a fact testifying to the close connexion of Kosala and Videha. A Yajña-gāthā, or ‘sacrificial verse,’ there cited mentions Hiraçyanābha Kausalya in connexion with Para.
paramajyā ‘Of supreme power,’ is understood by Ludwig in one passage of the Rigveda as the proper name of a great man among the Yadus. But it is doubtful whether the word is more than an epithet.
paraśu In the Rigveda and later denotes the axe of the woodcutter. Of its form we know nothing. A red-hot axe was used in a form of ordeal (Divya) applied in accusations of theft. See also Parśu.
paraśvan See Parasvant.
parasvant Denotes a large wild animal which Roth con­jectures to be the wild ass. It is mentioned in the Vrsākapi hymn of the Rigveda, twice in the Atharvaveda, and in the list of victims at the Aśvamedha (‘horse sacrifice’) in the Yajurveda Samhitās, in all of which passages the sense of ‘ wild ass ’ is satisfactory. More doubtful is the meaning of the word paraśvā{n) in the Kausītaki Upanisad, where the com­mentary explains it as ‘serpent.’ It is, of course, quite possible that the word has nothing to do with parasvant Buhler suggests connexion with the Pāli palāsāda, ‘ rhinoceros.’
upara Which, according to Pischel, means ‘ stone ’ in general, is the technical name of the stone on which the Soma plant was laid in order to be pounded for the extraction of the juice by other stones (adri, grāvan). The word is rare, occur­ring only thrice in the Rigveda, and once in the Atharvaveda.
aupara ‘Descendant of Upara,’ is the patronymic of Danda in the Taittirīya Samhitā.
para ‘Hornless,’ is a frequent description of animals intended for the sacrifice, especially of the goat, in the Atharvaveda and later.
daṇḍa aupara (‘Descendant of Upara’) is mentioned in the Taittirīya Samhitā and the Maitrāyanī Samhitā as having performed a certain rite.
dvāpara See Aksa and Yuga.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
Results for para70 resultsResults for para10 resultsResults for para88 results
para ṛṇā sāvīr adha matkṛtāni RV.2.28.9a; MS.4.14.9a: 228.15.
para ekena durdāśaṃ cid anyat AVP.8.1.6b. See enā para.
para kambūkāṃ apa mṛḍḍhi dūram AVś.11.1.29b. P: paraḥ kambūkān Kauś.63.7.
para kroṣṭāro abhibhāḥ śvānaḥ AVś.11.2.11d.
para so astu tanvā tanā ca RV.7.104.11a; AVś.8.4.11a.
para svapna mukhā kṛdhi Kś.25.11.20d. See parā svapna-.
paraḥsahasrā hanyantām AVś.8.8.11c.
paraḥsahasrān indrāya śB.13.5.4.13c.
paraiḥ pūrvaiḥ pitṛbhir (AVś. pūrvair ṛṣibhir) gharmasadbhiḥ RV.10.15.10d; AVś.18.3.48d.
paraiṇān etc. see parainān.
parainān (AVś. -ṇān) devaḥ savitā dadātu RV.10.87.18c; AVś.8.3.16c.
paraitu mṛtyur amṛtaṃ na aitu (śśṣMB. amṛtaṃ ma ā gāt) AVś.18.3.62b; śś.4.16.5a; SMB.1.1.15a. See apaitu mṛtyur.
para yoner avaraṃ te kṛṇomi AVś.7.35.3a.
para vyoma sahasravṛt TA.1.10.1b.
para nedīyo 'varaṃ davīyaḥ AVś.10.8.8d.
param akṣy utāvaram AVś.1.8.3d; AVP.4.4.9d.
param atra janmāgne tapaso nirmito 'si svāhā SMB.1.1.2.
para mṛtyo anu parehi panthām RV.10.18.1a; AVś.12.2.21a; VS.35.7a; śB.13.8.3.4a; TB.3.7.14.5a; TA.3.15.2a; 6.7.3a; Tā.10.46a; Apś.21.4.1a; AG.4.6.10; SMB.1.1.15c; HG.1.28.1a; MG.2.18.2a; N.10.7a. P: paraṃ mṛtyo Kś.21.4.7; Kauś.71.11,21; 72.13; 86.24; PG.1.5.12; Rvidh.3.7.6.
paramāc cit sadhasthāt RV.8.11.7b; SV.1.8b; 2.516b; VS.12.115b.
paramachado vara (KS. paramachad avarāṃ) ā viveśa TS.4.6.2.1d; KS.18.1d. See prathamachad, and prathamachado.
paramajyā ṛcīṣamaḥ (SV. -ma) RV.8.90.1d; AVś.20.104.3d; SV.1.269d; 2.842d.
paramaliṅgāya namaḥ Tā.10.16.
paramam iva janā viduḥ AVś.10.7.21b.
paramaṃ padam ava bhāti (VS.śB. bhāri) bhūri (TS. bhūreḥ) RV.1.154.6d; VS.6.3d; TS.1.3.6.2d; MS.1.2.14d: 23.17; KS.3.3d; śB.3.7.1.15d; N.2.7d.
paramāṃ cit parāvatam AVP.10.1.9e.
paramāṃ taṃ (TB.Apś. tvā) parāvatam AVś.6.75.2a; TB.3.3.11.3a; Apś.3.14.2a.
paramāṃ te parāvataṃ manaḥ siṣaktu yātudhāna svāhā AVP.2.82.5.
paramarṣīṃs tarpayāmi BDh.2.5.9.14.
paramasyāḥ parāvataḥ RV.5.61.1c; VS.11.72a; TS.4.1.9.3a; MS.2.7.7a: 83.5; 3.1.9: 12.7; KS.16.7a; 19.10; śB.6.6.3.4; Apś.16.9.12; Mś.6.1.3.28 (33). P: paramasyāḥ Kś.16.4.37.
paramasyāṃ parāvati AVP.1.94.3a; 12.2.6b; śś.8.16.1.
paramātmā me śudhyantām Tā.10.66.
paramātmā vyavasthitaḥ TA.10.11.2b; MahānU.11.13b.
paramāya namaḥ Tā.10.16.
paramāyā diśaḥ parameṣṭhinā rājñādhyakṣeṇa AVP.4.30.8b.
parame vṛkṣa āyudhaṃ nidhāya VS.16.51c; TS.4.5.10.4c; KS.17.16c.
paramebhiḥ pathibhiḥ AVś.19.47.7c; AVP.6.20.8a.
parameṇa dhāmnā dṛṃhasva VS.1.2; śB.1.7.1.11.
parameṇa pathā vṛkaḥ AVP.2.8.2a. See pareṇaitu pathā.
parameṇa paśunā krīyase (MS. krīyasva) VS.4.26; MS.1.2.5: 14.10; KS.2.6; 24.6; śB.3.3.3.8. See tasyās te sahasrapoṣaṃ.
parameṇota taskaraḥ AVś.4.3.2b. Cf. pareṇa steno.
parameṣṭhī chandaḥ VS.14.9; TS.4.3.5.1; MS.2.8.2: 107.18; KS.17.2; śB.8.2.3.13.
parameṣṭhī te 'dhipatiḥ TS.4.4.6.1.
parameṣṭhī tvā sādayatu divas (MS.KS. divaḥ) pṛṣṭhe jyotiṣmatīm (KS. adds vyacasvatīṃ prathasvatīṃ bhāsvatīṃ raśmivatīm) VS.15.58; MS.2.7.16: 99.12; KS.40.5; śB.8.7.1.21. P: parameṣṭhī tvā Kś.17.12.24. See next.
parameṣṭhī tvā sādayatu divas (TSṃS. divaḥ) pṛṣṭhe vyacasvatīṃ prathasvatīm (TS. adds vibhūmatīṃ prabhūmatīṃ paribhūmatīm; MS. adds bhāsvatīṃ raśmīvatīm) VS.15.64; TS.4.4.3.3; MS.2.8.14: 118.4; śB.8.7.3.14,18. Ps: parameṣṭhī tvā sādayatu divaḥ pṛṣṭhe Apś.17.3.8; parameṣṭhī tvā sādayatu Mś.6.2.2.8; 6.2.3.13. See prec.
parameṣṭhī devatā MS.2.13.14: 163.14; KS.39.4; Apś.16.28.1.
parameṣṭhī prajāpatiḥ AVś.9.3.11d; AVP.9.26.8b; ArS.3.1c. See tan mayi.
parameṣṭhī prajābhyaḥ TB.1.5.5.6b; Apś.8.21.1b.
parameṣṭhī bhavati gachati parameṣṭhitām adhipatir bhavati svānāṃ cānyeṣāṃ ca ya evaṃ veda AVP.11.16.14.
parameṣṭhī rakṣitā AVP.10.16.10.
parameṣṭhī rakṣohā tigmas tigmaśṛṅgaḥ AVP.4.8.13a.
parameṣṭhin saṃ nahyasva AVP.10.14.9.
parameṣṭhinā mṛtyum KS.35.15.
parameṣṭhinaṃ tarpayāmi BDh.2.5.9.5.
parameṣṭhine svāhā śB.12.6.1.3; Tā.10.67.2; MahānU.19.2.
parameṣṭhy adhipatir mṛtyur gandharvaḥ TS.3.4.7.2.
parameṣṭhy abhidhītaḥ VS.8.54.
parameṣṭhy asi paramāṃ mā śriyaṃ gamaya ApMB.2.18.1 (ApG.7.19.7).
paraś cit putrakā saty upakūlaṃ pitāyati JB.3.247.
paras tarda parastaram AVP.5.20.1b.
paras tṛtīyād uta vā caturthāt JB.3.385b.
paras tā bhagavo vapa NīlarU.13d. See parā tā.
parasmai va tvaṃ cara AVP.12.2.6a.
parasmin dhāmann ṛtasya RV.1.43.9b.
paraspā no vareṇyaḥ RV.8.61.15b; AVP.3.35.3b.
paraspā ma edhi MS.1.5.2: 67.15; 1.5.8: 76.14; KS.6.9; Apś.6.16.12.
parastād yaśo guhāsu mama MahānU.6.8a.
paraśuṃ cid vi tapati RV.3.53.22a.
paraśur na druhaṃtaraḥ RV.1.127.3c; SV.2.1165c.
paraśur vediḥ paraśur naḥ svasti AVś.7.28.1b. See parśur vediḥ.
parasvantaṃ hataṃ vidat RV.10.86.18b; AVś.20.126.18b.
paraśveva ni vṛścasi RV.1.130.4g.
parasyā adhi saṃvataḥ RV.8.75.15a; VS.11.71a; TS.2.6.11.3a; 4.1.9.2a; MS.2.7.7a: 83.3; 3.1.9: 12.6; KS.7.17; 16.7a; 19.10; JB.1.65a; śB.6.6.3.1; 12.4.4.3a; Apś.16.9.11; Mś.6.1.3.28 (33). P: parasyāḥ Kś.16.4.36.
parau-parāv ārpito aṅge-aṅge AVP.1.70.4b. Cf. aṅge-aṅga ārpita.
apara nānuvidyate # AVś.19.50.4b. See pred divā.
aparapakṣāḥ purīṣam # TB.3.10.4.1; TA.4.19.1.
utāpara tuvijāta bravāma # RV.2.28.8b.
uttarāparasyāṃ etc. # see uttarapūrvasyāṃ etc.
uparaṃsyate svāhā # TS.7.1.19.1; KSA.1.10.
uparatāya svāhā # TS.7.1.19.1; KSA.1.10; 5.1.
uparavāś ca me 'dhiṣavaṇe ca me # TS.4.7.8.1. See under adhiṣavaṇe.
dakṣiṇāparasyāṃ diśy avisarpī narakaḥ, tasmān naḥ paripāhi # TA.1.19.1.
parāparaitā vasuvid vo astu # AVś.18.4.48c.
punarbhuvāpara patiḥ # AVś.9.5.28b; AVP.8.19.11b.
pūrvāpara carato māyayaitau # RV.10.85.18a; AVś.7.81.1a; 13.2.11a; 14.1.23a; MS.4.12.2a: 181.3; TB.2.7.12.2a; 8.9.3a. P: pūrvāparam Mś.5.1.10.17; Kauś.75.6; 79.28. Cf. Kauś.24.18.
pratyādāyāpara iṣvā # AVś.10.1.27b. Read pratyādhāyā-.
brahmāpara yujyatāṃ brahma pūrvam # AVś.14.1.64a. P: brahmāparam Kauś.77.2,20; 79.28,32.
mārgaśīrṣapauṣamāghāparapakṣeṣu tisro 'ṣṭakāḥ # Kauś.141.24cd.
yathāpara na māsātai # AVś.18.2.38b--44b,45c.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"para" has 132 results
para(l)subsequent,as opposed to पूर्व or prior the word is frequently used in grammar in connection with a rule or an operation prescribed later on in a grammar treatise; confer, compare विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; ( 2 ) occurring after ( something ); confer, compare प्रत्ययः परश्च P. III. 1.1 and 2; confer, compare also तत् परस्वरम् T.Pr. XXI.2.(3)The word पर is sometimes explained in the sense of इष्ट or desired, possibly on the analogy of the meaning श्रेष्ठ possessed by the word. This sense is given to the word पर in the rule विप्रातिषेधे परं कार्यं with a view to apply it to earlier rules in cases of emergency; confer, compare विप्रतिषेधे परं यदिष्टं तद्भवति M.Bh. on I.1.3.Vārt, 6; परशब्दः इष्टवाची M.Bh. on I. 2.5, I. 4.2. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7; II. 1.69 et cetera, and others
kalāparatnaa commentary on the kāraka portion of the Kalāpa grammar ascribed to the famous commentator Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti..
taparakaraṇaaddition of the mute letter त् after a vowel to signify the inclusion of only such varieties of the vowel as take the same time for their utterance as the vowel marked with त्; confer, compare P. I. 1.70. See त्.
paraṃkāryatvaor परंकार्यत्वपक्ष the view that the subsequent संज्ञा or technical term should be preferred to the prior one, when both happen to apply simultaneously to a word. The word is frequently used in the Mahaabhaasya as referring to the reading आ काडारात् परं कार्यम् which is believed to have been an alternative reading to the reading अा कडारादेका संज्ञा;confer, compare ननु च यस्यापि परंकार्यत्वं तेनापि परग्रहणं कर्तव्यम्; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4.1; also भवेदेकसंज्ञाधिकारे सिद्धम् | परंकार्यत्वे तु न सिद्ध्यति: M.Bh. on II. 1.20, II.2.24.
parakramaa term used in the Praatisaakhya works for'doubling' of a consonant; | confer, compare सान्तःस्थादौ धारयन्तः परक्रमम् | Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XIV. 23.
paragrahaṇathe use of the word पर;insertion of the word पर in a rule; confer, compare तेनापि परग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् : M.Bh. on I.4.1; confer, compare also परग्रहृणमनर्थकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.2.
paratvaposteriority; mention afterwards; the word is frequently used in works on grammar in connection with a rule which is mentioned in the treatise after another rule; the posterior rule is looked upon as stronger than the prior one, and is given priority in application when the two rules come in conflict although technically they are equally strong: confer, compare परत्वादल्लोप: ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.4 Vaart 7; 'परत्वाच्छीभाव: I. 1.11 et cetera, and others
paratvanyāyaapplication of the later rule before the former one, according to the dictum laid down by Paanini in the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4.2 ; confer, compare परत्वन्यायो 'न लङ्कितो भवति Sira. Pari. 84,
paranipātaliterallyplacing after; the placing of a word in a compound after another as contrasted with पूर्वनिपात . A subordinate word is generally placed first in a compound, confer, compare उपसर्जनं पूर्वम्; in some exceptional cases however, this general rule is not observed as in the cases of राजदन्त and the like, where the subordinate word is placed after the principal word, and which cases, hence, are taken as cases of परनिपात. The words पूर्व and पर are relative, and hence, the cases of परनिपात with respect to the subordinate word ( उपसर्जन ) such as राजद्न्त, प्राप्तजीविक et cetera, and others can be called cases of पूर्वनिपात with respect to the principal word ( प्रधान ) confer, compare परश्शता: राजदन्तादित्वात्परनिपात: Kaas. on P. II.1.39.
paranimittakacaused by something which follows; the term is used in grammar in connection with something caused by what follows; confer, compare परनिमित्तकोजादेश: पूर्वविधिं प्रति न स्थानिवत् S. K, on अचः परस्मिन्पूर्वविधौ P.I.1.57.
paramaprakṛtithe most original base; the original of the original base; the word is used in connection with a base which is not a direct base to which an affix is added, but which is a remote base;confer, compare अापत्यो वा गेात्रम् | परमप्रकृतश्च अापत्यः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.IV.1.89; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). om IV.1.93,98,163.
paramāṇua time-unit equal to one-half of the unit called अणु, which forms one-half of the unit called मात्रा which is required for the purpose of the utterance of a consonant; confer, compare परमाणु अर्धाणुमात्रा V. Pr.I.61. परमाणु, in short, is the duration of very infinitesimal time equal to the pause between two individual continuous sounds. The interval between the utterances of two consecutive consonants is given to be equivalent to one Paramanu; confer, compare वर्णान्तरं परमाणु R.T.34.
pararūpathe form of the subsequent letter (परस्य रूपम्). The word is used in grammar when the resultant of the two coalescing vowels ( एकादेश ) is the latter vowel itself, as for instance ए in प्रेजते ( प्र+एजते ); confer, compare एङि. पररूपम् P.VI.1.94.
paravalliṅgatāpossession of the gender of the final member of a compound word, which, in tatpurusa compounds, is the second of the two or the 1ast out of many; confer, compare परवल्लिङ्गद्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयो: (P. II.4 26) इति परवाल्लिङ्गता यथा स्यात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.V.4.68.
paravipratiṣedhathe conflict between two rules (by occurrence together) when the latter prevails over the former and takes place by. Virtue of the dictum विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P.I. 4.2; confer, compare कथं ये परविप्रतिषेधाः M.Bh. on I.4.2.
parasaptamīa locative case in the sense of 'what follows', as contrasted with विषयसप्तमी, अधिकरणसप्तमी and the like; confer, compare लुकीति नैषा परसप्तमी शक्या विज्ञातुं न हि लुका पौर्वापर्यमस्ति । का तर्हि । सत्सप्तमी M.Bh. on P.I.2. 49.
parasavarṇacognate of the latter vowel or consonant. The word is frequently used in grammar in connection with a substitute or आदेश which is specified to be cognate ( सवर्ण ) of the succeeding vowel or consonant: confer, compare अनुस्वरस्य यथि परसवर्ण: P.VIII. 4. 58.
parasparavyapekṣāmutual expectancy possessed by two words, which is called सामर्थ्र्य in grammar. Such an expectancy is necessary between the two or more words which form a compound: confer, compare परस्परव्यपेक्षां सामर्थ्र्यमेके P.II.1.1, V.4; confer, compare also इह राज्ञ: पुरुष इत्युक्ते राजा पुरुषमपेक्षते ममायमिति पुरुषोपि राजानमपेक्षते अहृमस्य इति | M.Bh. om II.1.1.
parasmaipadaa term used in grammar with reference to the personal affixs ति, त: et cetera, and others applied to roots. The term परस्मैपद is given to the first nine afixes ति, त:, अन्ति, सि, थ:, थ, मि, व: and म:, while the term आत्मनेपद is used in connection with the next nine त, आताम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare परस्मै परोद्देशार्थफलकं पदम् Vac. Kosa. The term परस्मैपद is explained by some as representing the Active_Voice as contrasted with the Passive Voice which necessarily is characterized by the Aatmanepada affixes. The term परस्मैभाष in the sense of परस्मैपद was used by ancient grammarians and is also found in the Vaarttika अात्मनेभाषपस्मैभाषयोरुपसंख्यानम् P. VI. 3.8 Vart.1 . The term परस्मैभाष as applied to roots, could be explained as परस्मै क्रियां (or क्रियाफलं) भाषन्ते इति परस्मैभाषाः and originally such roots as had their activity meant for another, used to take the परस्मैपद् affixes, while the rest which had the activity meant for self, took the अात्मनेपद affixes. Roots having activity for both, took both the terminations and were termed उभयपदिनः.
parasmaibhāṣaliterally speaking the activity or क्रिया for another; a term of ancient grammarians for roots taking the first nine personal affixes only viz. ति, तः... मसू. The term परस्मैपदिन् was substituted for परस्मैभाष later on,more commonly. See परस्मैपद a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The term परस्मैभाष along with अात्मनेभाष is found almost invariably used in the Dhaatupaatha attributed to Paanini; confer, compare भू सत्तायाम् | उदात्त: परस्मैभाषः | एघादय उदात्त अनुदात्तेत अात्मनभाषा: Dhatupatha.
pūrvāparapādaname given to the second pada of the second adhyaya of Panini's Asadhyayi which begins with the Sutra पूर्वापराधरोत्तरमेकदेशिनैकाधिकरणे P. II. 2.1.
raparawith the letter र inserted after it; the term is used in connection with the guna and vrddhi substitutes for ऋ. These substitutes are respectively अ and अा, which, by the addition of र्, always become अर् and अार्: cf उरण् रपरः P.I. 1. 51, confer, compare ऋकारस्य गुणवृद्वीं रेफाशिखा अरारावेवेति confer, compare also वृद्धिर्भवति गुणो भवतीति रेफशिरा गुणवृद्धिसंज्ञकोभिनिर्वर्तते; M.Bh. on P.VI. 4.121, VIII.2.42.
śabdparavipratiṣedhacl,. comparatively superior strength possessed by a word, which in the text of a particular sutra is later than another word, which is put in earlier in the Sutra. This शब्दपरविप्रतिषेधे is contrasted with the standard शास्त्रपरविप्रतिषेध which is laid down by Panini in his rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् and which lays down the superior strength of that rule which is put by Panini later on in his Astadhyayi: e. g. in the rule विभाषा गमहनविदविशाम्,it is not the word हन् although occuring earlier, but the word विश् occuring later in the rule, which helps us to decide which विद् should be taken confer, compareज्ञानार्तस्य सत्यपि विदरूपत्वे अर्थस्य भेदकत्वेन रूपवदाश्रयणात्प्रतिषेधाभावः | यद्यपि हन्तिना साहचर्ये विदेरस्ति तथापि शब्दपरविप्रतिषेधाद् विशिर्व्यवस्थाहेतुर्न हान्तिः ! Kaiyata on P. VII.2.18:confer, compare also, P.VI.1.158 V.12.
akārakanot causing any verbal activity; different from the kārakas or instruments of action such as the agent, the object, the instrument, the recipient (संप्रदान), the separated (अपादान) and the location, (अधिकरण) confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4.23, 29 and 5l and on II.3.1.
akṣarasamāmnāyaalphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 | sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ,ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.
agrathe original Samhita text as opposed to pratṛṇna ( प्रतृण्ण ) or padapāṭha, (पदपाठ) which is the recital of separate words.
atantraimplying no specific purpose: not intended to teach anything, अविवक्षित; exempli gratia, for example ह्रस्वग्रहणमतन्त्रम् Kāś and Si. Kau. on तस्यादित उदात्तमर्धह्रस्वम् P.1.2.32: confer, compare also अतन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः ( the use of तरप् does not necessarily convey the sense of the comparative degree in Pāṇini's rules) Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.33. This statement has been given as a distinct Paribhāṣa by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and Sākaṭāyana. The author of the Mahābhāṣya appears to have quoted it from the writings of Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and the earlier grammarians See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on अल्पाच्तरम् P. II.2.34.
adhikāragoverning rule consisting of a word (exempli gratia, for example प्रत्ययः, धातोः, समासान्ताः et cetera, and others) or words (exempli gratia, for example ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात्, सर्वस्य द्वे et cetera, and others) which follows or is taken as understood in every following rule upto a particular limit. The meaning of the word अधिकार is discussed at length by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on II.1.1, where he has given the difference between अधिकार and परिभाषा; confer, compare अधिकार: प्रतियोगं तस्यानिर्देशार्थ इति योगे योगे उपतिष्ठते। परिभाषा पुनरेकदेशस्था सती सर्वं शास्त्रमभिज्वलयति प्रदीपवत् । See also Mahābhāṣya on I.3.11, I. 4.49 and IV. I.83. The word or wording which is to repeat in.the subsequent rules is believed to be shown by Pāṇini by characterizing it with a peculiarity of utterance known as स्वरितोच्चार or स्वरितत्वेन उच्चारणम्. The word which is repeated in the following Sūtras is stated to be अधिकृत. The Śabda Kaustubha defines adhikāra as एकंत्रोपात्तस्यान्यत्र व्यापार: अधिकारः Śab. Kaus. on P.1.2.65. Sometimes the whole rule is repeated e. g. प्रत्यय: P.III.1.1, अङ्गस्य P.VI.4.1 समासान्ताः P.V.4.68 while on some occasions a part only of it is seen repeatedition The repetition goes on upto a particular limit which is stated as in असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22, प्राग्रीश्वरान्निपाताः P.I.4.56. Many times the limit is not stated by the author of the Sūtras but it is understood by virtue of a counteracting word occurring later on. On still other occasions, the limit is defined by the ancient traditional interpreters by means of a sort of convention which is called स्वरितत्वप्रतिज्ञा. This अधिकार or governance has its influence of three kinds: ( 1 ) by being valid or present in all the rules which come under its sphere of influence, e. g. स्त्रियाम् or अङ्गस्य; (2) by showing additional properties e. g. the word अपादान being applied to cases where there is no actual separation as in सांकाश्यकेभ्यः पाटलिपुत्रका अभिरूपतराः: (3) by showing additional force such as setting aside even subsequent rules if opposingular. These three types of the influence which a word marked with स्वरित and hence termed अधिकार possesses are called respectively अधिकारगति, अधिक क्रार्य and अधिक कार. For details see M.Bh. on I.3.11. This अधिकार or governing rule exerts its influence in three ways: (1) generally by proceeding ahead in subsequent rules like the stream of a river, (2)sometimes by jumps like a frog omitting a rule or more, and (3)rarely by proceeding backward with a lion's glance; confer, compare सिंहावलोकितं चैव मण्डूकप्लुतमेव च ।; गड्गाप्रवाहवच्चापि अधिकारास्त्रिधा मताः ॥
aniṅgyanot separable into two padas or words by means of avagraha; confer, compare संध्य ऊष्माप्यनिङ्ग्ये: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) V.41; confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IX.25, XIII.30. See इङ्ग्य below.
antaraṅgaa highly technical term in Pāṇini's grammar applied in a variety of ways to rules which thereby can supersede other rules. The term is not used by Pāṇini himselfeminine. The Vārtikakāra has used the term thrice ( Sec I. 4. 2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8, VI.1.106 Vart.10 and VIII.2.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I) evidently in the sense of immediate', 'urgent', 'of earlier occurrence' or the like. The word is usually explained as a Bahuvrīhi compound meaning 'अन्त: अङ्गानि निमित्तानि यस्य' (a rule or operation which has got the causes of its application within those of another rule or operation which consequently is termed बहिरङ्ग). अन्तरङ्ग, in short, is a rule whose causes of operation occur earlier in the wording of the form, or in the process of formation. As an अन्तरङ्ग rule occurs to the mind earlier, as seen a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., it is looked upon as stronger than any other rule, barring of course अपवाद rules or exceptions, if the other rule presents itself simultaneously. The Vārtikakāra, hence, in giving preference to अन्तरङ्ग rules, uses generally the wording अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् which is paraphrased by अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गाद् बलीयः which is looked upon as a paribhāṣā. Grammarians, succeeding the Vārtikakāra, not only looked upon the बहिरङ्ग operation as weaker than अन्तरङ्ग, but they looked upon it as invalid or invisible before the अन्तरङ्ग operation had taken placcusative case. They laid down the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे which has been thoroughly discussed by Nāgeśa in his Paribhāṣendusekhara. The अन्तरङ्गत्व is taken in a variety of ways by Grammarians : (l) having causes of application within or before those of another e. g. स्येनः from the root सिव् (सि + उ+ न) where the यण् substitute for इ is अन्तरङ्ग being caused by उ as compared to guṇa for उ which is caused by न, (2) having causes of application occurring before those of another in the wording of the form, (3) having a smaller number of causes, (4) occurring earlier in the order of several operations which take place in arriving at the complete form of a word, (5) not having संज्ञा (technical term) as a cause of its application, ( 6 ) not depending upon two words or padas, (7) depending upon a cause or causes of a general nature (सामान्यापेक्ष) as opposed to one which depends on causes of a specific nature ( विशेषापेक्ष).
antarhitaseparated by a dissimilar element; confer, compare यूनि चान्तर्हित अप्राप्तिः P.IV. 1.93 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5. व्यञ्जनान्तर्हितोपि उदात्तपरः अनुदात्तः स्वरितमापद्यते T. Pr.XIV.30; confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.9.
apādānadetachment, separation, ablation technical term for अपादानकारक which is defined as ध्रुवमपायेऽपादानम् in P.I.4.24 and subsequent rules 25 to 3l and which is put in the ablative case; confer, compare अपादाने पञ्चमी P. II.3.28.
apāya(1)point of departure, separation; confer, compare ध्रुवमपायेपादानम् P.I.4.24; (2) disappearance; confer, compare संनियेागशिष्टानामन्यतरापाये उभयोरप्यपायः । तद्यथा । देवदत्तयज्ञदत्ताभ्यामिदं कर्म कर्तव्यम् । देवदत्तापाये यज्ञदत्तेपि न करोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.36.
abhinidhānaliterally that which is placed near or before; the first of the doubled class consonants; a mute or sparṣa consonant arising from doubling and inserted before a mute; confer, compare अघोषादूष्मणः परः प्रथमः अभिनिधानः स्पर्शपरात्तस्य सस्थानः ( Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 9. ) explained by त्रिभाष्यरत्न as स्पर्शपरादघोषादूष्मणः परः प्रथम आगमस्तस्य स्पर्शस्य समानस्थानः अभिनिधानो भवति । अभिनिधीयते इत्यभिनिधानः आरोपणीयः इत्यर्थः । यथा यः क्कामयेत अश्मन्नूर्जम् । यः प्पाप्मना । The Ṛk. prātiśākhya explains the term अभिनिधान somewhat differently; confer, compare अभिनिधानं कृतसंहितानां स्पर्शन्ति:स्थानामपवाद्य रेफम् । संघारणं संवरणं श्रुतेश्च स्पर्शोदयानामपि चावसाने Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 5, explained by उव्वट as स्पर्शपराणां स्पर्शानां रेफं वर्जयित्वा अन्तःस्थानां च वर्णानां कृतसंहितानां च सतां संधारणं वर्णश्रुतेश्च संवरणं भवति । तदेतद् अभिनिधानं नाम । यथा उष मा षड् द्वा द्वा । ऋ. सं ८।६८।१४ इह षड् इत्यत्र अभिनिधानम् ॥ अभिनिघान possibly according to उव्वट here means the first of the doubled letter which, although the second letter is attached to it, is separately uttered with a slight pause after it. अभिनिधान means, in short, something like 'suppression.' The Ṛk. Tantra takes a still wider view and explains अभिनिधान as the first of a doubled consonant, cf ; अभिनिधानः । क्रमजं च पूर्वान्ततस्वरं भवति । Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 21.
artha(1)literally signification,conveyed sense or object. The sense is sometimes looked upon as a determinant of the foot of a verse: confer, compare प्रायोर्थो वृत्तमित्येते पादज्ञानस्य हेतवः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII 16. It is generally looked upon as the determinant of a word (पद). A unit or element of a word which is possessed of an independent sense is looked upon as a Pada in the old Grammar treatises; confer, compare अर्थः पदमिति ऐन्द्रे; confer, compare also अर्थः पदम् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.2, explained by उव्वट as अर्थाभिधायि पदम् । पद्यते गम्यते ज्ञायतेSर्थोनेनेति पदम् । There is no difference of opinion regarding the fact that, out of the four standard kinds of words नाम, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात, the first two kinds नाम and अाख्यात do possess an independent sense of their own. Regarding possession of sense and the manner in which the sense is conveyed, by the other two viz. the Upasargas (prepositions) and Nipātas (particles) there is a striking difference of opinion among scholars of grammar. Although Pāṇini has given the actual designation पद to words ending with either the case or the conjugational affixes, he has looked upon the different units or elements of a Pada such as the base, the affix, the augment and the like as possessed of individually separate senses. There is practically nothing in Pāṇini's sūtras to prove that Nipātas and Upasargas do not possess an independent sense. Re: Nipātas, the rule चादयोऽसत्वे, which means that च and other indeclinables are called Nipātas when they do not mean सत्त्व, presents a riddle as to the meaning which च and the like should convey if they do not mean सत्त्व or द्रव्य id est, that is a substance. The Nipātas cannot mean भाव or verbal activity and if they do not mean सत्व or द्रव्य, too, they will have to be called अनर्थक (absolutely meaningless) and in that case they would not be termed Prātipadika, and no caseaffix would be applied to them. To avoid this difficulty, the Vārtikakāra had to make an effort and he wrote a Vārtika निपातस्य अनर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम् । P. I.2.45 Vār. 12. As a matter of fact the Nipātas च, वा and others do possess a sense as shown by their presence and absence (अन्वय and व्यतिरेक). The sense, however, is conveyed rather in a different manner as the word समूह, or समुदाय, which is the meaning conveyed by च in रामः कृष्णश्च, cannot be substituted for च as its Synonym in the sentence राम: कुष्णश्च. Looking to the different ways in which their sense is conveyed by nouns and verbs on the one hand, and by affixes, prepositions and indeclinables on the other hand, Bhartṛhari, possibly following Yāska and Vyāḍi, has developed the theory of द्योतकत्व as contrasted with वाचकत्व and laid down the dictum that indeclinables, affixes and prepositions (उपसर्गs) do not directly convey any specific sense as their own, but they are mere signs to show some specific property or excellence of the sense conveyed by the word to which they are attached; confer, compare also the statement 'न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयेगद्योतका भवन्ति । Nir 1.3. The Grammarians, just like the rhetoricians have stated hat the connection between words and their senses is a permanent one ( नित्य ), the only difference in their views being that the rhetoricians state that words are related; no doubt permanently, to their sense by means of संकेत or convention which solely depends on the will of God, while the Grammarians say that the expression of sense is only a natural function of words; confer, compare 'अभिधानं पुनः स्वाभाविकम्' Vārttika No.33. on P. I.2.64. For द्योतकत्व see Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari II. 165-206.
avagraha(1)separation of a compound word into its component elements as shown in the Pada-Pāṭha of the Vedic Saṁhitās. In the Padapāṭha, individual words are shown separately if they are combined by Saṁdhi rules or by the formation of a compound in the Saṁhitāpāṭha; exempli gratia, for example पुरोहितम् in the Saṁhitāpāṭha is read as पुरःsहितम्. In writing, there is observed the practice of placing the sign (ऽ) between the two parts, about which nothing can be said as to when and how it originatedition The AtharvaPrātiśākhya defines अवग्रह as the separation of two padas joined in Saṁhitā. (Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.3.25; II.4.5). In the recital of the pada-pāṭha, when the word-elements are uttered separately, there is a momentary pause measuring one matra or the time required for the utterance of a short vowel. (See for details Vāj. Prāt. Adhāya 5). (2) The word अवग्रह is also used in the sense of the first out of the two words or members that are compounded together. See Kāśikā on P.VIII.4.26; confer, compare also तस्य ( इङ्ग्यस्य ) पूर्वपदमवग्रहः यथा देवायत इति देव-यत. Tai. Pr. I. 49. The term अवग्रह is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as 'separation, or splitting up of a compound word into its constitutent parts; confer, compare छन्दस्यानङोवग्रहो दृश्येत पितामह इति ।(Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.36); also confer, compare यद्येवमवग्रहः प्राप्नोति । न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् । यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.109) where the Bhāṣyakāra has definitely stated that the writers of the Padapāṭha have to split up a word according to the rules of Grammar. (3) In recent times, however, the word अवग्रह is used in the sense of the sign (ऽ) showing the coalescence of अ (short or long) with the preceding अ (short or long ) or with the preceding ए or ओ exempli gratia, for example शिवोऽ र्च्यः, अत्राऽऽगच्छ. (4) The word is also used in the sense of a pause, or an interval of time when the constituent elements of a compound word are shown separately; confer, compare समासेवग्रहो ह्रस्वसमकालः (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1). (5) The word is also used in the sense of the absence of Sandhi when the Sandhi is admissible.
avagrahavirāmathe interval or pause after the utterance of the first member of a compound word when the members are uttered separately. This interval is equal to two moras according to Tait. Pr. while, it is equal to one mora according to the other Prātiśākhyas.
avyapavṛktaunseparated, undivided, inseparable, mixed; confer, compare नाव्यपवृक्तस्य अवयवे तद्विधिः यथा द्रव्येषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva-sutra 4.V.9 whereon Kaiyaṭa remarks व्यपवृक्तं भेदः । अव्यपवृक्तं अभिन्नबुद्धिविषयमेकत्वालम्बनज्ञानग्राह्यं समुदायरूपम् ।
asaṃnikarṣa(1)separatedness as in the case of two distinct words;(2) absence of co-alescence preventing the sandhi; cf R.T. 68,70.
asamāsa(1)absence of a compound. उपसर्गादसमासेपि णोपदेशस्य P. VIII.4.14; (2) an expression conveying the sense of a compound word although standing in the form of separate words: चार्थे द्वन्द्ववचने असमासेपि वार्थसंप्रत्ययादनिष्टं प्राप्नोति । अहरहर्नयमानो गामश्वं पुरुषं पशुम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.29.
iṅgyaa separable word as opposed to अनिङ्ग्य; part of a compound word which is separated or may be separated from the remaining part when the word is split up into its constituent parts. Generally the word is applied to the first part of a compound word when it is split up in the recital of the padapāṭha. The 'iṅgya' word is shown by a pause or avagraha after it which is shown in writing by the sign (ऽ): confer, compare इङ्गयेत विभागेन चाल्यते इति इङ्गयम् । इङ्गयमिति विभागपदस्य संशा commentary on Tait. Prāt. 1.48. सावग्रहं पदमिङ्गयम् Com.on T.Pr. I.48.
uṇādisūtradaśapādīthe text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into ten chapters believed to have been written by शाकटायन. It is printed at the end of the Prakriyā Kaumud and separately also, and is also available in manuscripts with a few differences. Patañjali in his Bhāṣya on P.III.3.1, seems to have mentioned Sakaṭāyana as the author of the Uṇādi Sūtras although it cannot be stated definitely whether there was at that time, a version of the Sūtras in five chapters or in ten chapters or one, completely different from these, as scholars believe that there are many interpolations and changes in the versions of Uṇādi Sūtras available at present. A critical study of the various versions is extremely desirable.
upamanyu(1)the famous commentator on the grammatical verses attributed to Nandikeśvarakārikā. which are known by the name नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका and which form a kind of a commentary on the sūtras of Maheśvara; (2) a comparatively modern grammarian possibly belonging to the nineteenth century who is also named Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.and who has written a commentory on the famous Kāśikāvṛtti by Jayāditya and Vāmana. Some believe that Upa-manyu was an ancient sage who wrote a nirukta or etymological work and whose pupil came to be known as औपमन्यव.
upamitaan object which is comparedition The word is found in Pāṇinisūtra उपमितं व्याघ्रादिभिः P.II.1.56, where the Kāśikā paraphrases it by the word उपमेय and illustrates it by the word पुरुष in पुरुषव्याघ्र.
upasargapreposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': confer, compare सोपसर्गेषु नामसु Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् et cetera, and others which are always used along with a verb or a verbal derivative or a noun showing a verbal activity; confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessariiy compounded with the following word unless the latter is a verbal form; confer, compare कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the intervention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, et cetera, and others), which implies possibly that roots themselves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा et cetera, and others which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assigned some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix possesses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any independent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karmapravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3, Vākyapadīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7 and Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya has discussed the question in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attachedition It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indication, the words वाचक in stanza 6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upasargas see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 6, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 15, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60.
upasthitaa word used father technically in the sense of the word इति which is used in the Krama and other recitals when Vedic reciters show separately the two words compounded together by uttering the compound word first, then the word इति and then the two compound words, exempli gratia, for example सुश्लोक ३ इति सु-श्लोक। विभावसो इति विभा-वसो. The Kāśikā defines the word उपस्थित as समुदायादवच्छिद्य पदं येन स्वरूपे अवस्थाप्यते तद् उपस्थितम् । इतिशब्दः । Kāś.on VI.1.129. The Ṛk-Prātiśākhya explains the word rather differently, but in the same context.The word after which इति is placed is called upasthita exempli gratia, for example the word बाहू in बाहू इति or विभावसौ in विभावसो इति as contrasted with स्थित id est, that is the word without इति exempli gratia, for example बाहू or विभावसो, as also contrasted with स्थितोपस्थित id est, that is the whole word विभावसो इति विभाsवसो which is also called संहित or मिलित; (2) occurring, present; cf कार्यकालं संज्ञापरिभाषम् . यत्र कार्यं तत्रोपस्थितं द्रष्टव्यम् । Par.Śek. Pari.3.
ekapadamade up of one word; consisting of one word; confer, compare अथवा सन्त्येकपदान्यप्यवधारणानि । यथा अब्भक्षो वायुभक्षः । अप एव भक्षयति वायुमव भक्षयति । M.Bh. first Āhnika; (2) a continuous word paraphrased as अखण्डपद and समानपद by commentators; confer, compare तेनानन्तरा षष्ठयेकपदवत् V.Pr.II. 18: (3) every individual word: confer, compare बहुक्रमे क्रमेत तस्यैकपदानि नि:सृजन् R.Pr.XI.18.
ekaśeṣaa kind of composite formation in which only one of the two or more words compounded together subsists, the others being elided; confer, compare एकः शिष्यते इतरे निवर्तन्ते वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ । Kāśikā on सरूपाणामेकशेष एक-विभक्तौ P.I.2.64; confer, compare also सुरूपसमुदायाद्धि विभक्तिर्या विधीयते । एकस्तत्रार्थवान् सिद्धः समुदायस्य वाचकः ।। Bhāṣāvṛtti on P. I. 2.64. There is a dictum of grammarians that every individual object requires a separate expression to convey its presence. Hence, when there is a dual sense, the word has to be repeated, as also the word has to be multiplied when there is a plural sense. In current spoken language, however, in such cases the word is used only once. To justify this single utterance for conveying the sense of plurality, Pāṇini has laid down a general rule सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ and many other similar rules to cover cases of plurality not of one and the same object, but plurality cased by many objects, such as plurality caused by ideas going in pairs or relations such as parents, brothers and sisters, grand-father and grand-son, male and female. For example, see the words वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ; Similarly वृक्षाः for many trees, पितरौ for माता च पिता च; देवौ for देवी च देवश्च; confer, compare also the words श्वशुरौ, भ्रातरौ, गार्ग्यौ (for गार्ग्य and गार्ग्यायण),आवाम् (for त्वं च अहं च), यौ (for स च यश्च) and गावः feminine. अजा feminine. अश्वाः masculine gender. irrespective of the individuals being some males and some females. Pāṇini has devoted 10 Sūtras to this topic of Ekaśeṣa. The Daiva grammar has completely ignored this topic. Patanjali has very critically and exhaustively discussed this topic. Some critics hold that the topic of एकशेघ did not exist in the original Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini but it was interpolated later on, and adduce the long discussion in the Mahābhāṣya especially the Pūrvapakṣa therein, in support of their argument. Whatever the case be, the Vārttikakāra has commented upon it at length; hence, the addition must have been made immediately after Pāṇini, if at all there was any. For details see Mahābhāṣya on I.1.64 to 73 as also,Introduction p. 166-167, Vol.7 of the Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
ekāntaraseparated or intervened by one single thing, a letter or a word; e. g. अां पचसि देवदत्त, where देवदत्त follows अाम् with one word पचसि intervening; confer, compare आम एकान्तरमामन्त्रितमनन्तिके P.VIII.1.55.
m̐ nāsikyaa nasal letter or utterance included among the अयोगवाह letters analogous to anusvāra and yama letters. It is mentioned in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as हुँ इति नासिक्यः on which Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.makes the remark अयमृक्शाखायां प्रसिद्धः. The Ṛk-Prātiśākhya mentions नासिक्य, यम and अनुस्वार as नासिक्य or nasal letters, while Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.defines नासिक्य as a letter produced only by the nose; confer, compare केवलनासिकया उच्चार्यमाणे वर्णॊ नासिक्यः Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 20. The Taittirīya Prātiśākhya calls the letter ह् as nāsikya when it is followed by the consonant न् or ण् or म् and gives अह्नाम् , अपराह्णे and ब्रह्म as instances. The Pāṇinīya Śikṣā does not mention नासिक्य as a letter. The Mahābhāṣya mentions नासिक्य as one of the six ayogavāha letters; confer, compare के पुनरयोगवाहाः । विसर्जनीयजिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयानुस्वारानुनासिक्ययमाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Śivasūtra 5 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, where some manuscripts read नासिक्य for अानुनासिक्य while in some other manuscripts there is neither the word आनुनासिक्य nor नासिक्य. It is likely that the anunāsika-colouring given to the vowel preceding the consonant सू substituted for the consonants म, न् and others by P. VIII. 3.2. to 12, was looked upon as a separate phonetic unit and called नासिक्य as for instance in सँस्कर्ता, मा हिँसीः, सँशिशाधि et cetera, and others
ktvākṛt (affix). affix त्वा added to roots (1) in the sense of prohibition conveyed by the word अलं or खलु preceding the root, exempli gratia, for example अलं कृत्वा, खलु कृत्वा; confer, compare P. III.4.18; (2) in the sense of exchange in the case of the root मा, e. g. अपमित्य याचते; confer, compare P. III.4.19; (3) to show an activity of the past time along with a verb or noun of action showing comparatively a later time, provided the agent of the former and the latter activities is the same; exempli gratia, for example भुक्त्वा व्रजति, स्नात्वा पीत्वा भुक्त्वा व्रजति; confer, compare P. III.4. 21. This kṛt affix is always added to roots when they are without any prefix; when there is a prefix the indeclinable, ending in त्वा, is always compounded with the prefix and त्वा is changed into य (ल्यप्), exempli gratia, for example प्रकृत्य, प्रहृत्य; confer, compare समासेऽनञ्पूर्वे क्त्वो ल्यप् P. VII. 1.37. The substitution of य is at will in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example कृष्णं वासो यजमानं परिधापयित्वा ( instead of परिधाप्य ), confer, compare P. VII.1.38, while sometimes, य is added after त्वा as an augment e. g. दत्वाय सविता धियः confer, compare P. VII.l.47, as also sometimes त्वी or त्वीनम् is substituted for त्वा e. g. इष्ट्वीनं देवान्, स्नात्वी मलादिव, confer, compare P. VII.1.48, 49.
īśeḥ(VII.2.77)अनुकर्षणार्थो विज्ञायते Kāś. on P.IV.2.78; (3) succession of the same consonant brought about; doubling; reduplication; क्रम is used in this way in the Ṛk Prātiśākhya as a synonym of dvitva prescribed by Pāṇini; e. g. अा त्वा रथं becomes अा त्त्वा रथम् ; सोमानं स्वरणम् becomes सोमानं स्स्वरणम् ; confer, compare स्वरानुस्वारोपहितो द्विरुच्यते संयोगादि: स क्रमोSविक्रमे सन् । etc, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. l to 4; confer, compare also स एष द्विर्भावरूपो विधिः क्रमसंज्ञो वेदितव्यः Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1. The root क्रम् IA. is several times used in the Prātiśākhya works for द्विर्भवन, confer, compare also T. Pr.XXI.5; XXIV.5; (4) repetition of a word in the recital of Vedic passages, the recital by such a repetition being called क्रमपाठ, which is learnt and taught with a view to understanding the original forms of words combined in the Saṁhitā by euphonic rules, substitution of letters such as that of ण् for न् , or of ष् for स् , as also the separate words of a compound word ( सामासिकशब्द ); e. g. पर्जन्याय प्र । प्र गायत । गायत दिवः । दिवस्पुत्राय । पुत्राय मीळ्हुषे । मीळ्हुषे इति मीळ्हुषे । confer, compare क्रमो द्वाभ्यामतिक्रम्य् प्रत्यादायोत्तरं तयोः उत्तेरेणोपसंदध्यात् तथार्द्धर्चं समापयेत् ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X. 1. For details and special features, confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) ch. X and XI: confer, compare also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 182190: T. Pr, XXIII. 20, XXIV. 6.
kramapāṭharecital of the Vedic Saṁhitā by means of separate groups of two words, repeating each word except the first of the Vedic verseline; see क्रम a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The various rules and exceptions are given in detail in Paṭalas ten and eleven of the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. The Vedic Saṁhitā or Saṁhitāpāṭha is supposed to be the original one and the Padapāṭha prepared later on, with a view to preserving the Vedic text without any change or modification of a letter, or accent; confer, compare न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII. 2.16, where Patañjali clearly says that grammar-rules are not to follow the Padapāṭha, but, the writer of the Padapāṭha is to follow the rules already laid down. The Jaṭāpāṭha, the Ghanapāṭha and the other recitals are later developments of the Padapāṭha as they are not mentioned in the Prātiśākhya works.
gaṅgādhara[GANGADHARA SHASTRI TELANG] (l)a stalwart grammarian and Sanskrit scholar of repute who was a pupil of Bālasarasvatī of Vārāṇaśī and prepared in the last century a host of Sanskrit scholars in Banaras among whom a special mention could be made of Dr. Thebaut, Dr. Venis and Dr. Gaṅgānātha Jhā. He was given by Government of India the titles Mahāmahopādhyāya and C. I.E. His surname was Mānavallī but he was often known as गङाधरशास्त्री तेलङ्ग. For details, see Mahābhāṣya, D.E. Society Ed.Poona p.p.33, 34; (2)an old scholar of Vyākarana who is believed to have written a commentary on Vikṛtavallī of Vyādi; (3) a comparatively modern scholar who is said to have written a commentary named Induprakāśa on the Śabdenduśekhara; (4) author of the Vyākaraṇadīpaprabhā, a short commentary on the Vyākaraṇa work of Cidrūpāśramin. See चिद्रूपाश्रमिन्.
gonardīyaliterally inhabitant of Gonarda which was the name of a district. in the province of Oudh in the days of the Mahabhasyakara according to some scholars. Others believe that Gonarda was the name of the district named Gonda at present The expression गोनर्दीय अाह occurs four times in the Mahabhasya where it refers to a scholar of grammar in Patafijali's time; cf M.Bh. on I. 1.21 ; I. 1.29; III. I.92; VII. 2.101. As Kaiyata paraphrases the words गेानर्दीयस्त्वाह as भाष्यकारस्त्वाह, scholars say that गेीनर्दीय was the name taken by the Mahabhasyakara himself who was a resident of Gonarda. Hari Diksita, however, holds that गोनर्दीय was the term used for the author of the . Varttikas; confer, compare Brhacchabdaratna.
carkarītaa term used by the ancient grammarians in connection with a secondary root in the sense of frequency; the term यङ्लुगन्त is used by comparatively modern grammarians in the same sense. The चर्करीत roots are treated as roots of the adadi class or second conjugation and hence the general Vikarana अ ( शप् ) is omitted after them.The word is based on the 3rd person. sing form चर्करीति from .the root कृ in the sense of frequency; exempli gratia, for example चर्करीति, चर्कर्ति, बोभवीति बोभोति; confer, compare चर्करीतं च a gana-sutra in the gana named ’adadi’ given by Panini in connection with अदिप्रभृतिभ्य; शपः Pāṇini. II.4.72; confer, compare also चर्करीतमिति यङ्लुकः प्राचां संज्ञा Bhasa Vr. on P. II. 4.72, The word चेक्रीयित is similarly used for the frequentative when the sign of the frequentative viz. य ( यङ् ) is not elidedition See चेक्रीयित.
carcā(1)splitting up of a word into its component parts, which is generalty shown in the Padaptha by अवग्रहं (S). The word, hence means पदपाठ or recital by showing separately the constitutent words of the Samhita or the running text of the Veda. The word is used almost in the same sense in the Mahabhasya in respect of showing the words of a sutra separately; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐजिति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on Mahesvara Sutra 1 Wart. 6l ; (2) a repeated word; confer, compare इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत् पुनः पदवचनं तत् चर्चाशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.20; (3) a discussion or a debate where consideration is given to each single word; confer, compare प्रर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par. Sek. Pari. 115.
ṇicaffix इ causing Vrddhi (1) applied to roots of the tenth conjugation ( चुरादिगण ) such as चुर् , चित् et cetera, and others e. g. चोरयति, चोरयते; confer, compare P. III. 1.25: (2) applied to any root to form a causal base from it, e. g. भावयति from भू, गमयति from गम्: confer, compare हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26: (3) applied to the words मुण्ड, मिश्र etc, in the sense of making, doing, practising et cetera, and others ( करण ); e. g. मुण्डं करोति मुण्डयति, व्रतयति (eats something or avoids it as an observance), हलं गृह्नाति हलयति et cetera, and others; cf P. III. 1.21; (4) applied to the words सत्य, पाश, रूप, वीणा, तूल, श्लोक, सेना, लोमन, त्वच्, वर्मन्, वर्ण and चूर्ण in the various senses given by the Varttikakara to form denominative roots ending in इ: e. g. सत्यापयति, पाशयति etc; confer, compare P. III.1.25: (5) applied to suitable words in the sense of composing, exempli gratia, for example सूत्रं करोति सूत्रयति, et cetera, and others: (6)applied to a verbal noun ( कृदन्त ) in the sense of 'narrating' with the omission of the krt affix and the karaka of the verbal activity put in a suitable case; e. g. कंसं घातयति for the sentence कंसवधमाचष्टे or बलिं बन्धयति for बलिबन्धमाचष्टे,or रात्रिं विवासयति, सूर्यमुद्गमयति, पुष्येण योजयति et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.26. Roots ending in णिच् (णिजन्त) take the conjugational endings of both the Parasmaipada and the, Atmanepada: confer, compare णिचश्च P. I. 3.74. They have perfect forms by the addition of अाम् with a suitable form of the perfect tense of the root कृ, भू or अस् placed after अाम्, the word ending with अाम् and the verbal form after it being looked upon as separate words e. g. कारयां चकार कारयां चक्रे et cetera, and others; cf P. III.1.35, 40. They have the aorist form, with the substitution of the Vikarana चङ् ( अ ) for च्लि before which the root is reduplicated; e. g. अचीकरत्, अबीभवत् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.III.1.48, VI.1.11 as also VII.4.93-97.
tatpuruṣaname of an important kind of compound words similar to the compound word तत्पुरुष id est, that is ( तस्य पुरुषः ), and hence chosen as the name of such compounds by ancient grammarians before Panini. Panini has not defined the term with a view to including such compounds as would be covered by the definition. He has mentioned the term तत्पुरुष in II.1.22 as Adhikara and on its strength directed that all compounds mentioned or prescribed thereafter upto Sutra II.2.22 be called तत्पुरुष. No definite number of the sub-divisions of तत्पुरुष is given;but from the nature of compounds included in the तत्पुरुष-अधिकार, the sub-divisions विभक्तितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.1.24 to 48, समानाधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.1.49 to 72 (called by the name कर्मधारय; acc.to P.I. 2. 42), संख्यातत्पुरुष (called द्विगु by P.II.1.52), अवयत्रतत्पुरुष or एकदेशितत्पुरुषं confer, compare P.II.2.1-3, ब्यधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II 2.5, नञ्तत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2.6, उपपदतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.2.19, प्रादितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2 18 and णमुल्तत्पुरुष confer, compareP.II.2.20 are found mentioned in the commentary literature on standard classical works. Besides these, a peculiar tatpurusa compound mentioned by'Panini in II.1.72, is popularly called मयूरव्यंसकादिसमास. Panini has defined only two out of these varieties viz. द्विगु as संख्यापूर्वो द्विगुः P.II. 1.23, and कर्मधारय as तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P. I.2.42. The Mahabhasyakara has described तत्पुरुष as उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः: confer, compare M.Bh. on II.1.6, II.1.20, II.1.49, et cetera, and others, and as a consequence it follows that the gender of the tatpurusa compound word is that of the last member of the compound; confer, compare परवल्लिङ द्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयोः P. II.4. 26; cf also तत्पुरुषश्चापि कः परवल्लिङं प्रयोजयति । यः पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानः एकदेशिसमासः अर्धपिप्पलीति । यो ह्युत्तरपदार्थप्रधानो दैवकृतं तस्य परवल्लिङ्गम्, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.4.26. Sometimes, the compound gets a gender different from that of the last word; confer, compare P.II.4.19-31, The tatpurusa compound is optional as generally all compounds are, depending as they do upon the desire of the speaker. Some tatpurusa compounds such as the प्रादितत्पुरुष or उपपदतत्पुरुष are called नित्य and hence their constitutent words, with the case affixes applied to them, are not noticed separately; confer, compare P.II.2.18,19, In some cases अ as a compound-ending ( समासान्त ) is added: exempli gratia, for example राजघुरा, नान्दीपुरम् ; confer, compare P. V.4.74; in some cases अच् ( अ ) is added: confer, compare P.V-4 75 o 87: while in some other cases टच् ( अ ) is added, the mute letter ट् signifying the addition of ङीप् ( ई) in the feminine gender; confer, compareP.V.4. 91-1 12. For details See p.p. 270-273 Mahabhasya Vol.VII published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
dvikhaṇḍaa compound expression or word separated into two by avagraha in the Padapatha; the word is misstated as दुखण्ड by some vedic reciters.
navyamataa term used for the differentiation in views and explanations held by the comparatively new school of Bhattoji Diksita, as contrasted with those held by Kasikakara and Kaiyata; the term is sometimes applied to the differences of opinion expressed by Nagesabhatta in contrast with Bhagttoji Diksita. For details see p.p. 23-24 Vol.VII of the Patanjala Mahabhasya edition D.E. Society, Poona.
(1)taddhita affix. affix ना as also नाञ् prescribed respectively after वि and नञ् (negative particle न ) in the sense of separation; e. g. विना, नाना ; (2) case ending ना substituted for the inst. instrumental case. singular. affix टा (called also अाङ् in ancient grammars) in the masculine gender after words called घि i. e. words ending in इ or उ excepting such as are called नदी.
nāntarīyakaabsolutely necessary; being, in a way, inseparable: confer, compare कश्चिदन्नार्थी शालिकलापं सतुषं सपलालमाहरति नान्तरीयकत्वात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 3.18 on which Kaiyata observes अन्तरशब्देा विनार्थे । अन्तरे भवमन्तरीयम् । तत्र नञ्समासे कृते पृषोदरादित्वाद्भाष्यकारवचनप्रामाण्याद्वा नलोपाभावः ।
nārāyaṇavandyaa grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a treatise on grammar named Saravali, and a treatise on roots named Dhatuparayana.
nitya(1)eternal, as applied to word or Sabda in contrast with sound or dhvani which is evanescent (कार्य ). The sound with meaning or without meaning,made by men and animals is impermanent; but the sense or idea awakened in the mind by the evanescent audible words on reaching the mind is of a permanent or eternal nature; confer, compare स्फोटः शब्दो ध्वनिस्तस्य व्यायामादुपजायते; confer, compare also व्याप्तिमत्त्वा्त्तु शब्दस्य Nir.I.1 ; (2) constant; not liable to be set aside by another; confer, compare उपबन्धस्तु देशाय नित्यम्, न रुन्धे नित्यम्। नित्यशब्दः प्राप्त्यन्तरानिषेधार्थः T.Pr.I.59, IV.14; (3) original as constrasted with one introduced anew such as an augment; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.VI.14; (4) permanently functioning, as opposed to tentatively doing so; confer, compare नित्यविरते द्विमात्रम् Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya.37; (5) unchangeable, permanent, imperishable; confer, compare अयं नित्यशब्दोस्त्येव कूटस्थेष्वविचालिषु भावेषु वर्तते M.Bh. on P. VIII. 1.4; (6) always or invariably applying, as opposed to optional; the word in this sense is used in connection with rules or operations that do not optionally apply; confer, compare उपपदसमासो नित्यसमासः, षष्ठीसमासः पुनार्वेभाषा; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.2.19; (7) constant,as applied to a rule which applies if another simultaneously applying rule were to have taken effect, as well as when that other rule does not take effect; confer, compare क्वचित्कृताकृतप्रसङ्गमात्रेणापि नित्यता Par. Sek. Pari 46. The operations which are nitya according to this Paribhasa take effect in preference to others which are not 'nitya', although they may even be 'para'; confer, compare परान्नित्यं बलवत् Par. Sek. Pari. 42.
nirākṛta(1)set aside; answered; the word is frequently used in connection with faults which are stated to occur or present themselves if a particular explanation is given; (2) prevailed over by another; confer, compare तदा न रूपं लभते निराकृतम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI. 30, where Uvvata paraphrases निराकृत as विस्मृत.
nirbaddhaseparated,dissociated, disconnected; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः Nirukta of Yāska.I.3.
nirvacanainterpretation by means of etymology as found in the Nirukta works; the act of fully uttering the meaning hidden in words that are partially or wholly unintelligible in respect of their derivation, by separating a word into its component letters; confer, compare निष्कृष्य विगृह्य निर्वचनम्, Durgavrtti on Nirukta of Yāska.II. 1.For details see Nirukta II.1.
niṣedhanegation; prohibition; cf निषेधपञ्चसूत्रीयं स्वरार्था Bhasavrtti on P. II. 2.16; confer, compare निषेधाश्च बलीयांसः Par. Sek. Pari. 112. The word प्रतिषेध is used frequently in this sense in old grammar works such as the Mahabhasya, the word निषेध being comparatively a modern one.
niṣkṛṣṭaseparated; taken out from a thing; existing only in conception or idea; confer, compare इह केचिद्गुणाः शब्देन द्रव्यान्निष्कृष्टा एव प्रत्याय्यन्ते न तु द्रव्यस्योपरञ्जकत्वेन । यथा चन्दनस्य गन्धः इति । Kaiy. on P. II. 2. 8.
nihitaseparated with the intervention of a consonant. The word is used in connection with the detached first part of a compound word not followed immediately by a vowel; confer, compare अनिहतं अव्यवहितम् Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 30.
padaa word; a unit forming a part of a sentence; a unit made up of a letter or of letters, possessed of sense; confer, compare अक्षरसमुदायः पदम् । अक्षरं वा । V.Pr. VIII. 46, 47. The word originally was applied to the individual words which constituted the Vedic Samhitā; confer, compare पदप्रकृतिः संहिता Nir.I.17. Accordingly, it is defined in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as ' अर्थः पदम् ' (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 2) as contrasted with ' वर्णानामेकप्राणयोगः संहिता ' (V.Pr.I.158). The definition ' अर्थः पदम् ' is attributed to the ancient grammarian 'Indra', who is believed to have been the first Grammarian of India. Pāņini has defined the term पद as ' सुप्तिङन्तं पदम् ' P.I.4.14. His definition is applicable to complete noun-forms and verb-forms and also to prefixes and indeclinables where a case-affix is placed and elided according to him; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4. 82. The noun-bases before case affixes and taddhita affix. affixes, mentioned in rules upto the end of the fifth adhyāya, which begin with a consonant excepting य् are also termed पद by Pāņini to include parts of words before the case affixes भ्याम् , भिस्, सु et cetera, and others as also before the taddhita affix. affixes मत्, वत् et cetera, and others which are given as separate padas many times in the pada-pātha of the Vedas; confer, compare स्वादिष्वसर्वनामस्थाने P. I. 4. 17. See for details the word पदपाठ. There are given four kinds of padas or words viz. नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात in the Nirukta and Prātiśākhya works; confer, compare also पदमर्थे प्रयुज्यते, विभक्त्यन्तं च पदम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 64 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 19, वर्णसमुदायः पदम् M.Bh. on I.1.21 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, पूर्वपरयोरर्थोपलब्धौ पदम् Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I.1.20, पदशब्देनार्थ उच्यते Kaiyata on P.I.2.42 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2; confer, compare also पद्यते गम्यते अर्थः अनेनेति पदमित्यन्वर्थसंज्ञा Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P.III. 1.92. The verb endings or affixs ति, तस् and others are also called पद. The word पद in this sense is never used alone, but with the word परस्मै or अात्मने preceding it. The term परस्मैपद stands for the nine affixes तिप्, तस्, ...मस्,while the term आत्मनेपद stands for the nine affixes त, आताम् ... महिङ्. confer, compare ल: परमैपदम्, तङानावात्मनेपदम्. It is possible to say that in the terms परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद also, the term पद could be taken to mean a word, and it is very likely that the words परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद were originally used in the sense of 'words referring to something meant for another' and 'referring to something meant for self' respectively. Such words, of course, referred to verbal forms, roughly corresponding to the verbs in the active voice and verbs in the passive voice. There are some modern scholars of grammar, especially linguists, who like to translate परस्मैपद as 'active voice' and आत्मनेपद as ' passive voice'. Pāņini appears, however, to have adapted the sense of the terms परस्मैपद and आत्मनेपद and taken them to mean mere affixes just as he has done in the case of the terms कृत् and तद्धित. Presumably in ancient times, words current in use were grouped into four classes by the authors of the Nirukta works, viz. (a) कृत् (words derived from roots)such as कर्ता, कारकः, भवनम् et cetera, and others, (b) तद्धित (words derived from nouns ) such as गार्ग्यः , काषायम् , et cetera, and others, (c) Parasmaipada words viz. verbs such as भवति, पचति, and (d) Ātmanepada words id est, that is verbs like एधते, वर्धते, et cetera, and othersVerbs करोति and कुरुते or हरति and हरते were looked upon as both परस्मैपद words and आत्मनेपद words. The question of simple words, as they are called by the followers of Pāņini, such as नर, तद् , गो, अश्व, and a number of similar underived words, did not occur to the authors of the Nirukta as they believed that every noun was derivable, and hence could be included in the kŗt words.
padapāṭhathe recital of the Veda text pronouncing or showing each word separately as detached from the adjoining word. It is believed that the Veda texts were recited originally as running texts by the inspired sages, and as such, they were preserved by people by oral tradition. Later on after several centuries, their individually distinct words were shown by grammarians who were called Padakāras. The पदपाठ later on had many modifications or artificial recitations such as क्रम, जटा, घन et cetera, and others in which each word was repeated twice or more times, being uttered connectedly with the preceding or the following word, or with both. These artificial recitations were of eight kinds, which came to be known by the term अष्टविकृतयः.
pāṇinithe illustrious ancient grammarian of India who is wellknown by his magnum opus, the Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has maintained its position as a unique work on Sanskrit grammar unparalleled upto the present day by any other work on grammar, not only of the Sanskrit language, but ofany other language, classical as well as spoken. His mighty intelligence grasped, studied and digested not only the niceties of accentuation and formation of Vedic words, scattered in the vast Vedic Literature of his time, but those of classical words in the classical literature and the spoken Sanskrit language of his time in all its different aspects and shades, noticeable in the various provinces and districts of the vast country. The result of his careful study of the Vedic Literature and close observation ofeminine.the classical Sanskrit, which was a spoken language in his days, was the production of the wonderful and monumental work, the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an authoritative description of the Sanskrit language, to have a complete exposition of which,several life times have to be spent,in spite of several commentaries upon it, written from time to time by several distinguished scholars. The work is a linguist's and not a language teacher's. Some Western scholars have described it as a wonderful specimen of human intelligence,or as a notable manifestation of human intelligence. Very little is known unfortunately about his native place,parentage or personal history. The account given about these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and other books is only legendary and hence, it has very little historical value. The internal evidence, supplied by his work shows that he lived in the sixth or the seventh century B. C., if not earlier, in the north western province of India of those days. Jinendrabuddhi, the author of the Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa, has stated that the word शलातुर् mentioned by him in his sUtra ( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native place and the word शालातुरीय derived by him from the word शलातुर by that sUtra was, in fact his own name, based upon the name of the town which formed his native placcusative case. Paanini has shown in his work his close knowledge of, and familiarity with, the names of towns, villages, districts, rivers and mountains in and near Vaahika, the north-western Punjab of the present day, and it is very likely that he was educated at the ancient University of Taksasilaa. Apart from the authors of the Pratisaakhya works, which in a way could be styled as grammar works, there were scholars of grammar as such, who preceded him and out of whom he has mentioned ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana, Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bharadwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana Senaka and Sphotaayana. The grammarian Indra has not been mentioned by Paanini, although tradition says that he was the first grammarian of the Sanskrit language. It is very likely that Paanini had no grammar work of Indra before him, but at the same time it can be said that the works of some grammarians , mentioned by Panini such as Saakaatyana, Apisali, Gaargya and others had been based on the work of Indra. The mention of several ganas as also the exhaustive enumeration of all the two thousand and two hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha can very well testify to the existence of systematic grammatical works before Paarnini of which he has made a thorough study and a careful use in the composition of his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha. His exhaustive grammar of a rich language like Sanskrit has not only remained superb in spite of several other grammars of the language written subsequently, but its careful study is felt as a supreme necessity by scholars of philology and linguistics of the present day for doing any real work in the vast field of linguistic research. For details see pp.151154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaabhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.
pāṇinisūtravārtikaname given to the collection of explanatory pithy notes of the type of SUtras written. mainly by Kaatyaayana. The Varttikas are generally written in the style of the SUtras, but sometimes they are written in Verse also. The total number of Varttikas is well-nigh a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. 5000, including Varttikas in Verse.There are three kinds of Varttikas; confer, compareउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिणः । Naagesa appears to have divided Varttikas into two classes as shown by his definition 'सूत्रेऽ नुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् '. If this definition be followed, many of the Vaarttikas given in the Maahibhaasya as explaining and commenting upon the Sutras will not strictly be termed as Vaarttikaas, and their total number which is given as exceeding 5000, will be reduced to about 1400 or so. There are some manuscript copies which give this reduced number, and it may be said that only these Vārttikas were written by Kātyāyana while the others were added by learned grammarians after Kātyāyana. In the Mahābhāșya there are seen more than 5000 statements of the type of Vārttikas out of which Dr. Kielhorn has marked about 4200 as Vārttikas. At some places the Mahābhāșyakāra has quoted the names of the authors of some Vārttikas or their schools, in words such as क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति, भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः पठन्ति. et cetera, and others Many of the Vārttikas given in the Mahābhāșya are not seen in the Kāśikāvŗtti, while some more are seen in the Kāśikā-vŗtti, which, evidently are composed by scholars who flourished after Patańjali, as they have not been noticed by the Mahābhāșyakāra. It is very difficult to show separately the statements of the Bhāșyakāra popularly named 'ișțis' from the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana and others. For details see Vol. VII Mahābhāșya, D.E. Society's edition pp. 193-224.
pāṇinisūtravṛttia gloss on the grammer rules of Pāņini. Many glosses were written from time to time on the Sûtras of Pāņini, out of which the most important and the oldest one is the one named Kāśikāvŗtti, written by the joint authors Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. It is believed that the Kāśikāvŗtti was based upon some old Vŗttis said to have been written by कुणि, निर्लूर, चुल्लि, श्वोभूति, वररुचि and others.Besides Kāśikā,the famous Vŗtti, and those of कुणि,निर्लूर and others which are only reported, there are other Vŗttis which are comparatively modern. Some of them have been printed, while others have remained only in manuscript form. Some of these are : the Bhāșāvŗtti by Purusottamadeva, Vyākaranasudhānidhi by Viśveśvara, Gūdhārthadīpinī by Sadāsivamiśra, Sūtravŗtti by Annambhatta, Vaiyākaraņasarvasva by Dharaņīdhara, Śabdabhūșaņa by Nārāyaņa Paņdita, Pāņinisūtravŗtti by Rāmacandrabhațța Tāre and Vyākaranadīpikā by Orambhațța. There are extracts available from a Sūtravŗtti called Bhāgavŗtti which is ascribed to Bhartŗhari, but, which is evidently written by a later writer (विमलमति according to some scholars) as there are found verses from Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as noticed by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiin his vŗtti on Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pāņini Sūtras, but having a topical arrangements are also available, the famous ones among these being the Praķriyākaumudī by Rāmacandra Śeșa and the Siddhāntakaumudī by Bhațțojī Dĩkșita. The मध्यमकौमुदी and the लघुकौमुदी can also be noted here although they are the abridgments of the Siddhānta Kaumudī. There are Vŗttis in other languages also, written in modern times, out of which those written by Bōhtlingk, Basu and Renou are well-known.
pṛthakseparately as far as hearing is concerned; distinctly separate from another; confer, compare सप्त स्वरा ये यमास्ते पृथग्वा Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. 17.
pṛthagyogakaraṇaframing a separate rule for a thing instead of mentioning it along with other things in the same context, which implies some purpose in the mind of the author such as anuvrtti in subsequent rules, option, and so on; confer, compare पृथग्योगकरणमस्य विधेरनित्यत्वज्ञापनार्थम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.3.7; confer, compare also Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on I.3.33, I. 3. 84, I.4.58, III.1.56, IV.1.16, VII. 4.33, VIII.1.52, VIII.1.74.
pratṛṇṇaliterally broken or split up; the separated words of the Samhita of the Vedas i. e. the Padapatha; the recitation of the Padapatha.; confer, compare शौद्धाक्षरोच्चारणं च प्रतृण्णम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 3.
pravigrahaseparate or distinct uterance of several words of a sentence which are joined together by Sandhi rules in a compound ( समास ) or otherwise, with a very short pause ( अवग्रह ) after each word. e. g. उद् उ एति instead of उद्वेति; confer, compare प्रविग्रहेण मृदूवग्रहेण चर्चयेयुः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV.10, where Uvvata remarks प्रविग्रहेषु प्रश्लिष्टं विश्लिष्टं कुर्यात् । कालाधिक्येन कुर्यात्। तथा च उद् उ एति इति पठेन्न तु उद्वेति.
pravibhaktamade separate with their Component parts shown clearly: Split up into component parts in such a way that their meaning also is fully stated cf तद्धितसमासे ष्वेकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु च पूर्वे पूर्वे अपरं अपरं प्रविभज्य निर्घ्रूयात् । दण्डयः पुरुषः। दण्डमर्हतीति वा दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा । Nir.II.2.
praśliṣṭanirdeśamention of a thing in a coalescence, which when split up, shows a phonetic element or a letter which could not be known before the components were separated; अनुपसर्जनात् । प्रश्लिष्टनिर्देशोयम् । अनुपसर्जन अ अ अत् इति । M.Bh. on I. 1.27 Vart. 6; cf also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.3.69.
prātipadikaliterallyavailable in every word. The term प्रातिपादिक can be explained as प्रतिपदं गृह्णाति तत् प्रातिपदिकम् cf P.IV. 4. 39. The term प्रातिपदिक, although mentioned in the Brahmana works, is not found in the Pratisakhya works probably because those works were concerned with formed words which had been actually in use. The regular division of a word into the base ( प्रकृति ) and the affix ( प्रत्यय ) is available, first in the grammar of Panini, who has given two kinds of bases, the noun-base and the verb-base. The noun-base is named Pratipadika by him while the verb-base is named Dhatu. The definition of Pratipadika is given by him as a word which is possessed of sense, but which is neither a root nor a suffix; confer, compare अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम् . P.I. 2.45. Although his definition includes, the krdanta words,the taddhitanta words and the compound words, still, Panini has mentioned them separately in the rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च P. I. 2.45 to distinguish them as secondary noun-bases as compared with the primary noun-bases which are mentioned in the rule अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम्, Thus,Panini implies four kinds of Pratipadikas मूलभूत, कृदन्त, तद्धितान्त and समास, The Varttikakara appears to have given nine kinds-गुणवचन, सर्वनाम, अव्यय, तद्धितान्त, कृदन्त, समास, जाति, संख्या and संज्ञा. See Varttikas 39 to 44 on P. I. 4. 1. Later on, Bhojaraja in his SringaraPrakasa has quoted the definition अर्थवदधातु given by Panini, and has given six subdivisions.: confer, compare नामाव्ययानुकरणकृत्तद्धितसमासाः प्रातिपदिकानि Sr. Prak. I. page 6. For the sense conveyed by a Pratipadika or nounbase, see प्रातिपदिकार्थ.
bahiraṅgaparibhāṣāthe Paribhasa or the maxim असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे (Par. Sek. Pari. 50) which cites the comparative weakness of the rule or operation which is Bahiranga.
bālaṃbhaṭṭa( बाळंभट्ट )surnamed Payagunda or Payagunde, who has written a commentary on the commentary Mitaksara on the याज्ञवल्क्यस्मृति. Some scholars say that he was also a great grammarian and identical with वैद्यनाथ पायगुंडे who has written the commentary काशिका or गदा on the Paribhasendusekhara, the Cidasthimala on the Laghusabdendusekhara and commentaries on the Vaiyakaranabhusana,Sabdakaustubha and Bhasyapradipoddyota. Other scholars believe that Balambhatta was the son of Vaidyanatha and that he wrote only the commentary on Mitaksara called Balambhatti after him. (2) There was also a comparatively modern grammarian of Tanjore who has written small grammar works बालबोधिनी and बालरञ्जनी.
baॉpa[ BOPP, FRANZ ]a German Sanskrit scholar who has written the famous volumes of "The Comparative Sanskrit Grammar".
bhakti(1)name given to two of the five divisions of a Saman which are प्रस्तावभक्ति, उद्गीथ, प्रतिहार, उपद्रव and निधानभाक्ति; (2) the vowel portion surrounding, or placed after, the consonant र् or ल् which (consonant) is believed to be present in the vowel ऋ or ऌ respectively forming its important portion, but never separately noticed in it. The vowels ऋ and ऌ are made up of one matra each. It is contended by the grammarians that the consonants र् and ल् forming respectively the portion of ऋ and ऌ, make up halfa-matra, while the remaining half is made up of the भाक्ति of the vowel surrounding the consonant or situated after the consonant. The word which is generally used for this 'bhakti is 'ajbhakti' instead of which the word स्वरभक्ति is found in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare यत्तद्रेफात्परं भक्तेस्तेन व्यवहितत्वान्न प्राप्नेति | ...... यच्चात्र रेफात्परं भुक्तेर्न तत् क्वचिदपि व्यपवृक्तं दृश्यते | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 4.1 Vart 2; confer, compare स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 17; also confer, compare रेफात्स्वरोपहिताद् व्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णी स्वरभक्तिरुत्तरा ) Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 13.
mahābhāṣyaliterally the great commentary. The word is uniformly used by commentators and classical Sanskrit writers for the reputed commentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali in the 2nd century B. C. The commentary is very scholarly yet very simple in style, and exhaustive although omitting a number of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and oldest existing commentary on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, and, in spite of some other commentaries and glosses and other compendia, written later on to explain the Sutras of Panini, it has remained supremely authoritative and furnishes the last and final word in all places of doubt: confer, compare the remarks इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे et cetera, and others scattered here and there in several Vyaakarana treatises forming in fact, the patent words used by commentators when they finish any chain of arguments. Besides commenting on the Sutras of Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has raised many other grammatical issues and after discussing them fully and thoroughly, given his conclusions which have become the final dicta in those matters. The work, in short, has become an encyclopedic one and hence aptly called खनि or अकर. The work is spread over such a wide field of grammatical studies that not a single grammatical issue appears to have been left out. The author appears to have made a close study of the method and explanations of the SUtras of Paanini given at various academies all over the country and incorporated the gist of those studies given in the form of Varttikas at the various places, in his great work He has thoroughly scrutinized and commented upon the Vaarttikas many of which he has approved, some of which he has rejected, and a few of which he has supplementedition Besides the Vaarttikas which are referred to a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., he has quoted stanzas which verily sum up the arguments in explanation of the difficult sUtras, composed by his predecessors. There is a good reason to believe that there were small glosses or commentaries on the SUtras of Paanini, written by learned teachers at the various academies, and the Vaarttikas formed in a way, a short pithy summary of those glosses or Vrttis. . The explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be quoted in support of this point. Kaiyata has at one place even stated that the argument of the Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with that of Kuni, his predecessor. The work is divided into eighty five sections which are given the name of lesson or आह्लिक by the author, probably because they form the subject matter of one day's study each, if the student has already made a thorough study of the subject and is very sharp in intelligence. confer, compare अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation given by the commentatiors).Many commentary works were written on this magnum opus of Patanjali during the long period of twenty centuries upto this time under the names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका, व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्पूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप, व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटीपाध्याय, is found complete. The learned commentary by Bhartrhari, written a few centuries before the Pradipa, is available only in a fragment and that too, in a manuscript form copied down from the original one from time to time by the scribes very carelessly. Two other commentaries which are comparatively modern, written by Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are available but they are also incomplete and in a manuscript form. Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa threw into the background the commentaries of his predecessors and no grammarian after Kaiyata dared write a commentary superior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he began, he had to abandon his work in the middle. The commentary of Kaiyata is such a scholarly one and so written to the point that later commentators have almost identified the original Bhasya with the commentary Pradipa and many a time expressed the two words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम् or स्पष्टमेतत् ).
yaḍlugantaa secondary root formed by adding the affix यङ् to roots specified in P. III. 1.22,23,24, which affix is sometimes dropped: confer, compare यङोचि च ; P. II. 4. 74. The yanluganta roots take the parasmaipada personal endings and not the atmanepada ones which are applied to yananta roots.
yāsuṭaugment यास् prefixed to the parasmaipada case-endings of लिङ् (the potential and the benedictive) which is accented acute; exempli gratia, for example कुर्यात्, क्रियात्.
rapratyāhāmaṇḍanaan anonymous work, comparatively modern, refuting the arguments advanced in the रप्रत्याहारखण्डन by Vaidyanatha Pyagunde.
lekhāone of the varieties or developments of the क्रमपाठ or the artificial recitation of the separate words of the Samhitā.
vararuci(1)a reputed ancient grammarian who is identified with Katyayana, the prominent author of the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. Both the names वररुचि and कात्यायन are mentioned in commentary works in connection with the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and it is very likely that Vararuci was the individual name of the scholar, and Katyayana his family name. The words कात्य and कात्यायन are found used in Slokavarttikas in the Mahabhasya on P.III.2.3 and III.2.118 where references made are actually found in the prose Varttikas (see कविधेो सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P.III. 2. 3 Vart and स्मपुरा भूतमात्रे न स्मपुराद्यतने P.III.2.118 Vart. 1)indicating that the Slokavarttikakara believed that the Varttikas were composed by Katyayana. There is no reference at all in the Mahabhasya to Vararuci as a writer of the Varttikas; there is only one reference which shows that there was a scholar by name Vararuci known to Patanjali, but he was a poet; confer, compare वाररुचं काव्यं in the sense of 'composed' ( कृत and not प्रोक्त ) by वररुचि M.Bh. on P. IV. 2.4. ( 2 ) वररुचि is also mentioned as the author of the Prakrta Grammar known by the name प्राकृतप्रकाश or प्राकृतमञ्जरी, This वररुचि, who also was कात्यायन by Gotra name, was a grammarian later than Patanjali, who has been associated with Sarvvarman, (the author of the first three Adhyayas of the Katantra Sutras), as the author of the fourth Adhyaya. Patanjali does not associate वररुचि with Kityayana at alI. His mention of वररुचि as a writer of a Kavya is a sufficient testimony for that. Hence, it appears probable that Katyayana, to whom the authorship of the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya and many other works allied with Veda has been attributed, was not associated with Vararuci by Patanjali, and it is only the later writers who identified the grammarian Vararuci,who composed the fourth Adhyaya of the Katantra Grammar and wrote a Prakrit Grammar and some other grammar' works, with the ancient revered Katyayana, the author of Varttikas, the Vijasaneyi Pratisakhya and the Puspasutra; (3) There was a comparatively modern grammariannamed वररुचि who wrote a small treatise on genders of words consisting of about 125 stanzas with a commentary named Lingavrtti, possibly written by the author himselfeminine. (4) There was also another modern grammarian by name वररुचि who wrote a work on syntax named प्रयोगमुखमण्डन discuss^ ing the four topics कारक, समास, तद्धित and कृदन्त.
varṇānarthavattvathe view that letters do not possess the sense, as individually in every letter no separate sense ; is seen: confer, compare अनर्थकास्तु et cetera, and others Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 5, Vart.14 and 15.
varṇaukadeśaa part or a portion of a combined letter id est, that isसंयुक्तस्वर or संयुक्तव्यञ्जन. The diphthongs or संयुक्तस्वरs are divisible into two Svaras, for instance ऐ into अा and ए, औ into अा and ओ. Similarly double consonants like क्कू, च्च्, क्म्, क्त् et cetera, and others are also divisible. Regarding the point raised whether the individual parts can be looked upon as separate letters for undergoing or causing a grammatical operation,the decision of the grammarians is that they cannot be looked upon as separate, when they are completely mixed as the dipthongs; confer, compareनाक्यपवृक्तस्यावयवस्य तद्वधिर्यथा द्रव्येषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 3, 4 Vart. 6.
vigṛhītashown by separating the combined elements, for instance, the two or more words in a compound or, the base or affix from a word which is a combination of the base ( प्रकृति ) and the affix (प्रत्ययः); confer, compare तदेव सूत्रं विगृहीतं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on I.1. Ahnika 1, Vart. 11, 14; also confer, compare अवारपाराद् विगृहीतादपि P. IV.2. 93 Vart.1.
vigrahalit, separation of the two parts of a thing; the term is generally applied to the separation of the constituent words of a compound word: it is described to be of two kinds : ( a ) शास्त्रीयविग्रहृ or technical separation; e. g. राजपुरुष्: into राजन् ङस् पुरुष सु and ( 2 ) लौकिकविग्रहं or common or popular separation ; e. g. राजपुरूष: into राज्ञ: पुरुष:. It is also divided into two kinds according to the nature of the constituent words (a) स्वपदाविग्रह separation by means of the constituent words, exempli gratia, for example राजहितम् into राज्ञे हृितम्;(b) अस्वपदविग्रह, e. g. राजार्थम् into राज्ञे इदम् ;or exempli gratia, for example सुमुखीं into शोभनं मुखं अस्याः confer, compare M.Bh. on P.V.4.7. The compounds whose separation into constituent words cannot be shown by those words (viz. the constituent words) are popularly termed nityasamsa. The term नित्यसमास is explained as नित्यः समासो नित्यसमासः | यस्य विग्रहो नास्ति । M.Bh. on P.II.2.19 Vart. 4. The upapadasamsa is described as नित्यसमास. Sometimes especially in some Dvandva compounds each of the two separated words is capable of giving individually the senses of both the words exempli gratia, for example the words द्यावा and क्षामा of the compound द्यावाक्षामा. The word विग्रह is found used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of the separate use of a word as contrasted with the use in a compound; cf अच्छेति विग्रहे प्लुतं भवति R.Pr.VII.1. विग्रहृ is defined as वृत्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः in the Siddhantakaumudi.
viccheda(1)breach or break (in the Samhitapatha); utterance of words separately by breaking their coalescence: confer, compare पदविच्छेद: असंहितः V. Pr.I.156; (2) doubling of a consonant technically called यम ; confer, compare अन्त:पदे अपञ्चमः पञ्चमेषु विच्छेदम् V.Pr. IV.163.
viniyogaemployment separately of different persons or things for different purposes; confer, compare अहेति विनियोगे च P.VIII. 1.61;confer, compare also अह विनियोगे । विनियेागो नाम द्वयोः पुरुषयोंरेकस्मिन्कर्मणि एकस्य पुरुषस्य संबन्धः अन्यस्मिन्कर्मणि अपरस्य V.Pr.VI.21.
vibhaktiliterally division, separation; separation of the base id est, that is that factor which shows the base separately। The word विभक्ति is generally used in the sense of case affixes; but in Pāṇini's grammar the term विभक्ति is applied also to personal endings applied to roots to form verbs; confer, compareविभक्तिश्च । सुप्तिङौ विभक्तिसंज्ञौ स्तः S.K.on Pāṇ. I.4.104. The term is also applied to taddhita affix.affixes which are applied to pronouns, किम् and बहु, ending in the ablative or in the locative case or in other cases on rare occasions. Such affixes are तस् (तसिल् ), त्र, (त्रल्), ह, अत्, दा, ऋहिल्, दानीम्, था ( थाल् ) and थम् given in P.V.3.1 to V.3.26.The case affixes are further divided into उपपदविभक्ति affixes and कारकविभक्ति affixes. For details see P.II.3.1 to 73.
vibhāga(1)lit, division, splitting; the splitting of a sentence into its constituent parts viz. the words; , the splitting of a word into its constituent parts viz. the base, the affix, the augments and the like: (2) understanding or taking a thing separately from a group of two or more; confer, compareअवश्यं खल्वपि विभज्योपपदग्रहणं कर्तव्यं यो हि बहूनां विभागस्तदर्थम् ! सांकाश्यकेभ्यश्च पाटलिपुत्रकेभ्यश्च माथुरा अभिरूपतराः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.V.3.57: (3) splitting of a Saṁhitā text of the Vedas into the Pada text: confer, compare अथादावुत्तरे विभागे ह्रस्वं व्यञ्जनपरः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.III.l, where विभाग is explained as पदविभाग by the commentator confer, compare also R.Pr.XVII.15; (4) the capacity of the Kārakas (to show the sense) confer, compare कारकशक्तिः विभागः Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on Kāś.I.2.44.
vilambitaa kind of tone where the interval between the utterance of two letters as also the time required for the utterance of a letter is comparatively longer than in the other two kinds, viz. द्रुत and मध्य; confer, compare ये हि द्रुतायां वृत्तौ वर्णाः त्रिभागाधिकास्ते मध्यमायाम्,ये मध्यमायां वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते विलम्बितायाम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.70: confer, compare also द्रुतविलम्बितयोश्चानुपदेशात् P. I.1.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 11.
vivṛttaseparated, disjoined; the word is used in connection with the separated elements of a euphonic combination; the words विक्लिष्ट, अनेकीभूत and पृथग्भूत are used in thesame sense.
vivṛtti(1)separation of the two vowels which were euphonically combined into one; the hiatus or position of two vowels near each other; confer, compare विवृत्तिः स्वरयोरसंधिः; (2) the interval between two vowels placed near each other; confer, compare स्वरयोरनन्तरयोरन्तरं विवृत्तिः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I.119; confer, compare also संहितायां यत्स्वरयोरन्तरं तद्विवृत्तिसंज्ञं स्यात् Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.I. This interval is one mātrā according to the Taittirīya Prātiśākhya, while it is only half-a-mātrā according to the Ṛktantra and the Ṛk-Prātiśākhya; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXII. 13; Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 3५. See विराम.
viśleṣaseparation of vowels that are in coalescence: showing separately the two vowels that are combined together in the Saṁhitā Text.The term is contrasted with प्रश्लेष which is the same as एकादेश in the terminology of Pāṇini.
vaiyādhikaraṇyaIit. possession of separate residences, as contrasted with सामानाधिकरण्य: absence of apposition; use in different cases, non-agreement in case.
vyañjanasaṃdhia junction or coalescence of two consonants as distinguished from स्वरसंधि. In Panini's system of grammar the name हृल्संधि is given to व्यञ्जनसंधि and the Siddhantakaumudi has given a separate section for it.
vyatiriktadistinct from, separate from, confer, compare कर्मादिभ्येान्य: प्रातिपदिकार्थव्यतिरिक्तः स्वस्वामिसंबन्धादिःशेष: | Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II. 3. 50.
vyatireka(1)surplus, excess; (2) separate presence; (3) contrary thing: confer, compare तत्र फलव्यतिरेकोपि स्यात् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahnika 1.
vyapavarga(1)division of a single thing into its constituent elements; confer, compare स्थानिवद्भावाद् व्यपवर्ग: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII. 2.36, VII.3.44 Vart. 3; (2) distinct comprehension as possessed of a specific quality: cf न हि गौरित्युक्ते व्यपवर्गौ गम्यते शुक्ला नीला कपिला कपॊतेति। M.Bh, on P. I.2.64 Vart 37 ; (3) separation into parts, confer, compare कश्चिदेकेनैव प्रहारेण व्यपवर्गे करोति, M.Bh.on V.I.119 Vart 5; (4) distinct notion as a separate unit after the things have been combined confer, compare एकादेशे कृते व्यपवर्गाभावः संबुद्धिलोपो न प्राप्नोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.1.69 Vart 3; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII.1.80.
vyapavṛktadistinctly separated as two or more consonants joined together in a conjunct consonant, as contrasted with the two vowels in a diphthong which cannot be called व्यपवृक्त; confer, compare नाव्यपवृक्तस्यावयवे तद्विधिर्यथा द्रव्येषु. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 3.4 Vart. 9. confer, compare also वर्णैकदेशा: के वर्णग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते | ये व्यपवृक्ता अपि वर्णा भवन्ति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 3,4 Vart. ll .
vyavacchinna(1)separated; detached from a specific thing by the loss of connection with it; confer, compare एवमेतास्मिन्नुभयतो व्यवाच्छिन्ने यदि स्वार्थे जहाति जहातु नाम Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.1. Vart. 2; (2) characterized or possessed of an intervention by similar things confer, compare तद्वा अनेकेन निपातनेन व्यवच्छिन्नं न शक्यमनुवर्तयितुमिति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 3.83; cf also P. VI. 4.2.
vyavadhāna(I)intervention; the word is used in connection with the intervention or occurrence of letters or phonetic units between the cause ( निमित्त ) of an operation and the operatee (विधिभाक् ); cf लोपे कृते नास्ति व्यवधानम् | स्थानिवद्भावाद् व्यवधानमेव | The word is used also in the sense of intervention in , general, which separates the two connected things; व्यवधानं च भवति वाक्ये राज्ञ ऋद्धस्य पुरुषः; the word व्यवाय is used in the same sense; confer, compare अट्कुप्वाङ्नुम्व्यवायेपि; (2) an inserted letter or phonetic element; confer, compare व्यवधानः अन्त्यविकारे T, Pr. 185, 186.
vyavaheitahaving an intervention by a dissimilar thing; separated by something coming between; confer, compare संयोगसंज्ञा व्यवहितानां मा भूत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.8. Vart, 5.
vyavāyaintervention, separation by insertion; separation by means of the insertion of a phonetic element. See व्य्वधान a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. confer, compare अट्कुप्वाङ्नुम्व्यवायेपि P. VIII. 4.2: अडभ्यासव्यवायेपि P. VI. 1.26: confer, compare अङ्गव्यवाये चाङ्गपर: Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 190; संयेागानां स्वरभक्त्या व्यवायः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 25.
vyastaseparated into its constituent elements; separated by a new insertion; a recital of the Vedic text by separating a coalesced vowel, which is looked upon as a fault of recital.
vyāyataseparated; one out of the two | conjoined consonants separated by inserting a vowel in between; confer, compare व्यस्यन्त्यन्तर्महतोs व्यायतं तं दीर्घायु: सूर्यो रुशदीर्त ऊर्जम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 19, where Uvvata gives the explanation-दीर्घात्परं अव्यायतं अपृथग्भूतं रफेण सक्तमित्यर्थः एवंभूतं व्यस्यन्ति पृथक्कुर्वन्ति | यथा | दीरिघायु: ! सूरिय: | रुशदीरिते | ऊरजम्. Rk Samhita I. 85. 39, X. 158. 1, IX. 91.3 and IX. 63. 2. व्यावर्तन reversing the order of words and going back from a subsequent word to the previous one, as in the Krama,.Jata and other artificial recitals of Veda.
vyāsa(1)showing separately; separate expression as contrasted with समास; (2) fault of pronunciation of the type of unnecessarily extending the place of origin as also the instrument of the production of sound; confer, compare स्थानकरणयोर्विस्तारे व्यासो सो नाम दोषो जायते Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 2.
vyūha(l)resolution or determination: confer, compare अकृतव्यूहाः पाणिनीयाः । न कृतो विाशीष्ट ऊहो निश्चयः ,शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिविषये यैः इत्यर्थः Par. Sek. Pari. 56; (2) separation of the phonetic elements in a word, done especially for the recital of the Vedic texts according to metre:confer, compare व्यूहैः संपत्समीक्ष्योने क्षेप्रवणैकंभाविनाम् । व्यूहैः पृथक्करणेन Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VIII.22.
śabarasvāmina grammarian to whom a metrical treatise on genders named लिङ्गानुशासन is ascribedition This शवरस्वामिन् was comparatively a modern grammarian who was given the title बालयोगीश्वर. This लिङ्गानुशासन has a commentary written by हृर्षवर्धन Evidently these grammarians शबरस्वामिन् and हृर्षवर्धन are different from the famous author of the मीमांसाभाष्य and the patron of the poet Bana respectively.
saṃpṛktacompletely mixed in such a way that one of the two or more letters mixed together can neither be distinguished as different, nor can be separated; confer, compare तद्यथा । क्षीरोदके संपृक्ते आमिश्रीभूतत्वान्न ज्ञायते कियत् क्षीरं कियदुदकम् । एवमिहापि न ज्ञायते कियदुदात्तं कियदनुदात्तम् l M.Bh. on P.I. 2.32.
saṃbuddhi(1)a term used in Panini's grammar for the case-affix of the vocative singular; confer, compare एकवचनं संबुद्धिः P. II. 3, 49; the vocative is, however, not looked upon as a separate case, but the designation संबोधन is given to the nominative case, having the sense of संबोधनः (2) the word is also used in the general sense of संबोधन i. e. addressing or calling: confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्धौः किमिदं पारिभाषिक्याः संबुद्धेर्ग्रहणमेकवचनं संबुद्वि: (II. 3.49) आहोस्विदन्वर्थग्रहणं संबोधनं संबुद्वि: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.33.
saṃyogaconnection in general; the word is used as a technical term in the grammar of Panini, in the sense of two or more consonants coming closely together unseparated by any vowel: confer, compareहलोनन्तराः संयोगः cf P. I. 1.7; cf also अनन्तरं संयोगः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 48.
saṃskāra(1)preparation such as (a)that of a word by placing the affix after the base and accomplishing all the necessary changes, or (b) that of a sentence by placing all words connected mutually by syntax and then explaining their formation; these two views are respectively called the पदसंस्कारपक्ष and the वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष; (2) grammatical formation; confer, compare स्वरसंस्कारयोश्छन्दसि नियम: । संस्कारो लोपागमवर्णविकारप्रकृतिभावलक्षण: Uvvata on V.Pr. I.1; confer, compare also तद्यत्र स्वरसंस्कारौ प्रादेशिकेन गुणेन अन्वितौ स्याताम् et cetera, and others Nir.I.
saṃhitāpāṭhathe running text or the original text of the four Vedas as originally composedition This text, which was the original one, was split up into its constituent padas or separate words by ancient sages शौनक, अात्रेय and others,with a view to facilitating the understanding of it, and consequently to preserving it in the oral tradition.The original was called मूलप्रकृति of which the पदपाठ and the क्रमपाठ which were comparatively older than the other artificial recitations such as the जटापाठ, घनपाठ and others, are found mentioned in the Pratisakhya works.
satiśiṣṭaprescribed subsequently; occurring after the preceding has taken place; confer, compare सति शिष्टोपि विकरणस्वरः सार्वधातुकस्वरं न बाधते; although the words सति and शिष्टः are separate still it is habitual to take them combined in an adjectival sense and make the word सतिशिष्ट an adjective to the word स्वर as in the dictum सतिशिष्टस्वरबलीयस्त्वं च P. VI. 1. 158 Vart. 9.
satiśiṣṭasvarabalīyastvathe comparatively superior strength of a subsequent accent which prevails by the removal of the accent obtaining before in the process of the formation of a word; cf VI. 1. 158 Vart. 9. See सतिशिष्ट a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
sannataragraver, comparatively more grave; a term used in connection with a grave accent which is followed by a vowel with an acute or circumflex accent; exempli gratia, for example the vowel इ of सरस्वति in इमं मे गङ्गे यमुने सरस्वति शुतुद्रि; confer, compare सन्नं दृष्ट्वा सन्नतर इत्येतद् भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.33.
samavāya(I)combination as contrasted with व्यवाय disjunction or separation; (2) the enumeration of the letters of the alphabet in a particular order so as to facilitate their combination, technically termed प्रत्याहार; confer, compare वृतिसमवायार्थ उपदेशः । का पुनर्वृत्तिः l शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः । अथ कः समवायः । वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण संनिवेशः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika l Vart. 15. confer, compare also समवायो वर्णगत: क्रमविशेषः । Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on the Bhasya mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; (3) contact; cf रक्तै रागः समवाये स्वराणाम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.24.
saralāname of a comparatively modern lucid commentary written by Taranatha Tarkavacaspati on the Siddhantakaumudi.
sphoṭana(1)manifestation of the sense of a word by the external sound or dhvani; the same as sphota; (2) separate or distinct pronunciation of a consonant in a way by breaking it from the cor.junct consonants; confer, compare स्फोटनं नाम पिण्डीभूतस्य संयोगस्य पृथगुश्चरणम् स दोषो वा न वा | V. Pr.IV.165.
haimabṛhatprakriyāa work very similar to the Siddhantakaumudi written by a comparatively modern Jain scholar named Girijashankar Shastri.
Vedabase Search
Results for para2822 results
para and in otherBG 16.18
para and of othersSB 7.5.3
para and of others'SB 10.58.10
para and of the enemy sideSB 10.76.20
para and other'sSB 10.72.6
para another'sSB 11.28.2
para anyone else'sSB 11.28.1
para by anotherSB 10.64.39
para by the enemySB 10.76.24
para enemySB 10.58.13-14
para extremelySB 10.84.67-68
para get itCC Adi 17.32
para higherCC Adi 1.3
CC Adi 2.5
SB 3.5.10
para O SupremeSB 7.9.43
para of anotherSB 11.15.23
SB 7.13.40
para of misidentification with other conceptionsSB 11.28.23
para of other menSB 12.1.39-40
para of othersSB 10.30.9
SB 10.33.26-27
SB 11.15.8-9
SB 11.7.38
SB 7.9.41
para of superior (the causes of material creation)SB 10.51.53
para of the enemySB 10.44.33
SB 10.50.16
SB 10.50.22
SB 10.76.7
para of the liberated living entities or the demigodsSB 11.9.17-18
para of the superiorSB 10.59.28
para of the transcendental LordSB 6.16.63
para opposingSB 10.50.29
SB 10.54.35
SB 10.79.3-4
para otherCC Madhya 8.248
SB 3.26.6
para othersCC Adi 9.41
SB 1.19.23
para outsiderCC Madhya 10.58
para previousSB 2.5.26-29
para previousSB 2.5.26-29
para previousSB 2.5.26-29
para supremeSB 10.52.40
para SupremeSB 10.63.25
para supremeSB 11.10.30
para the bestSB 10.42.12
para the conclusion at the endCC Madhya 18.197
para the highestSB 10.42.5
para the situation of the spiritual worldSB 11.24.29
para the SupremeSB 3.5.37
para transcendentalSB 2.2.14
SB 4.28.29
SB 5.1.23
SB 7.15.57
SB 8.3.8-9
para upon othersSB 11.11.19
para nāma another nameCC Madhya 20.155
para nāma another nameCC Madhya 20.155
para para one after anotherCC Madhya 19.233
para para one after anotherCC Madhya 19.233
para-abhidhyānena by the bodily concept of the selfSB 5.14.10
para-abhidhyānena by the bodily concept of the selfSB 5.14.10
para-abhidhyāyinyā by accepting the body as the selfSB 4.2.23
para-abhidhyāyinyā by accepting the body as the selfSB 4.2.23
para-ākhyam two parārdhasSB 3.32.9
para-ākhyam two parārdhasSB 3.32.9
para-ākhyam who is transcendentalSB 1.18.42
para-ākhyam who is transcendentalSB 1.18.42
para-amṛta more nectareanCC Antya 16.151
para-amṛta more nectareanCC Antya 16.151
CC Antya 17.44
para-amṛta more nectareanCC Antya 17.44
para-aṇu like the atomic dustSB 10.14.11
para-aṇu like the atomic dustSB 10.14.11
para-aṇu-caryā moving like the atomic dustCC Adi 5.72
para-aṇu-caryā moving like the atomic dustCC Adi 5.72
para-aṇu-caryā moving like the atomic dustCC Adi 5.72
para-anubhāvaḥ who was very exalted in spiritual realizationSB 5.13.24
para-anubhāvaḥ who was very exalted in spiritual realizationSB 5.13.24
para-anubhāvam because of his pure devotion to the Supreme LordSB 9.5.24
para-anubhāvam because of his pure devotion to the Supreme LordSB 9.5.24
para-anucintām transcendental thoughtsSB 2.2.7
para-anucintām transcendental thoughtsSB 2.2.7
para-apekṣā dependence on othersCC Antya 6.224
para-apekṣā dependence on othersCC Antya 6.224
para-ardhaḥ half of the duration of lifeSB 3.11.34
para-ardhaḥ half of the duration of lifeSB 3.11.34
para-ardhasya of the superior halfSB 3.11.35
para-ardhasya of the superior halfSB 3.11.35
para-ardhya by the most preciousSB 3.15.41
para-ardhya by the most preciousSB 3.15.41
para-ardhya most valuableSB 3.15.27
para-ardhya most valuableSB 3.15.27
para-ardhyaiḥ most valuableSB 10.16.65-67
para-ardhyaiḥ most valuableSB 10.16.65-67
para-ardhyāni most valuableSB 3.23.29
para-ardhyāni most valuableSB 3.23.29
para-arditā being defeated by the enemiesSB 9.10.26
para-arditā being defeated by the enemiesSB 9.10.26
para-artha for the benefit of othersSB 10.22.31-32
para-artha for the benefit of othersSB 10.22.31-32
para-artha the benefit of othersSB 11.7.38
para-artha the benefit of othersSB 11.7.38
para-artha-bhavakāḥ very beneficial to othersCC Antya 15.32
para-artha-bhavakāḥ very beneficial to othersCC Antya 15.32
para-artha-bhavakāḥ very beneficial to othersCC Antya 15.32
para-artha-īha acting and desiring for the SupremeSB 11.19.33-35
para-artha-īha acting and desiring for the SupremeSB 11.19.33-35
para-artha-īha acting and desiring for the SupremeSB 11.19.33-35
para-artha-niṣṭhāḥ interested in working for others by giving them the benefit of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, by enlightening them with Kṛṣṇa consciousnessSB 7.9.44
para-artha-niṣṭhāḥ interested in working for others by giving them the benefit of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, by enlightening them with Kṛṣṇa consciousnessSB 7.9.44
para-artha-niṣṭhāḥ interested in working for others by giving them the benefit of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, by enlightening them with Kṛṣṇa consciousnessSB 7.9.44
para-arthe for the wealth of othersSB 3.30.11
para-arthe for the wealth of othersSB 3.30.11
para-āśrayam shelter for othersSB 1.4.12
para-āśrayam shelter for othersSB 1.4.12
para-ātma of the Personality of GodheadSB 3.28.36
para-ātma of the Personality of GodheadSB 3.28.36
para-ātma of the Supreme SoulSB 4.9.5
para-ātma of the Supreme SoulSB 4.9.5
para-ātmā the SupersoulCC Adi 1.11
para-ātmā the SupersoulCC Adi 1.11
CC Adi 5.109
para-ātmā the SupersoulCC Adi 5.109
para-ātmā the Supreme SoulSB 10.64.26
para-ātmā the Supreme SoulSB 10.64.26
para-ātma-darśanaḥ realization of the Supreme Soul (spiritual knowledge)SB 7.9.6
para-ātma-darśanaḥ realization of the Supreme Soul (spiritual knowledge)SB 7.9.6
para-ātma-darśanaḥ realization of the Supreme Soul (spiritual knowledge)SB 7.9.6
para-ātma-niṣṭhā-mātra only for the determination to serve KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 3.8
para-ātma-niṣṭhā-mātra only for the determination to serve KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 3.8
para-ātma-niṣṭhā-mātra only for the determination to serve KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 3.8
para-ātma-niṣṭhā-mātra only for the determination to serve KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 3.8
para-ātma-niṣṭhām devotion to the Supreme Person, KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 3.6
para-ātma-niṣṭhām devotion to the Supreme Person, KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 3.6
para-ātma-niṣṭhām devotion to the Supreme Person, KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 3.6
SB 11.23.57
para-ātma-niṣṭhām devotion to the Supreme Person, KṛṣṇaSB 11.23.57
para-ātma-niṣṭhām devotion to the Supreme Person, KṛṣṇaSB 11.23.57
para-ātman O SupersoulCC Madhya 21.9
para-ātman O SupersoulCC Madhya 21.9
para-ātman O Supreme SoulSB 10.14.21
para-ātman O Supreme SoulSB 10.14.21
SB 10.51.57
para-ātman O Supreme SoulSB 10.51.57
para-ātmanaḥ knowledge of the Supreme LordSB 3.23.53
para-ātmanaḥ knowledge of the Supreme LordSB 3.23.53
para-ātmanām of the subordinate living entities, who work only under the direction of the SupersoulSB 6.12.7
para-ātmanām of the subordinate living entities, who work only under the direction of the SupersoulSB 6.12.7
para-ātmane the Supreme SoulSB 10.86.48
para-ātmane the Supreme SoulSB 10.86.48
para-ātmani the SupersoulSB 10.14.9
para-ātmani the SupersoulSB 10.14.9
para-ātmani unto the SupersoulSB 9.5.25
para-ātmani unto the SupersoulSB 9.5.25
para-ātmanoḥ of the SupersoulSB 4.22.27
para-ātmanoḥ of the SupersoulSB 4.22.27
para-ātmatām dedication to othersSB 11.7.38
para-ātmatām dedication to othersSB 11.7.38
para-avara of all things, both superior and inferiorSB 10.16.48
para-avara of all things, both superior and inferiorSB 10.16.48
para-avara of higher or lowerSB 7.9.27
para-avara of higher or lowerSB 7.9.27
para-avara past and futureSB 1.4.16
para-avara past and futureSB 1.4.16
para-avara spiritual and materialSB 3.2.15
para-avara spiritual and materialSB 3.2.15
para-avara with past and futureSB 4.13.24
para-avara with past and futureSB 4.13.24
para-avara-ātma-āśrayaṇam the shelter of all living entities, low and highSB 8.7.27
para-avara-ātma-āśrayaṇam the shelter of all living entities, low and highSB 8.7.27
para-avara-ātma-āśrayaṇam the shelter of all living entities, low and highSB 8.7.27
para-avara-ātma-āśrayaṇam the shelter of all living entities, low and highSB 8.7.27
para-avara-dṛk seeing the cause and effectSB 6.16.11
para-avara-dṛk seeing the cause and effectSB 6.16.11
para-avara-dṛk seeing the cause and effectSB 6.16.11
para-avara-īśam the proprietor of the spiritual and material worldsSB 3.32.7
para-avara-īśam the proprietor of the spiritual and material worldsSB 3.32.7
para-avara-īśam the proprietor of the spiritual and material worldsSB 3.32.7
para-avara-īśe the Lord of the universeCC Madhya 22.46
para-avara-īśe the Lord of the universeCC Madhya 22.46
para-avara-īśe the Lord of the universeCC Madhya 22.46
CC Madhya 22.84
para-avara-īśe the Lord of the universeCC Madhya 22.84
para-avara-īśe the Lord of the universeCC Madhya 22.84
para-avaram superior and inferiorSB 9.5.7
para-avaram superior and inferiorSB 9.5.7
para-avaram the cause and effect of destinySB 10.8.5
para-avaram the cause and effect of destinySB 10.8.5
para-avarāṇām of all causes and effectsSB 10.12.38
para-avarāṇām of all causes and effectsSB 10.12.38
para-avarasya and of lower and higher conditions of lifeSB 5.11.7
para-avarasya and of lower and higher conditions of lifeSB 5.11.7
para-avaratvam discrimination due to higher or lower levelsSB 7.9.27
para-avaratvam discrimination due to higher or lower levelsSB 7.9.27
para-avare in the matter of mundane and transcendentalSB 2.9.26
para-avare in the matter of mundane and transcendentalSB 2.9.26
para-avare the source of all living entities, from the highest, Lord Brahmā, to the lowest, like the insignificant antsSB 5.15.7
para-avare the source of all living entities, from the highest, Lord Brahmā, to the lowest, like the insignificant antsSB 5.15.7
para-avareṣām of all living entities, in higher or lower statuses of lifeSB 9.1.8
para-avareṣām of all living entities, in higher or lower statuses of lifeSB 9.1.8
para-avareṣām of both, in the material and spiritual existenceSB 6.4.30
para-avareṣām of both, in the material and spiritual existenceSB 6.4.30
para-avareṣām of different types of living entities known as demigods and demonsSB 7.10.43-44
para-avareṣām of different types of living entities known as demigods and demonsSB 7.10.43-44
para-avareṣu in exalted or hellish conditions of lifeSB 7.6.20-23
para-avareṣu in exalted or hellish conditions of lifeSB 7.6.20-23
para-ayaṇam the ultimate shelterSB 10.80.10
para-ayaṇam the ultimate shelterSB 10.80.10
para-ayanam the ultimate shelterSB 11.13.39
para-ayanam the ultimate shelterSB 11.13.39
para-ayaṇāya the shelter of all transcendentalistsSB 8.3.15
para-ayaṇāya the shelter of all transcendentalistsSB 8.3.15
para-āyuḥ that personality who lives for millions and millions of years (Lord Brahmā)SB 8.12.10
para-āyuḥ that personality who lives for millions and millions of years (Lord Brahmā)SB 8.12.10
para-bādhayā in spite of exploiting all othersSB 5.14.14
para-bādhayā in spite of exploiting all othersSB 5.14.14
para-bhṛtaḥ maintainers of othersCC Madhya 23.114
para-bhṛtaḥ maintainers of othersCC Madhya 23.114
para-bhṛtaḥ one who maintains othersSB 2.2.5
para-bhṛtaḥ one who maintains othersSB 2.2.5
para-brahma of the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 10.13.55
para-brahma of the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 10.13.55
para-brahma the Supreme BrahmanCC Adi 17.106
para-brahma the Supreme BrahmanCC Adi 17.106
para-brahmaṇaḥ the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 6.9.42
para-brahmaṇaḥ the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 6.9.42
para-buddhibhiḥ by instructions from the enemy's campSB 7.5.6
para-buddhibhiḥ by instructions from the enemy's campSB 7.5.6
para-cakra of the enemies' military strengthSB 9.15.31
para-cakra of the enemies' military strengthSB 9.15.31
para-chandam the desire of anotherSB 3.31.25
para-chandam the desire of anotherSB 3.31.25
para-cintakāḥ thinking of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.32.8
para-cintakāḥ thinking of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.32.8
para-daivatāya the supremely worshipable DeitySB 12.8.47
para-daivatāya the supremely worshipable DeitySB 12.8.47
para-daivatena who is the supreme worshipable DeityCC Antya 7.32
para-daivatena who is the supreme worshipable DeityCC Antya 7.32
CC Madhya 8.75
para-daivatena who is the supreme worshipable DeityCC Madhya 8.75
para-daivatena with the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 10.12.7-11
para-daivatena with the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 10.12.7-11
para-dāra another's wife, or a woman other than his own wifeSB 5.14.22
para-dāra another's wife, or a woman other than his own wifeSB 5.14.22
para-devatā most worshipableCC Adi 4.83
para-devatā most worshipableCC Adi 4.83
CC Madhya 23.68
para-devatā most worshipableCC Madhya 23.68
para-devatā of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 5.1.38
para-devatā of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 5.1.38
para-devatā their most worshipable DeitySB 10.43.17
para-devatā their most worshipable DeitySB 10.43.17
para-devatā-ākhyām the Supreme Lord, the Personality of Godhead, appearing in that formSB 8.9.18
para-devatā-ākhyām the Supreme Lord, the Personality of Godhead, appearing in that formSB 8.9.18
para-devatā-ākhyām the Supreme Lord, the Personality of Godhead, appearing in that formSB 8.9.18
para-devatāyāḥ of the transcendental LordSB 5.2.7
para-devatāyāḥ of the transcendental LordSB 5.2.7
para-devatāyāḥ the Absolute TruthSB 8.12.43
para-devatāyāḥ the Absolute TruthSB 8.12.43
para-devatāyām the origin of all demigodsSB 5.7.6
para-devatāyām the origin of all demigodsSB 5.7.6
para-dhana another's propertyCC Antya 15.16
para-dhana another's propertyCC Antya 15.16
para-dharmaḥ duties prescribed for othersBG 3.35
para-dharmaḥ duties prescribed for othersBG 3.35
para-dharmaḥ imitating religious systems for which one is unfitSB 7.15.13
para-dharmaḥ imitating religious systems for which one is unfitSB 7.15.13
para-dharmaḥ religious principles practiced by othersSB 7.15.12
para-dharmaḥ religious principles practiced by othersSB 7.15.12
para-dharmāt than another's occupationBG 18.47
para-dharmāt than another's occupationBG 18.47
para-dharmāt than duties mentioned for othersBG 3.35
para-dharmāt than duties mentioned for othersBG 3.35
para-dravyāṇi another's money and possessionsSB 5.14.22
para-dravyāṇi another's money and possessionsSB 5.14.22
para-drohe in putting others in difficultyCC Madhya 2.22
para-drohe in putting others in difficultyCC Madhya 2.22
para-duḥkhadaḥ who is apt to inflict pains upon othersSB 4.8.17
para-duḥkhadaḥ who is apt to inflict pains upon othersSB 4.8.17
para-geham another's homeSB 1.13.21
para-geham another's homeSB 1.13.21
para-ghare in others' housesCC Adi 14.42
para-ghare in others' housesCC Adi 14.42
para-icchayā by the order of othersSB 5.9.9-10
para-icchayā by the order of othersSB 5.9.9-10
para-īśa O Supreme LordSB 7.8.49
para-īśa O Supreme LordSB 7.8.49
para-īśa of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 11.2.42
para-īśa of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 11.2.42
para-īśaḥ the Supreme LordCC Madhya 22.144
para-īśaḥ the Supreme LordCC Madhya 22.144
SB 11.5.42
para-īśaḥ the Supreme LordSB 11.5.42
para-īśam the Lord of the supreme personalitiesSB 8.3.20-21
para-īśam the Lord of the supreme personalitiesSB 8.3.20-21
para-īśam the Lord, who is transcendentally situatedSB 8.5.30
para-īśam the Lord, who is transcendentally situatedSB 8.5.30
para-īśam the transcendental controllerSB 4.31.18
para-īśam the transcendental controllerSB 4.31.18
para-īśāya the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 10.70.23
para-īśāya the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 10.70.23
para-īśāya who is supreme, transcendental and worshipable for such exalted persons as Brahmā and ŚivaSB 8.3.2
para-īśāya who is supreme, transcendental and worshipable for such exalted persons as Brahmā and ŚivaSB 8.3.2
para-kāya the bodies of othersSB 11.15.6-7
para-kāya the bodies of othersSB 11.15.6-7
para-kāye towards the body of anotherSB 3.29.23
para-kāye towards the body of anotherSB 3.29.23
para-kāyeṣu (the souls) within the bodies of othersSB 11.5.15
para-kāyeṣu (the souls) within the bodies of othersSB 11.5.15
para-kṛtaḥ done by the enemiesSB 7.5.10
para-kṛtaḥ done by the enemiesSB 7.5.10
para-loka for the transcendental worldCC Adi 15.23
para-loka for the transcendental worldCC Adi 15.23
para-loka in the next worldCC Madhya 7.111
para-loka in the next worldCC Madhya 7.111
para-loka next worldCC Adi 16.21
para-loka next worldCC Adi 16.21
para-loka spiritual worldCC Madhya 12.48
para-loka spiritual worldCC Madhya 12.48
para-loka the next worldCC Antya 4.131
para-loka the next worldCC Antya 4.131
para-loka to the next worldSB 10.78.1-2
para-loka to the next worldSB 10.78.1-2
para-mardanaḥ Indra, who is expert in defeating the enemySB 8.11.12
para-mardanaḥ Indra, who is expert in defeating the enemySB 8.11.12
para-matera khaṇḍane busy in refuting the opinions of othersCC Madhya 25.55
para-matera khaṇḍane busy in refuting the opinions of othersCC Madhya 25.55
para-matera khaṇḍane busy in refuting the opinions of othersCC Madhya 25.55
para-muṇḍe on another's headCC Antya 5.77
para-muṇḍe on another's headCC Antya 5.77
para-nārī others' wivesCC Madhya 2.19
para-nārī others' wivesCC Madhya 2.19
para-pakṣa on the side of the enemySB 7.5.6
para-pakṣa on the side of the enemySB 7.5.6
para-para one after anotherCC Madhya 8.87
para-para one after anotherCC Madhya 8.87
para-parābhavam being defeated by the enemiesSB 6.7.31
para-parābhavam being defeated by the enemiesSB 6.7.31
para-parigraham the wife of another personSB 7.7.8
para-parigraham the wife of another personSB 7.7.8
para-prāṇaiḥ at the cost of others' livesSB 1.7.37
para-prāṇaiḥ at the cost of others' livesSB 1.7.37
para-praṇītam educated by anyone elseSB 7.5.28
para-praṇītam educated by anyone elseSB 7.5.28
para-prema-pātrī the giver of the highest loveCC Madhya 3.28
para-prema-pātrī the giver of the highest loveCC Madhya 3.28
para-prema-pātrī the giver of the highest loveCC Madhya 3.28
para-purañjaya the conqueror of the kingdoms of othersSB 9.18.19
para-purañjaya the conqueror of the kingdoms of othersSB 9.18.19
para-ṛddhyā by others' happinessSB 3.14.49
para-ṛddhyā by others' happinessSB 3.14.49
para-sainika of the soldiers on the opposite sideSB 1.9.35
para-sainika of the soldiers on the opposite sideSB 1.9.35
para-sampīḍayā by giving pain to othersSB 6.16.42
para-sampīḍayā by giving pain to othersSB 6.16.42
para-sańkaṭam the pain of othersSB 6.10.6
para-sańkaṭam the pain of othersSB 6.10.6
para-śańkayā because of suspecting another lionSB 8.2.6
para-śańkayā because of suspecting another lionSB 8.2.6
para-sattvam the ultimate entityBs 5.41
para-sattvam the ultimate entityBs 5.41
para-strīṣu to other womenSB 4.16.17
para-strīṣu to other womenSB 4.16.17
para-svabhāva-karmāṇi the characteristics or activities of othersCC Antya 8.78
para-svabhāva-karmāṇi the characteristics or activities of othersCC Antya 8.78
para-svabhāva-karmāṇi the characteristics or activities of othersCC Antya 8.78
para-śvaḥ the day after tomorrowSB 10.37.15-20
para-śvaḥ the day after tomorrowSB 10.37.15-20
SB 10.50.46
para-śvaḥ the day after tomorrowSB 10.50.46
para-tantra dependentCC Madhya 12.49
para-tantra dependentCC Madhya 12.49
para-tantra dependent on anyoneCC Madhya 10.15
para-tantra dependent on anyoneCC Madhya 10.15
CC Madhya 17.8
para-tantra dependent on anyoneCC Madhya 17.8
para-tantram conditionalSB 10.70.28
para-tantram conditionalSB 10.70.28
para-tantrayoḥ who are under the control of othersSB 10.45.9
para-tantrayoḥ who are under the control of othersSB 10.45.9
para-tāpinaḥ envious of other living entitiesCC Madhya 24.273
para-tāpinaḥ envious of other living entitiesCC Madhya 24.273
para-taram superiorBG 7.7
para-taram superiorBG 7.7
para-tattva Absolute TruthCC Adi 7.138
para-tattva Absolute TruthCC Adi 7.138
para-tattva as the SupremeCC Adi 7.120
para-tattva as the SupremeCC Adi 7.120
para-tattva the ultimate truthCC Adi 2.8
para-tattva the ultimate truthCC Adi 2.8
para-tattva-sīmā the highest limit of the Absolute TruthCC Adi 2.110
para-tattva-sīmā the highest limit of the Absolute TruthCC Adi 2.110
para-tattva-sīmā the highest limit of the Absolute TruthCC Adi 2.110
para-tattvera of the Absolute TruthCC Adi 1.24
para-tattvera of the Absolute TruthCC Adi 1.24
para-tejaḥ others' prowessSB 3.15.1
para-tejaḥ others' prowessSB 3.15.1
para-udayena by others' flourishing conditionSB 4.6.47
para-udayena by others' flourishing conditionSB 4.6.47
para-udbhave for the offspring of anotherSB 10.14.49
para-udbhave for the offspring of anotherSB 10.14.49
para-udyame in the matter of philanthropic workSB 4.22.62
para-udyame in the matter of philanthropic workSB 4.22.62
para-upakāra others' benefitCC Antya 15.35
para-upakāra others' benefitCC Antya 15.35
para-upakārī benefactors of all other living entitiesCC Antya 16.147
para-upakārī benefactors of all other living entitiesCC Antya 16.147
para-veśma-gām one who has gone to another man's house and committed adulterySB 9.11.9
para-veśma-gām one who has gone to another man's house and committed adulterySB 9.11.9
para-veśma-gām one who has gone to another man's house and committed adulterySB 9.11.9
para-vidhi the other ruleCC Antya 8.79
para-vidhi the other ruleCC Antya 8.79
para-vidhiḥ the latter ruleCC Antya 8.80
para-vidhiḥ the latter ruleCC Antya 8.80
para-vidyāyām in the transcendental knowledge of spiritual life (devotional service)SB 5.9.8
para-vidyāyām in the transcendental knowledge of spiritual life (devotional service)SB 5.9.8
para-vīra of opposing heroesSB 10.39.10
para-vīra of opposing heroesSB 10.39.10
para-vīra-hā although quite able to punish the enemySB 9.2.8
para-vīra-hā although quite able to punish the enemySB 9.2.8
para-vīra-hā although quite able to punish the enemySB 9.2.8
para-vīra-hā Paraśurāma, who could kill the heroes of the enemiesSB 9.15.34
para-vīra-hā Paraśurāma, who could kill the heroes of the enemiesSB 9.15.34
para-vīra-hā Paraśurāma, who could kill the heroes of the enemiesSB 9.15.34
para-vīra-hā the killer of the opposing warriorSB 1.7.29
para-vīra-hā the killer of the opposing warriorSB 1.7.29
para-vīra-hā the killer of the opposing warriorSB 1.7.29
para-vīra-hā who could very well subdue his enemiesSB 9.1.26
para-vīra-hā who could very well subdue his enemiesSB 9.1.26
para-vīra-hā who could very well subdue his enemiesSB 9.1.26
para-vitta-apatya-kalatrāṇi the money, wife and children of anotherSB 5.26.8
para-vitta-apatya-kalatrāṇi the money, wife and children of anotherSB 5.26.8
para-vitta-apatya-kalatrāṇi the money, wife and children of anotherSB 5.26.8
para-vitta-apatya-kalatrāṇi the money, wife and children of anotherSB 5.26.8
para-vitta-hartuḥ of one who steals the money of others by cheating or by transactions on the black marketSB 7.6.15
para-vitta-hartuḥ of one who steals the money of others by cheating or by transactions on the black marketSB 7.6.15
para-vitta-hartuḥ of one who steals the money of others by cheating or by transactions on the black marketSB 7.6.15
para-vyasaninī attached to another manCC Madhya 1.211
para-vyasaninī attached to another manCC Madhya 1.211
para-vyathaḥ the painful conditions of othersSB 5.26.17
para-vyathaḥ the painful conditions of othersSB 5.26.17
para-vyathānām the pain of othersSB 5.26.17
para-vyathānām the pain of othersSB 5.26.17
para-vyoma in the spiritual skyCC Adi 2.57
para-vyoma in the spiritual skyCC Adi 2.57
CC Adi 2.58
para-vyoma in the spiritual skyCC Adi 2.58
para-vyoma of the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.6
para-vyoma of the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.6
para-vyoma situated in the spiritual skyCC Adi 2.71
para-vyoma situated in the spiritual skyCC Adi 2.71
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Adi 5.14
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Adi 5.14
CC Madhya 19.153
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Madhya 19.153
CC Madhya 21.106
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.106
CC Madhya 21.46
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.46
CC Madhya 21.51
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.51
CC Madhya 21.7
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.7
CC Madhya 21.88
para-vyoma the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.88
para-vyoma the spiritual worldCC Madhya 24.22
para-vyoma the spiritual worldCC Madhya 24.22
para-vyoma-adhikārī the predominating Deity of the Vaikuṇṭha planetsCC Madhya 21.115
para-vyoma-adhikārī the predominating Deity of the Vaikuṇṭha planetsCC Madhya 21.115
para-vyoma-adhikārī the predominating Deity of the Vaikuṇṭha planetsCC Madhya 21.115
para-vyoma-dhāme in the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.3
para-vyoma-dhāme in the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.3
para-vyoma-dhāme in the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.3
para-vyoma-madhye within the spiritual skyCC Adi 5.26
para-vyoma-madhye within the spiritual skyCC Adi 5.26
para-vyoma-madhye within the spiritual skyCC Adi 5.26
para-vyome and in the spiritual worldCC Madhya 20.398
para-vyome and in the spiritual worldCC Madhya 20.398
para-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Adi 1.78
para-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Adi 1.78
CC Adi 5.37
para-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Adi 5.37
CC Adi 5.40
para-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Adi 5.40
CC Madhya 20.226
para-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Madhya 20.226
CC Madhya 20.264
para-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Madhya 20.264
para-vyome in the spiritual world or skyCC Madhya 20.269
para-vyome in the spiritual world or skyCC Madhya 20.269
para-vyome in the transcendental worldCC Adi 2.115
para-vyome in the transcendental worldCC Adi 2.115
para-vyome the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.115
para-vyome the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.115
para-vyomete in the transcendental worldCC Adi 2.23
para-vyomete in the transcendental worldCC Adi 2.23
paracāra preachingCC Adi 4.220
paracāra proclamationCC Adi 4.99-100
paracāra propagationCC Madhya 21.110
paradevatāyāḥ of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.9.18
para a supreme or superiorSB 7.15.8
para accepting as supremeSB 11.8.6
para aimedSB 10.74.20-21
para an enemySB 6.14.54
SB 7.5.11
para an outsiderSB 10.46.38
para another (friend or enemy)SB 6.17.19
para beyondCC Madhya 20.313
para beyond this material creationSB 10.10.29
SB 6.5.12
para comes as an enemySB 8.20.11
para differentCC Antya 1.67
SB 12.5.8
para differentiated partsSB 2.5.14
para distinctSB 10.59.29
para foreignSB 10.87.29
para greatSB 12.12.54
SB 12.4.11
SB 4.1.46-47
para in the next lifeBG 4.40
para moreSB 8.20.4
para not belonging to the same group or familySB 7.5.37
para of the demigodsSB 8.5.19-20
para otherSB 10.82.38
SB 6.16.10
SB 6.17.22
SB 6.17.33
SB 7.2.60
para othersSB 8.1.12
para separateSB 10.72.19
para sublimeSB 1.2.6
para superiorSB 1.17.10-11
SB 2.2.17
SB 6.3.12
SB 6.7.28
para superior qualitySB 1.2.28-29
para SupremeSB 10.84.18
SB 11.18.32
para supremeSB 11.18.47
SB 11.23.45
para SupremeSB 11.24.19
para supremeSB 2.9.5
SB 3.33.9
para SupremeSB 3.4.19
para supremeSB 6.19.12
para the bestSB 5.5.21-22
para the chiefSB 3.32.9
para the highestSB 10.29.24
para the supermostSB 7.11.8-12
para the supremeCC Madhya 19.106
CC Madhya 8.58
para the SupremeSB 10.2.41
SB 10.54.44
para the supremeSB 2.1.1
SB 2.1.6
para the SupremeSB 2.4.7
para the supremeSB 3.13.49
SB 7.9.20
para the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.1.10
para the Supreme, than whom no one is greaterBG 8.22
para the transcendentalSB 11.22.20
para the transcendental entitySB 11.10.9
para the ultimate goalBG 6.13-14
para transcendenceSB 2.10.36
para transcendentalBG 13.23
BG 8.20
CC Madhya 19.120
SB 1.11.6
SB 1.2.23
SB 1.7.23
SB 1.7.5
SB 10.3.31
SB 10.6.24
SB 10.88.5
SB 11.11.28
SB 11.16.34
SB 3.1.44
SB 3.12.48
SB 4.20.7
SB 5.11.13-14
SB 6.3.22
SB 6.4.1-2
SB 7.1.6
SB 7.6.20-23
SB 7.7.25
SB 7.7.55
SB 8.16.19
SB 8.6.10
SB 9.1.8
para transcendental or differentSB 8.3.3
para transcendental to material conditionsSB 7.2.22
para transcendental to material contaminationSB 7.2.43
para transcendental, beyond everything materialSB 10.3.13
para ultimateSB 10.84.21
para unconnectedSB 3.14.26
para who is transcendentalSB 10.1.23
paraḥ ātmā the Supreme SoulSB 10.56.27
paraḥ ātmā the Supreme SoulSB 10.56.27
paraḥ pumān the Supreme Brahman, the Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 20.274
paraḥ pumān the Supreme Brahman, the Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 20.274
paraḥ pumān the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.26.19
paraḥ pumān the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.26.19
paraḥ rasaḥ the best of all mellowsCC Madhya 19.104
paraḥ rasaḥ the best of all mellowsCC Madhya 19.104
paraḥ-param with one anotherSB 3.17.14
paraḥ-param with one anotherSB 3.17.14
paraḥ-rajaḥ beyond the mode of passion (situated in the pure mode of goodness)SB 5.7.14
paraḥ-rajaḥ beyond the mode of passion (situated in the pure mode of goodness)SB 5.7.14
paraiḥ by othersSB 1.18.50
SB 11.27.54
SB 3.16.19
SB 6.5.41
SB 8.23.19
SB 9.14.9
paraiḥ by our enemiesSB 8.16.16
paraiḥ by the enemiesSB 8.11.27
paraiḥ by the enemy (the Yādavas)SB 10.76.21
paraiḥ othersSB 1.1.2
paraiḥ transcendentalSB 7.7.19-20
paraiḥ with othersCC Adi 1.91
CC Madhya 24.100
CC Madhya 25.149
paraiḥ with those who are devotedSB 10.88.9
paraiti flies awaySB 2.7.47
paraiti will dwindleSB 1.13.25
parakāśa becomes manifestCC Antya 3.184
parakāśa manifestationCC Adi 14.65
CC Adi 17.7
CC Antya 7.14
CC Madhya 18.18
CC Madhya 20.191
parakāśa manifestationsCC Madhya 20.218
parakāśānanda Prakāśānanda SarasvatīCC Madhya 25.66
parakāśe manifestsCC Madhya 20.241
parakāya-praveśa the ability to enter another's bodySB 5.5.35
parakāya-praveśa the ability to enter another's bodySB 5.5.35
parakīyā and named parakīyā (another's)CC Adi 4.46
parakīyā-bhāve in the mood of parakīyā, or conjugal relations outside of marriageCC Adi 4.47
parakīyā-bhāve in the mood of parakīyā, or conjugal relations outside of marriageCC Adi 4.47
parakṛtam built by othersSB 11.9.15
parakṛtya enemy's interestSB 3.1.15
paraloka deathCC Adi 17.228
param aboveSB 4.24.29
param absoluteCC Madhya 20.359
CC Madhya 25.148
CC Madhya 8.266
SB 1.1.1
param achievedSB 12.6.30-31
param afterSB 3.10.30
param after the initiationSB 1.6.3
param afterwardsSB 3.31.2
param aloneSB 10.47.58
param and afterwardSB 4.28.31
param anotherCC Adi 1.3
CC Adi 2.5
SB 4.4.19
SB 6.17.19
SB 7.2.60
param as long as that of Lord BrahmāSB 8.17.10
param as the ultimate goal of lifeSB 9.21.16
param at mostSB 10.50.25-28
param back home, back to GodheadSB 11.18.14
param bestSB 1.2.28-29
SB 10.78.39
SB 6.4.21
param better meansSB 6.2.46
param beyondBG 13.18
SB 1.3.32
SB 1.8.18
SB 10.28.14
SB 10.70.4-5
SB 10.88.25-26
SB 10.89.51
SB 11.20.36
SB 11.24.12
SB 11.3.37
SB 3.24.43
SB 6.4.25
param beyond thatSB 8.20.34
param butSB 10.12.26
param but afterwardsCC Antya 1.146
param causeSB 10.48.18
param distantCC Madhya 11.8
param distinctSB 10.87.17
param elevation to the heavenly planets or becoming one by merging into BrahmanSB 9.4.65
param enemiesSB 9.6.19
param far superior thingsBG 2.59
param finalSB 3.11.16
param further supremeSB 2.9.9
param GodheadSB 1.15.44
param greatSB 12.8.31
SB 9.16.27
param greaterCC Adi 4.184
SB 10.81.39
SB 3.29.33
param greatestSB 4.5.23
param heavySB 2.3.21
param higherSB 6.3.16
SB 6.7.13
SB 7.3.32
param highestSB 1.10.30
SB 3.16.4
SB 3.22.20
param liberationSB 6.18.74
param merelySB 10.42.26-27
SB 10.71.8
SB 11.21.23
SB 4.3.21
param more supremeCC Madhya 25.36
param most gloriousSB 2.10.44
param next (after this life)SB 11.3.20
param of enemiesSB 10.89.34
param of the SupremeSB 11.5.28
param one who is dedicatedSB 10.72.11
param onlySB 10.17.12
SB 10.29.12
SB 10.54.13
SB 10.62.6
SB 10.83.19
SB 10.83.24
SB 10.86.44
SB 10.86.8
SB 11.5.8
SB 4.20.4
SB 5.2.10
SB 5.9.9-10
param only or ultimatelySB 7.6.4
param only this earthSB 5.14.40
param only, or completelySB 11.10.18
param otherCC Adi 4.155
SB 10.21.7
SB 11.18.15
SB 12.10.33
SB 5.24.25
param other thingSB 5.18.20
param othersSB 1.13.46
param perfectSB 10.10.15
param perfectlySB 10.10.13
param ratherSB 10.84.24-25
param rather onlySB 11.23.42
param separateSB 10.86.45
param something elseSB 10.14.27
param something elseSB 10.14.27
param sublimeSB 3.4.13
param superiorBG 3.42
BG 3.43
BG 4.4
SB 2.5.6
SB 4.21.40
SB 5.5.23
param superior lifeSB 9.18.43
param supremeBG 10.12-13
param supremeBG 10.12-13
BG 11.18
BG 7.24
BG 8.28
CC Adi 2.95
CC Antya 6.314
CC Madhya 19.106
CC Madhya 20.151
CC Madhya 21.100
CC Madhya 22.36
CC Madhya 25.39
CC Madhya 9.29
CC Madhya 9.30
MM 26
MM 44
SB 1.18.17
SB 10.41.33
param SupremeSB 10.43.17
param supremeSB 10.47.26
SB 10.51.56
SB 10.63.34
SB 10.65.29
SB 11.19.19
SB 11.29.25
SB 12.12.4
SB 12.13.18
SB 12.13.19
SB 12.5.11-12
SB 12.6.7
SB 3.2.12
SB 3.24.10
SB 3.33.30
SB 3.33.8
SB 3.4.18
SB 4.11.5
SB 4.12.25
SB 4.29.26-27
SB 4.29.49
SB 4.7.50
SB 4.7.61
SB 4.9.65
SB 6.19.11
SB 6.4.43
SB 7.11.4
SB 7.13.6
SB 8.23.17
SB 9.6.10
param supreme, transcendentalSB 4.16.25
param that much onlySB 7.13.2
param the actual transcendental positionSB 8.7.35
param the bestSB 11.20.35
SB 5.17.18
SB 8.16.58
param the foremostSB 4.11.31
param the goal of lifeSB 4.27.4
param the greatestSB 10.43.37
SB 3.13.12
param the highestSB 1.11.6
SB 10.47.47
SB 10.90.29
SB 3.16.17
param the Lord, who is transcendentalSB 11.9.4
param the most exaltedCC Madhya 11.31
param the only meansSB 7.9.46
param the SupremeBG 13.35
param the supremeBG 18.75
BG 3.11
param the SupremeBG 3.19
BG 7.13
param the supremeBs 5.56
CC Adi 1.53
CC Madhya 14.227
CC Madhya 24.76
CC Madhya 25.113
SB 1.19.21
SB 1.2.28-29
param the SupremeSB 10.13.22
SB 10.13.61
SB 10.87.12-13
SB 11.17.32
SB 11.18.48
param the supremeSB 11.19.36-39
param the supremeSB 11.19.36-39
param the SupremeSB 11.28.26
SB 11.3.32
SB 12.13.23
param the supremeSB 12.3.43
SB 12.6.32
SB 2.1.17
param the SupremeSB 2.10.7
param the supremeSB 2.2.18
param the SupremeSB 2.2.21
SB 2.3.9
SB 2.5.10
SB 2.9.17
param the supremeSB 2.9.33
SB 2.9.9
SB 3.11.42
SB 3.12.19
param the SupremeSB 3.15.47
param the supremeSB 3.15.6
SB 4.28.42
param the SupremeSB 4.29.45
SB 4.30.2
SB 4.6.42
param the supremeSB 4.7.25
param the SupremeSB 6.16.38
SB 6.16.53-54
SB 7.12.16
param the supremeSB 7.13.4
param the SupremeSB 7.7.40
param the supremeSB 8.16.11
param the SupremeSB 8.18.11
param the supremeSB 9.22.21-24
param the supreme abodeSB 6.15.28
param the supreme knowledge (by which one can attain devotional service)SB 7.11.2
param the Supreme LordSB 11.16.37
SB 11.20.16
SB 7.15.42
param the Supreme PersonSB 10.3.53
param the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.27.4
param the supreme wholeSB 2.3.10
param the transcendental worldSB 9.2.15
param the ultimate goalSB 9.2.14
param to be the SupremeSB 11.3.35
param to the SupremeSB 11.5.45
param to the supremeSB 12.3.49
param to the transcendental spiritual kingdomSB 12.3.51
param to the transcendental worldSB 5.5.9
param to the transcendental, spiritual kingdomCC Madhya 20.344
param topmostSB 3.31.39
param transcendenceSB 4.25.6
param transcendentalBG 11.38
param transcendentalBG 11.38
BG 11.47
BG 14.1
BG 14.19
BG 8.10
BG 9.11
CC Adi 17.308
CC Antya 20.12
SB 1.18.26
SB 10.3.12
SB 10.40.3
SB 10.69.30
SB 10.84.19
SB 10.89.51
SB 11.3.41
SB 2.10.34
param transcendentalSB 2.10.34
SB 2.6.43-45
SB 3.19.33
SB 3.24.33
SB 3.26.8
SB 3.29.36
SB 3.31.14
SB 3.32.26
SB 3.4.25
SB 3.7.17
SB 4.22.28
SB 4.22.51
SB 4.24.28
SB 4.24.31
SB 4.24.60
SB 4.24.75
SB 4.25.29
SB 4.25.5
SB 4.31.16
SB 4.9.13
SB 6.15.20
SB 6.16.56
SB 6.4.32
SB 6.9.26-27
SB 7.15.75
SB 8.12.9
param transcendentalSB 8.12.9
SB 8.3.20-21
SB 8.5.19-20
SB 8.5.29
SB 8.7.31
SB 8.7.35
SB 9.24.67
SB 9.4.17
SB 9.5.5
SB 9.8.21
param transcendental and supremeSB 11.10.11
param transcendental knowledgeSB 9.22.38
param transcendental to, beyondSB 8.5.24
param transcendental worldSB 4.6.45
param ultimateSB 10.41.46
SB 4.23.35
SB 4.23.9
SB 5.3.9
SB 9.9.14
param uncommonSB 9.6.39-40
param under controlSB 2.5.2
param upon the SupremeSB 12.6.9-10
param very greatSB 7.7.2
param very muchSB 10.12.42
SB 3.14.4
SB 8.12.13
SB 9.1.28
param who are transcendental, beyond this material worldSB 7.15.40
param who is transcendentalSB 8.2.32
SB 8.3.26
param adbhutam uncommon and wonderfulSB 8.23.26-27
param adbhutam uncommon and wonderfulSB 8.23.26-27
param añjanam the best ointment for the eyes, by which to see things as they areSB 10.10.13
param añjanam the best ointment for the eyes, by which to see things as they areSB 10.10.13
param bhāvam your transcendent situationSB 3.23.54
param bhāvam your transcendent situationSB 3.23.54
param brahma as the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.15.79
param brahma as the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.15.79
param brahma the Absolute TruthCC Madhya 9.31
param brahma the Absolute TruthCC Madhya 9.31
param brahma the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 6.16.51
param brahma the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 6.16.51
param brahma the Supreme Brahman, Absolute TruthCC Madhya 19.96
param brahma the Supreme Brahman, Absolute TruthCC Madhya 19.96
param brahma the Supreme Brahman, the Absolute TruthSB 8.24.38
param brahma the Supreme Brahman, the Absolute TruthSB 8.24.38
param brahma the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.10.48
param brahma the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.10.48
param ca api or anotherSB 10.7.23
param ca api or anotherSB 10.7.23
param ca api or anotherSB 10.7.23
param padam the highest position (according to their imagination and speculation)SB 10.2.32
param padam the highest position (according to their imagination and speculation)SB 10.2.32
param padam the supreme abode, VaikuṇṭhaSB 10.14.58
param padam the supreme abode, VaikuṇṭhaSB 10.14.58
param padam to the lotus feet of the Supreme LordSB 4.21.7
param padam to the lotus feet of the Supreme LordSB 4.21.7
param padam to the supreme positionCC Madhya 22.30
param padam to the supreme positionCC Madhya 22.30
CC Madhya 24.131
param padam to the supreme positionCC Madhya 24.131
CC Madhya 24.141
param padam to the supreme positionCC Madhya 24.141
CC Madhya 25.32
param padam to the supreme positionCC Madhya 25.32
param param higher and higherSB 2.2.13
param param higher and higherSB 2.2.13
param rūpam the supreme formCC Madhya 19.101
param rūpam the supreme formCC Madhya 19.101
param-brahma impersonal BrahmanCC Madhya 19.218
param-brahma impersonal BrahmanCC Madhya 19.218
param-parā a series one after anotherSB 4.29.36-37
param-parā a series one after anotherSB 4.29.36-37
param-śabde by the word param, or supremeCC Madhya 20.360
param-śabde by the word param, or supremeCC Madhya 20.360
param-tapa 0 chastiser of enemiesSB 10.43.1
param-tapa 0 chastiser of enemiesSB 10.43.1
param-tapa O annihilator of enemiesSB 4.1.14
param-tapa O annihilator of enemiesSB 4.1.14
param-tapa O chastiser of the enemiesBG 2.3
param-tapa O chastiser of the enemiesBG 2.3
param-tapa O king who can suppress enemiesSB 9.24.12
param-tapa O king who can suppress enemiesSB 9.24.12
param-tapa O subduer of the enemiesSB 12.4.35
param-tapa O subduer of the enemiesSB 12.4.35
parama a greatSB 8.11.29
parama beyond material natureBG 13.32
parama exaltedSB 10.1.1
SB 10.58.5
parama extremeSB 10.16.28
parama extremelyCC Adi 1.51
CC Madhya 13.3
CC Madhya 25.105
SB 1.16.13-15
SB 10.18.32
SB 2.9.31
parama finalCC Madhya 9.239-240
parama first classCC Madhya 5.67
parama first-classCC Adi 11.36
parama foremostSB 5.6.16
parama greatCC Adi 2.77
CC Adi 8.61
CC Madhya 1.130
CC Madhya 1.242
CC Madhya 1.52
CC Madhya 10.106
CC Madhya 18.212
CC Madhya 5.117
parama greatestCC Madhya 1.47
parama greatlyCC Adi 11.34
parama highestCC Adi 4.132
CC Adi 7.27
NBS 2
SB 5.18.17
SB 5.7.12
parama highlyCC Adi 14.91
CC Madhya 1.109
SB 8.8.31
parama mostCC Adi 3.87
para mostCC Adi 4.84
parama mostCC Madhya 8.309
SB 10.58.24
SB 3.21.1
SB 7.3.2
parama O great oneSB 4.7.14
parama O SupremeCC Antya 5.124-125
SB 3.9.3
SB 4.9.13
SB 7.8.42
parama O Supreme LordSB 5.3.6
parama O supreme oneCC Madhya 25.36
SB 10.87.16
parama O Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 6.16.39
parama sublimeCC Madhya 14.118
SB 5.20.27
parama SupremeCC Adi 2.106
parama supremeCC Adi 2.8
CC Adi 4.89
CC Antya 6.254
CC Madhya 10.78
CC Madhya 19.164
CC Madhya 21.34
CC Madhya 8.134
MM 15
MM 39
NBS 19
NBS 82
SB 1.7.7
SB 10.28.17
SB 10.32.9
SB 10.42.16
SB 10.70.32
SB 10.81.9
SB 10.82.22
SB 11.26.32
SB 4.28.43
SB 5.1.27
SB 5.1.6
SB 5.5.35
parama supremelyCC Adi 5.32
CC Antya 16.135
CC Madhya 10.137
CC Madhya 12.29
CC Madhya 14.252
CC Madhya 24.163
SB 1.13.17
SB 10.47.57
SB 10.58.29
SB 10.63.31
SB 10.70.14
SB 10.89.62
SB 11.2.13
SB 8.8.41-46
parama the greatestCC Adi 9.47
SB 10.51.38
SB 10.58.29
SB 10.58.48
parama the greatestSB 10.58.48
SB 10.60.46
SB 10.74.23
parama the highestCC Adi 7.84
SB 3.16.21
parama the mostMM 49
parama the supremeBG 15.17
CC Antya 5.121
parama the SupremeCC Madhya 6.184
parama the supremeSB 10.38.40
SB 10.86.44
SB 3.11.2
SB 5.6.16
parama the topmostSB 4.19.10
para the ultimate goal of lifeSB 10.8.49
parama topmostCC Adi 17.217
CC Madhya 10.81
NBS 60
SB 10.74.33-34
SB 6.16.25
parama ultimateCC Adi 2.56
CC Adi 7.108
parama veryCC Adi 12.37
CC Adi 14.54
CC Adi 17.136
CC Antya 19.82
CC Madhya 10.106
CC Madhya 10.117
CC Madhya 10.21
CC Madhya 11.24
CC Madhya 16.262
CC Madhya 5.158
parama very greatCC Adi 12.41
CC Adi 8.61
parama very highCC Adi 17.35
parama very muchCC Adi 1.102
CC Adi 17.102
CC Madhya 13.56
CC Madhya 17.64
CC Madhya 6.183
SB 1.7.26
SB 4.15.2
SB 8.10.5
parama very niceSB 8.4.3-4
parama ānanda very happyCC Antya 13.71
parama ānanda very happyCC Antya 13.71
parama ānanda very pleasedCC Antya 9.58
parama ānanda very pleasedCC Antya 9.58
parama ānanda with great pleasureCC Madhya 2.77
parama ānanda with great pleasureCC Madhya 2.77
parama ānande in great pleasureCC Madhya 14.245
parama ānande in great pleasureCC Madhya 14.245
CC Madhya 16.27
parama ānande in great pleasureCC Madhya 16.27
parama asthira greatly agitatedCC Madhya 11.128
parama asthira greatly agitatedCC Madhya 11.128
parama bāndhava intimate friendsCC Madhya 3.189
parama bāndhava intimate friendsCC Madhya 3.189
parama dhik-kāra immediately to be rejectedCC Antya 12.108
parama dhik-kāra immediately to be rejectedCC Antya 12.108
parama dhik-kāra immediately to be rejectedCC Antya 12.108
parama gambhīra very graveCC Antya 9.151
parama gambhīra very graveCC Antya 9.151
CC Madhya 18.185
parama gambhīra very graveCC Madhya 18.185
parama hariṣe with great jubilationCC Madhya 12.89
parama hariṣe with great jubilationCC Madhya 12.89
parama kāraṇa original causeCC Adi 5.54
parama kāraṇa original causeCC Adi 5.54
parama kāraṇa the supreme cause, the cause of all causesCC Madhya 25.55
parama kāraṇa the supreme cause, the cause of all causesCC Madhya 25.55
parama madhura very sweetCC Madhya 15.138
parama madhura very sweetCC Madhya 15.138
parama mahattva has greater utility and valueCC Madhya 25.150
parama mahattva has greater utility and valueCC Madhya 25.150
parama mańgala everything is auspiciousCC Antya 4.24
parama mańgala everything is auspiciousCC Antya 4.24
parama pāmare the lowest of mankindCC Madhya 11.188
parama pāmare the lowest of mankindCC Madhya 11.188
parama pavitra highly purifiedCC Madhya 15.89
parama pavitra highly purifiedCC Madhya 15.89
parama pavitra most purifiedCC Madhya 15.275
parama pavitra most purifiedCC Madhya 15.275
parama pavitra perfectly purifiedCC Madhya 3.96
parama pavitra perfectly purifiedCC Madhya 3.96
parama pavitra kari' with great attention to keep them pureCC Madhya 15.85
parama pavitra kari' with great attention to keep them pureCC Madhya 15.85
parama pavitra kari' with great attention to keep them pureCC Madhya 15.85
parama prabala supremely powerfulCC Antya 15.64
parama prabala supremely powerfulCC Antya 15.64
parama prabala very intenseCC Madhya 8.130-131
parama prabala very intenseCC Madhya 8.130-131
parama prabala very powerfulCC Madhya 13.155
parama prabala very powerfulCC Madhya 13.155
parama pradhāna highly expertCC Antya 4.49
parama pradhāna highly expertCC Antya 4.49
parama pramāṇa the supreme evidenceCC Madhya 25.29
parama pramāṇa the supreme evidenceCC Madhya 25.29
parama puruṣa-uttama the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 14.220
parama puruṣa-uttama the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 14.220
parama puruṣa-uttama the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 14.220
parama sāhasa great impudenceCC Madhya 6.161
parama sāhasa great impudenceCC Madhya 6.161
parama samartha highly suitableCC Madhya 24.148
parama samartha highly suitableCC Madhya 24.148
parama samartha very strongCC Madhya 24.220
parama samartha very strongCC Madhya 24.220
parama santoṣa highest satisfactionCC Madhya 14.157
parama santoṣa highest satisfactionCC Madhya 14.157
parama santoṣe in great satisfactionCC Antya 13.108
parama santoṣe in great satisfactionCC Antya 13.108
parama satkāra great receptionCC Madhya 9.236
parama satkāra great receptionCC Madhya 9.236
parama su-vāsa very palatableCC Antya 10.29-30
parama su-vāsa very palatableCC Antya 10.29-30
parama su-vāsa very palatableCC Antya 10.29-30
parama sukha the highest happinessCC Madhya 25.275
parama sukha the highest happinessCC Madhya 25.275
parama sundara very beautifulCC Antya 3.17
parama sundara very beautifulCC Antya 3.17
parama udāra very liberalCC Madhya 15.94
parama udāra very liberalCC Madhya 15.94
parama ullāsa great ecstasyCC Madhya 10.85
parama ullāsa great ecstasyCC Madhya 10.85
parama upāya the most feasible means for deliveranceCC Antya 20.8
parama upāya the most feasible means for deliveranceCC Antya 20.8
parama uttama very good, very goodCC Antya 5.94
parama uttama very good, very goodCC Antya 5.94
parama vaiṣṇava pure devoteeCC Antya 2.84
parama vaiṣṇava pure devoteeCC Antya 2.84
paramā vaiṣṇavī a first-class devoteeCC Antya 2.104
paramā vaiṣṇavī a first-class devoteeCC Antya 2.104
parama vidvān greatly learned personalitiesCC Madhya 12.35
parama vidvān greatly learned personalitiesCC Madhya 12.35
parama vikhyāta very famousCC Antya 6.251
parama vikhyāta very famousCC Antya 6.251
parama virakta totally renounced or unattachedCC Madhya 4.179
parama virakta totally renounced or unattachedCC Madhya 4.179
parama virodha very contradictoryCC Adi 17.304
parama virodha very contradictoryCC Adi 17.304
parama yuvā young manCC Antya 3.17
parama yuvā young manCC Antya 3.17
parama-ācāryam the best and largestSB 7.10.53
parama-ācāryam the best and largestSB 7.10.53
parama-ācāryam the most exalted ācārya, spiritual masterSB 6.7.2-8
parama-ācāryam the most exalted ācārya, spiritual masterSB 6.7.2-8
parama-ādara with great respectSB 5.24.19
parama-ādara with great respectSB 5.24.19
parama-ādareṇa with great reverenceSB 5.17.2
parama-ādareṇa with great reverenceSB 5.17.2
parama-adbhutāḥ very qualified and wonderfulSB 7.4.30
parama-adbhutāḥ very qualified and wonderfulSB 7.4.30
parama-adbhutam because they are so wonderfulSB 8.5.11-12
parama-adbhutam because they are so wonderfulSB 8.5.11-12
parama-adbhutān very wonderful, uncommonSB 9.1.23-24
parama-adbhutān very wonderful, uncommonSB 9.1.23-24
parama-adbhute decorativeSB 1.10.18
parama-adbhute decorativeSB 1.10.18
parama-adhikā highly elevatedCC Adi 6.69-70
parama-adhikā highly elevatedCC Adi 6.69-70
parama-ānanda the transcendentally blissfulCC Madhya 17.80
parama-ānanda the transcendentally blissfulCC Madhya 17.80
parama-ānanda transcendental blissCC Madhya 10.140
parama-ānanda transcendental blissCC Madhya 10.140
CC Madhya 12.180
parama-ānanda transcendental blissCC Madhya 12.180
parama-ānanda with transcendental blissCC Madhya 13.80
parama-ānanda with transcendental blissCC Madhya 13.80
parama-ānanda-mūrtaye full of transcendental blissSB 6.16.18-19
parama-ānanda-mūrtaye full of transcendental blissSB 6.16.18-19
parama-ānanda-mūrtaye full of transcendental blissSB 6.16.18-19
parama-ānandaḥ the greatest happinessSB 10.19.16
parama-ānandaḥ the greatest happinessSB 10.19.16
parama-ānandam the greatest happinessSB 11.15.17
parama-ānandam the greatest happinessSB 11.15.17
parama-ānandam the personality of blissCC Antya 1.166
parama-ānandam the personality of blissCC Antya 1.166
parama-ānandam the supreme blissCC Madhya 6.149
parama-ānandam the supreme blissCC Madhya 6.149
SB 10.14.32
parama-ānandam the supreme blissSB 10.14.32
parama-ānandam transcendental pleasureSB 1.14.35-36
parama-ānandam transcendental pleasureSB 1.14.35-36
parama-ānande in great happinessCC Antya 10.3
parama-ānande in great happinessCC Antya 10.3
CC Madhya 9.329
parama-ānande in great happinessCC Madhya 9.329
SB 11.9.4
parama-ānande in great happinessSB 11.9.4
parama-aṇavaḥ atomic particlesSB 5.12.9
parama-aṇavaḥ atomic particlesSB 5.12.9
parama-annena with first-class foodSB 10.46.15
parama-annena with first-class foodSB 10.46.15
parama-aṇu (the smallest fraction of time measured in terms of) the indivisible atomSB 12.4.1
parama-aṇu (the smallest fraction of time measured in terms of) the indivisible atomSB 12.4.1
parama-aṇu atomSB 3.11.39
parama-aṇu atomSB 3.11.39
parama-aṇu atomsSB 3.11.5
parama-aṇu atomsSB 3.11.5
parama-aṇu of the atomic particleSB 6.16.36
parama-aṇu of the atomic particleSB 6.16.36
parama-aṇu-ādinā along with the atomsSB 3.11.13
parama-aṇu-ādinā along with the atomsSB 3.11.13
parama-aṇu-ādinā along with the atomsSB 3.11.13
parama-aṇu-caya the atomsBs 5.35
parama-aṇu-caya the atomsBs 5.35
parama-aṇu-caya the atomsBs 5.35
parama-aṇu-maye in the form of atomsSB 11.15.12
parama-aṇu-maye in the form of atomsSB 11.15.12
parama-aṇu-maye in the form of atomsSB 11.15.12
parama-aṇu-vat like atomsSB 3.11.41
parama-aṇu-vat like atomsSB 3.11.41
parama-aṇu-vat like atomsSB 3.11.41
parama-anubhāvam the inconceivable prowessSB 9.4.62
parama-anubhāvam the inconceivable prowessSB 9.4.62
parama-aṇuḥ atomicSB 3.11.4
parama-aṇuḥ atomicSB 3.11.4
parama-aṇuḥ atomsSB 3.11.1
parama-aṇuḥ atomsSB 3.11.1
parama-aṇūnām of the atomsSB 11.16.39
parama-aṇūnām of the atomsSB 11.16.39
parama-aṇutām the space of an atomSB 3.11.4
parama-aṇutām the space of an atomSB 3.11.4
parama-ārādhanam the topmost method of worshipingSB 8.7.44
parama-ārādhanam the topmost method of worshipingSB 8.7.44
parama-artha the goal of lifeCC Antya 6.225
parama-artha the goal of lifeCC Antya 6.225
parama-artha transcendental subject matterSB 5.1.6
parama-artha transcendental subject matterSB 5.1.6
parama-artha thākuka what to speak of spiritual advancementCC Madhya 12.24
parama-artha thākuka what to speak of spiritual advancementCC Madhya 12.24
parama-artha thākuka what to speak of spiritual advancementCC Madhya 12.24
parama-artha-lakṣaṇena with spiritual symptomsSB 5.15.7
parama-artha-lakṣaṇena with spiritual symptomsSB 5.15.7
parama-artha-lakṣaṇena with spiritual symptomsSB 5.15.7
parama-artha-vicāra discussion on spiritual mattersCC Madhya 25.43
parama-artha-vicāra discussion on spiritual mattersCC Madhya 25.43
parama-artha-vicāra discussion on spiritual mattersCC Madhya 25.43
parama-artha-vidām of those who know the highest goalCC Adi 3.87
parama-artha-vidām of those who know the highest goalCC Adi 3.87
parama-artha-vidām of those who know the highest goalCC Adi 3.87
parama-artham full of meaningCC Madhya 1.203
parama-artham full of meaningCC Madhya 1.203
parama-artham giving the ultimate goal of lifeSB 5.12.11
parama-artham giving the ultimate goal of lifeSB 5.12.11
parama-arthe in spiritual mattersCC Antya 4.159
parama-arthe in spiritual mattersCC Antya 4.159
parama-āsane on His exalted throneSB 10.70.18
parama-āsane on His exalted throneSB 10.70.18
parama-āścaryam great wonderSB 6.18.73
parama-āścaryam great wonderSB 6.18.73
parama-āśiṣaḥ exalted benedictionsSB 7.10.34
parama-āśiṣaḥ exalted benedictionsSB 7.10.34
parama-āśiṣaḥ first-class enjoyable offeringsSB 10.15.44
parama-āśiṣaḥ first-class enjoyable offeringsSB 10.15.44
parama-āśiṣaḥ the highest benedictionsSB 9.5.13
parama-āśiṣaḥ the highest benedictionsSB 9.5.13
parama-astra by the supreme weapon, the brahmāstraSB 11.31.12
parama-astra by the supreme weapon, the brahmāstraSB 11.31.12
parama-ātma as the SupersoulSB 10.46.43
parama-ātma as the SupersoulSB 10.46.43
parama-ātma for the Supreme SoulSB 12.12.55
parama-ātma for the Supreme SoulSB 12.12.55
parama-ātmā ParamātmāSB 3.32.26
parama-ātmā ParamātmāSB 3.32.26
parama-ātmā the SupersoulBG 13.23
parama-ātmā the SupersoulBG 13.23
BG 6.7
parama-ātmā the SupersoulBG 6.7
parama-ātmā the Supersoul in the heart of every living beingSB 11.5.23
parama-ātmā the Supersoul in the heart of every living beingSB 11.5.23
parama-ātman O SupersoulSB 4.24.68
parama-ātman O SupersoulSB 4.24.68
parama-ātman O Supreme LordSB 3.20.26
parama-ātman O Supreme LordSB 3.20.26
parama-ātman O Supreme SoulSB 10.59.25
parama-ātman O Supreme SoulSB 10.59.25
parama-ātman O Supreme Soul, who are all-pervadingSB 10.59.28
parama-ātman O Supreme Soul, who are all-pervadingSB 10.59.28
parama-ātmanaḥ and of the SupersoulSB 12.6.39
parama-ātmanaḥ and of the SupersoulSB 12.6.39
parama-ātmanaḥ of ParamātmāSB 3.29.36
parama-ātmanaḥ of ParamātmāSB 3.29.36
parama-ātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 10.30.24
parama-ātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 10.30.24
SB 10.88.40
parama-ātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 10.88.40
SB 11.3.34
parama-ātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 11.3.34
SB 12.6.40-41
parama-ātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 12.6.40-41
SB 3.4.33
parama-ātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 3.4.33
SB 3.6.8
parama-ātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 3.6.8
parama-ātmanaḥ of the Supreme PersonSB 7.10.29
parama-ātmanaḥ of the Supreme PersonSB 7.10.29
parama-ātmanaḥ of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.11.16
parama-ātmanaḥ of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.11.16
parama-ātmanaḥ the Supersoul of everyoneSB 4.24.79
parama-ātmanaḥ the Supersoul of everyoneSB 4.24.79
parama-ātmanaḥ the Supreme SoulSB 10.74.4
parama-ātmanaḥ the Supreme SoulSB 10.74.4
SB 10.85.58
parama-ātmanaḥ the Supreme SoulSB 10.85.58
parama-ātmānam the most beloved SupersoulSB 4.24.7
parama-ātmānam the most beloved SupersoulSB 4.24.7
parama-ātmānam the SupersoulSB 10.29.10-11
parama-ātmānam the SupersoulSB 10.29.10-11
parama-ātmānam the Supreme SoulSB 11.26.1
parama-ātmānam the Supreme SoulSB 11.26.1
parama-ātmane the SupersoulSB 10.49.13
parama-ātmane the SupersoulSB 10.49.13
SB 10.73.16
parama-ātmane the SupersoulSB 10.73.16
SB 10.84.22
parama-ātmane the SupersoulSB 10.84.22
SB 10.85.39
parama-ātmane the SupersoulSB 10.85.39
parama-ātmane the Supreme SoulSB 10.28.6
parama-ātmane the Supreme SoulSB 10.28.6
parama-ātmane unto the Supreme SoulSB 7.10.10
parama-ātmane unto the Supreme SoulSB 7.10.10
parama-ātmane unto the Supreme Soul, the SupersoulSB 8.3.10
parama-ātmane unto the Supreme Soul, the SupersoulSB 8.3.10
parama-ātmane who are beyond all material causeSB 10.16.39
parama-ātmane who are beyond all material causeSB 10.16.39
parama-ātmani dealing with the Supreme SoulSB 9.6.54
parama-ātmani dealing with the Supreme SoulSB 9.6.54
parama-ātmani for the Supreme SoulSB 10.47.59
parama-ātmani for the Supreme SoulSB 10.47.59
parama-ātmani the SupersoulSB 4.7.52
parama-ātmani the SupersoulSB 4.7.52
parama-ātmani the Supreme PersonCC Madhya 24.128
parama-ātmani the Supreme PersonCC Madhya 24.128
parama-ātmani the supreme regulatorSB 5.24.19
parama-ātmani the supreme regulatorSB 5.24.19
parama-ātmani unto the Supreme SoulSB 5.19.20
parama-ātmani unto the Supreme SoulSB 5.19.20
parama-āveśe in great ecstasyCC Madhya 14.99
parama-āveśe in great ecstasyCC Madhya 14.99
CC Madhya 15.31
parama-āveśe in great ecstasyCC Madhya 15.31
parama-āveśe in great ecstatic loveCC Antya 10.69
parama-āveśe in great ecstatic loveCC Antya 10.69
parama-āviṣṭatā absorption in the service of the LordCC Madhya 22.150
parama-āviṣṭatā absorption in the service of the LordCC Madhya 22.150
parama-āyaṇe in the transcendental generating centerSB 2.6.2
parama-āyaṇe in the transcendental generating centerSB 2.6.2
parama-āyuḥ duration of lifeSB 3.11.12
parama-āyuḥ duration of lifeSB 3.11.12
SB 3.11.33
parama-āyuḥ duration of lifeSB 3.11.33
parama-āyuḥ the maximum duration of lifeSB 12.2.11
parama-āyuḥ the maximum duration of lifeSB 12.2.11
parama-bhāgavatāḥ great, exalted devoteesSB 6.9.39
parama-bhāgavatāḥ great, exalted devoteesSB 6.9.39
parama-bhāgavataḥ the great devotee celebrated throughout the universeSB 5.19.1
parama-bhāgavataḥ the great devotee celebrated throughout the universeSB 5.19.1
parama-bhāgavataḥ the most exalted devoteeSB 5.17.2
parama-bhāgavataḥ the most exalted devoteeSB 5.17.2
parama-bhāgavataiḥ by the most elevated devoteesSB 11.6.11
parama-bhāgavataiḥ by the most elevated devoteesSB 11.6.11
parama-bhāgavatam a topmost devotee of the LordSB 5.5.28
parama-bhāgavatam a topmost devotee of the LordSB 5.5.28
parama-bhāgavatam the most exalted devoteeSB 5.9.1-2
parama-bhāgavatam the most exalted devoteeSB 5.9.1-2
parama-bhakati highly developed devotional serviceCC Antya 10.34
parama-bhakati highly developed devotional serviceCC Antya 10.34
parama-bhakti-bhāvena in greatly ecstatic loving service to the LordSB 5.19.10
parama-bhakti-bhāvena in greatly ecstatic loving service to the LordSB 5.19.10
parama-bhakti-bhāvena in greatly ecstatic loving service to the LordSB 5.19.10
parama-bhaktye in great devotionCC Madhya 5.49
parama-bhaktye in great devotionCC Madhya 5.49
parama-cikkaṇa very shinyCC Madhya 18.76
parama-cikkaṇa very shinyCC Madhya 18.76
parama-dāruṇaḥ very fearfulSB 6.10.16
parama-dāruṇaḥ very fearfulSB 6.10.16
SB 6.9.18
parama-dāruṇaḥ very fearfulSB 6.9.18
parama-dayālu greatly mercifulCC Madhya 8.38
parama-dayālu greatly mercifulCC Madhya 8.38
parama-dharma-vit the most learned scholar in religious principlesSB 9.1.6
parama-dharma-vit the most learned scholar in religious principlesSB 9.1.6
parama-dharma-vit the most learned scholar in religious principlesSB 9.1.6
parama-duṣkaram extremely difficult to executeSB 10.3.36
parama-duṣkaram extremely difficult to executeSB 10.3.36
parama-guroḥ the supreme spiritual masterSB 6.9.43
parama-guroḥ the supreme spiritual masterSB 6.9.43
parama-guroḥ to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the supreme masterSB 6.16.46
parama-guroḥ to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the supreme masterSB 6.16.46
parama-haṃsa of perfect saintsSB 10.83.4
parama-haṃsa of perfect saintsSB 10.83.4
parama-haṃsānām of the most liberated personsSB 5.9.20
parama-haṃsānām of the most liberated personsSB 5.9.20
parama-haṃsāya unto the supreme perfectSB 4.24.36
parama-haṃsāya unto the supreme perfectSB 4.24.36
parama-haṃsāya unto the supreme pureSB 6.16.47
parama-haṃsāya unto the supreme pureSB 6.16.47
parama-īśa the Supreme LordCC Madhya 20.311
parama-īśa the Supreme LordCC Madhya 20.311
parama-iṣu-āsaḥ the great archerBG 1.16-18
parama-iṣu-āsaḥ the great archerBG 1.16-18
parama-iṣu-āsaḥ the great archerBG 1.16-18
parama-īśvara O supreme controllerSB 10.29.33
parama-īśvara O supreme controllerSB 10.29.33
parama-īśvara O Supreme LordBG 11.3
parama-īśvara O Supreme LordBG 11.3
parama-īśvara the Supreme LordCC Adi 17.106
parama-īśvara the Supreme LordCC Adi 17.106
parama-īśvara the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 20.358
parama-īśvara the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 20.358
CC Madhya 6.79
parama-īśvara the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 6.79
parama-īśvaraḥ the Supreme LordSB 12.3.50
parama-īśvaraḥ the Supreme LordSB 12.3.50
parama-īśvaraḥ the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the supreme rulerSB 7.6.20-23
parama-īśvaraḥ the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the supreme rulerSB 7.6.20-23
parama-īśvaram the SupersoulBG 13.28
parama-īśvaram the SupersoulBG 13.28
parama-īśvaram the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.29.42-44
parama-īśvaram the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.29.42-44
parama-īśvarāya to the supreme controllerSB 10.49.29
parama-īśvarāya to the supreme controllerSB 10.49.29
parama-kalyāṇa the supreme benedictionSB 6.9.33
parama-kalyāṇa the supreme benedictionSB 6.9.33
parama-kalyāṇa You are the supreme auspiciousnessSB 10.10.36
parama-kalyāṇa You are the supreme auspiciousnessSB 10.10.36
parama-kalyāṇa-yaśasaḥ whose glories are so auspiciousSB 5.20.20
parama-kalyāṇa-yaśasaḥ whose glories are so auspiciousSB 5.20.20
parama-kalyāṇa-yaśasaḥ whose glories are so auspiciousSB 5.20.20
parama-kalyāṇīm most auspiciousSB 5.19.2
parama-kalyāṇīm most auspiciousSB 5.19.2
parama-karuṇa the most mercifulCC Adi 4.15-16
parama-karuṇa the most mercifulCC Adi 4.15-16
parama-kāruṇika the supremely mercifulSB 6.9.33
parama-kāruṇika the supremely mercifulSB 6.9.33
parama-kāruṇikaḥ supremely magnanimousSB 12.6.70
parama-kāruṇikaḥ supremely magnanimousSB 12.6.70
parama-kāruṇikatayā by his quality of being very kind to the fallen soulsSB 5.13.24
parama-kāruṇikatayā by his quality of being very kind to the fallen soulsSB 5.13.24
parama-kaśmalam the greatest bewildermentSB 10.16.19
parama-kaśmalam the greatest bewildermentSB 10.16.19
parama-kāṣṭhā the highest limitCC Adi 4.68
parama-kāṣṭhā the highest limitCC Adi 4.68
parama-kautukī the supremely curiousCC Adi 4.136
parama-kautukī the supremely curiousCC Adi 4.136
parama-kopanam who was always very angrySB 9.3.10
parama-kopanam who was always very angrySB 9.3.10
parama-madhura supremely attractiveCC Antya 4.34
parama-madhura supremely attractiveCC Antya 4.34
parama-mahā-puruṣaḥ the foremost master of all kinds of opulence, the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 5.20.40
parama-mahā-puruṣaḥ the foremost master of all kinds of opulence, the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 5.20.40
parama-mahā-puruṣaḥ the foremost master of all kinds of opulence, the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 5.20.40
parama-mahāntī very advancedCC Antya 3.142
parama-mahāntī very advancedCC Antya 3.142
parama-mahatoḥ and of the biggest (the result of the combination of atoms)SB 6.16.36
parama-mahatoḥ and of the biggest (the result of the combination of atoms)SB 6.16.36
parama-mahattva very important itemsCC Madhya 22.127
parama-mahattva very important itemsCC Madhya 22.127
parama-mahattva very much glorifiedCC Adi 6.49-50
parama-mahattva very much glorifiedCC Adi 6.49-50
parama-mańgala all-auspiciousCC Adi 5.228
parama-mańgala all-auspiciousCC Adi 5.228
parama-mańgala supreme blissSB 5.3.11
parama-mańgala supreme blissSB 5.3.11
parama-mańgala the most auspiciousSB 6.9.33
parama-mańgala the most auspiciousSB 6.9.33
parama-mańgala whatever You do is goodSB 10.10.36
parama-mańgala whatever You do is goodSB 10.10.36
parama-mańgalam supremely auspiciousSB 11.6.44
parama-mańgalam supremely auspiciousSB 11.6.44
parama-mańgalam the highest good fortuneSB 4.1.54-55
parama-mańgalam the highest good fortuneSB 4.1.54-55
parama-mohana very attractiveCC Madhya 4.13
parama-mohana very attractiveCC Madhya 4.13
parama-mohane most beautifulCC Madhya 9.246
parama-mohane most beautifulCC Madhya 9.246
parama-nirjane in a very solitary placeCC Madhya 11.175
parama-nirjane in a very solitary placeCC Madhya 11.175
parama-parama-puruṣa O Lord of lordsSB 5.3.9
parama-parama-puruṣa O Lord of lordsSB 5.3.9
parama-parama-puruṣa O Lord of lordsSB 5.3.9
parama-pāṣaṇḍa without God consciousnessCC Madhya 17.53
parama-pāṣaṇḍa without God consciousnessCC Madhya 17.53
parama-pāvana supremely pureCC Madhya 11.191
parama-pāvana supremely pureCC Madhya 11.191
parama-pavitra supremely pureCC Madhya 15.69
parama-pavitra supremely pureCC Madhya 15.69
parama-phala the supreme goal of lifeCC Madhya 19.164
parama-phala the supreme goal of lifeCC Madhya 19.164
parama-preyasī the most belovedCC Adi 6.46
parama-preyasī the most belovedCC Adi 6.46
parama-prītaḥ being very pleasedSB 6.18.31
parama-prītaḥ being very pleasedSB 6.18.31
SB 8.12.37
parama-prītaḥ being very pleasedSB 8.12.37
parama-prītaḥ Nanda Mahārāja was very much pleasedSB 10.8.2
parama-prītaḥ Nanda Mahārāja was very much pleasedSB 10.8.2
parama-prītaḥ transcendentally overjoyedSB 11.2.27
parama-prītaḥ transcendentally overjoyedSB 11.2.27
parama-prītaḥ was extremely pleasedSB 9.3.23
parama-prītaḥ was extremely pleasedSB 9.3.23
parama-puṇyām highly glorified and piousSB 9.5.21
parama-puṇyām highly glorified and piousSB 9.5.21
parama-puruṣa-ārādhana-lakṣaṇaḥ whose symptoms are worship of the Supreme Lord by performance of sacrifices and so onSB 5.14.2
parama-puruṣa-ārādhana-lakṣaṇaḥ whose symptoms are worship of the Supreme Lord by performance of sacrifices and so onSB 5.14.2
parama-puruṣa-ārādhana-lakṣaṇaḥ whose symptoms are worship of the Supreme Lord by performance of sacrifices and so onSB 5.14.2
parama-puruṣa-ārādhana-lakṣaṇaḥ whose symptoms are worship of the Supreme Lord by performance of sacrifices and so onSB 5.14.2
parama-puruṣa-artha the highest benediction of lifeCC Antya 4.12
parama-puruṣa-artha the highest benediction of lifeCC Antya 4.12
parama-puruṣa-artha the highest benediction of lifeCC Antya 4.12
parama-puruṣa-artham the best of all human achievementsSB 5.6.17
parama-puruṣa-artham the best of all human achievementsSB 5.6.17
parama-puruṣa-artham the best of all human achievementsSB 5.6.17
parama-puruṣaḥ the Supreme Personality of GodheadBs 5.56
parama-puruṣaḥ the Supreme Personality of GodheadBs 5.56
CC Madhya 14.227
parama-puruṣaḥ the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 14.227
parama-puruṣārtha superexcellent goal of lifeCC Adi 7.91
parama-puruṣārtha superexcellent goal of lifeCC Adi 7.91
parama-ṛṣayaḥ the great sagesSB 11.16.3
parama-ṛṣayaḥ the great sagesSB 11.16.3
SB 4.19.18
parama-ṛṣayaḥ the great sagesSB 4.19.18
SB 4.2.4
parama-ṛṣayaḥ the great sagesSB 4.2.4
SB 5.1.27
parama-ṛṣayaḥ the great sagesSB 5.1.27
parama-ṛṣi of the greatest of sages, ŚukadevaSB 12.12.57
parama-ṛṣi of the greatest of sages, ŚukadevaSB 12.12.57
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by great sagesSB 1.3.42
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by great sagesSB 1.3.42
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by the great ṛṣisSB 5.3.20
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by the great ṛṣisSB 5.3.20
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by the great sagesSB 1.16.8
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by the great sagesSB 1.16.8
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by the greatest of sagesSB 11.13.42
parama-ṛṣibhiḥ by the greatest of sagesSB 11.13.42
parama-sādhana best process of achievementCC Madhya 9.258
parama-sādhana best process of achievementCC Madhya 9.258
parama-saphale completely successfulCC Antya 12.109
parama-saphale completely successfulCC Antya 12.109
parama-sāra the essential partCC Madhya 8.160
parama-sāra the essential partCC Madhya 8.160
parama-śobhanaḥ all-auspicious and very favorable from all points of viewSB summary
parama-śobhanaḥ all-auspicious and very favorable from all points of viewSB summary
parama-suhṛt everyone's sublime well-wisherSB 5.5.28
parama-suhṛt everyone's sublime well-wisherSB 5.5.28
parama-sundara very beautifulCC Antya 3.192
parama-sundara very beautifulCC Antya 3.192
parama-sundara very beautifully constructedCC Antya 3.112
parama-sundara very beautifully constructedCC Antya 3.112
parama-sundarī very, very beautifulCC Antya 5.13
parama-sundarī very, very beautifulCC Antya 5.13
parama-svarūpa the supreme formCC Madhya 24.77
parama-svarūpa the supreme formCC Madhya 24.77
parama-tattva the Supreme TruthCC Adi 17.106
parama-tattva the Supreme TruthCC Adi 17.106
parama-udāra very liberalCC Antya 5.101
parama-udāra very liberalCC Antya 5.101
parama-udārāḥ very magnanimous personsSB 4.15.25
parama-udārāḥ very magnanimous personsSB 4.15.25
parama-udayāḥ greatly gloriousSB 8.5.6
parama-udayāḥ greatly gloriousSB 8.5.6
parama-utkarṣa in the highest excellenceCC Madhya 23.87-91
parama-utkarṣa in the highest excellenceCC Madhya 23.87-91
parama-utsukāḥ very eagerSB 11.31.2-3
parama-utsukāḥ very eagerSB 11.31.2-3
parama-vaiṣṇava a perfectly pure devoteeCC Antya 2.16
parama-vaiṣṇava a perfectly pure devoteeCC Antya 2.16
parama-vaiṣṇava great devoteeCC Madhya 19.36
parama-vaiṣṇava great devoteeCC Madhya 19.36
parama-vaiṣṇava highly advanced devoteeCC Antya 13.92
parama-vaiṣṇava highly advanced devoteeCC Antya 13.92
parama-vidvān the most learnedCC Antya 11.105
parama-vidvān the most learnedCC Antya 11.105
parama-vikramita by the supreme powerSB 10.10.27
parama-vikramita by the supreme powerSB 10.10.27
parama-vismitaḥ became most amazedSB 7.15.79
parama-vismitaḥ became most amazedSB 7.15.79
parama-vismitaḥ was struck with wonderSB 10.4.14
parama-vismitaḥ was struck with wonderSB 10.4.14
parama-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Adi 13.75
parama-vyome in the spiritual skyCC Adi 13.75
paramaḥ dedicated toBG 12.10
paramaḥ excellentSB 11.16.34
SB 11.30.9
paramaḥ greaterSB 11.5.37
paramaḥ greatestSB 3.1.27
paramaḥ perfectBG 6.32
paramaḥ supremeBs 5.1
CC Adi 2.107
CC Madhya 20.154
CC Madhya 21.35
CC Madhya 24.78
CC Madhya 8.137
SB 1.17.16
SB 11.20.21
SB 4.26.22
paramaḥ supreme, highest, always engaged with all sensesSB 10.10.42
paramaḥ the bestSB 10.56.3
SB 12.10.7
paramaḥ the greatestSB 10.60.31
paramaḥ the greatest of allSB 10.13.57
paramaḥ the highestCC Adi 1.91
CC Madhya 24.100
CC Madhya 25.149
SB 1.1.2
paramāḥ the highest goal of lifeBG 16.11-12
paramaḥ the supremeBs 5.39
CC Adi 5.155
SB 10.80.12-13
SB 3.11.4
SB 3.16.18
paramaḥ the SupremeSB 6.4.33
paramaḥ the supremeSB 7.8.8
SB 8.22.5
SB 8.24.46
SB 8.24.48
paramaḥ the Supreme LordSB 10.88.25-26
paramaḥ the supreme shelterSB 8.22.8
paramaḥ the supreme worshipable objectSB 11.9.17-18
paramaḥ ultimateSB 10.5.30
paramaḥ very greatSB 11.8.27
paramaḥ very, verySB 4.8.53
paramahaṃsa liberated personsSB 5.1.5
paramahaṃsa of the perfect sagesSB 11.31.28
paramahaṃsa reclusesSB 3.15.37
paramahaṃsa-gatau obtainable by the paramahaṃsaSB 7.9.50
paramahaṃsa-gatau obtainable by the paramahaṃsaSB 7.9.50
paramahaṃsa-kulaiḥ by the paramahaṃsas, the most exalted personalitiesSB 6.3.28
paramahaṃsa-kulaiḥ by the paramahaṃsas, the most exalted personalitiesSB 6.3.28
paramahaṃsa-parama-gurave the most exalted spiritual master of all paramahaṃsas, liberated personsSB 5.19.11
paramahaṃsa-parama-gurave the most exalted spiritual master of all paramahaṃsas, liberated personsSB 5.19.11
paramahaṃsa-parama-gurave the most exalted spiritual master of all paramahaṃsas, liberated personsSB 5.19.11
paramahaṃsa-parivrājakaiḥ by the topmost sannyāsīs wandering all over the worldSB 6.9.33
paramahaṃsa-parivrājakaiḥ by the topmost sannyāsīs wandering all over the worldSB 6.9.33
paramahaṃsānām of the advanced transcendentalistsSB 1.8.20
paramahaṃsānām of the perfect beingsSB 1.4.31
paramakam bringing the greatest happinessSB 11.17.3-4
paramakam supremeSB 10.27.20
paramam a supremeSB 8.3.1
paramam extremeSB 10.50.3
SB 10.58.20
SB 6.2.26
paramam foremostSB 7.1.4-5
paramām greatSB 7.5.20
paramām highestSB 10.6.43
paramam highestSB 2.9.22
paramam is the supremeSB 4.9.28
paramam mostBG 18.68
paramam severeSB 10.38.3
paramam supremeBG 10.1
BG 10.12-13
BG 11.1
BG 11.18
BG 15.6
paramām supremeBG 18.49
paramam supremeBG 8.21
CC Madhya 21.51
CC Madhya 21.88
CC Madhya 24.166
CC Madhya 24.213
MM 16
paramām supremeMM 48
paramam supremeMM 53
paramām supremeSB 10.17.16
paramam supremeSB 10.30.41
paramām supremeSB 10.41.42
paramam supremeSB 10.46.29
SB 10.70.46
SB 10.88.10
SB 11.11.49
SB 11.12.13
SB 11.29.27
SB 11.6.26-27
SB 12.12.64
paramam SupremeSB 2.1.19
paramam supremeSB 4.11.11
paramām supremeSB 4.11.30
paramam supremeSB 4.12.26
SB 4.2.32
SB 4.26.18
SB 5.5.24
SB 6.18.33-34
SB 8.6.32
SB 8.7.24
SB 8.8.25
paramām supremeSB 9.2.32
paramam the bestSB 5.10.19
paramam the best (within the universe)SB 10.1.26
paramam the divineBG 11.9
paramam the greatestSB 10.57.9
SB 11.8.44
paramam the greatestSB 11.8.44
paramām the highestSB 10.13.33
SB 6.14.32
paramam the highest destinationSB 10.87.18
paramam the supremeBG 18.64
paramām the supremeBG 8.13
paramam the SupremeBG 8.8
paramam the supremeSB 1.11.7
SB 1.19.37
paramām the supremeSB 10.89.14-17
paramam the supremeSB 11.16.1
SB 11.4.10
paramām the supremeSB 11.5.37
SB 11.5.44
paramam the supremeSB 12.5.11-12
SB 12.6.33
paramam the SupremeSB 2.9.45
paramam the supremeSB 6.10.12
SB 6.4.30
SB 6.8.11
paramam the topmostMM 34
paramām the ultimateBG 8.21
paramam the ultimateCC Madhya 24.72
paramam the ultimate goalSB 6.5.26
paramām to the supremeSB 12.13.13
paramam topmostSB 7.8.43
paramam transcendentalBG 8.3
paramām transcendentalSB 3.4.19
SB 9.18.47
paramām ultimateBG 8.15
SB 10.90.25
paramam ultimateSB 8.11.15
paramam verySB 6.2.47-48
paramam very greatSB 10.3.33
paramām very greatSB 5.8.13
paramam very severeSB 7.3.12
paramam with greatSB 8.7.5
paramām gatim back home to Godhead, the supreme placeSB 8.24.60
paramām gatim back home to Godhead, the supreme placeSB 8.24.60
paramām gatim back home, back to GodheadSB 6.17.41
paramām gatim back home, back to GodheadSB 6.17.41
paramam padam the supreme abodeSB 5.22.17
paramam padam the supreme abodeSB 5.22.17
paramam padam the supreme abode, VaikuṇṭhalokaSB 6.9.32
paramam padam the supreme abode, VaikuṇṭhalokaSB 6.9.32
paramam udyamam great enthusiasmSB 8.15.24
paramam udyamam great enthusiasmSB 8.15.24
paramām upaniṣadam the supreme Upaniṣad (the process by which one can approach the Lord)SB 5.18.34
paramām upaniṣadam the supreme Upaniṣad (the process by which one can approach the Lord)SB 5.18.34
paramam vacaḥ supreme instructionCC Madhya 22.57-58
paramam vacaḥ supreme instructionCC Madhya 22.57-58
paramāṇa the evidenceCC Adi 3.68
paramānanda most joyfulCC Adi 8.2
paramānanda ParamānandaCC Adi 13.57-58
paramānanda Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 25.63
paramānanda gupta Paramānanda GuptaCC Adi 11.45
paramānanda gupta Paramānanda GuptaCC Adi 11.45
paramānanda kīrtanīyā Paramānanda KīrtanīyāCC Madhya 25.4
paramānanda kīrtanīyā Paramānanda KīrtanīyāCC Madhya 25.4
paramānanda mahāpātra Paramānanda MahāpātraCC Adi 10.135-136
paramānanda mahāpātra Paramānanda MahāpātraCC Adi 10.135-136
CC Madhya 10.46
paramānanda mahāpātra Paramānanda MahāpātraCC Madhya 10.46
paramānanda purī Paramānanda PurīCC Adi 9.13-15
paramānanda purī Paramānanda PurīCC Adi 9.13-15
CC Adi 9.16
paramānanda purī Paramānanda PurīCC Adi 9.16
CC Madhya 13.30
paramānanda purī Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 13.30
CC Madhya 9.174
paramānanda purī Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 9.174
paramānanda purī-sańge with Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 7.64
paramānanda purī-sańge with Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 7.64
paramānanda purī-sańge with Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 7.64
paramānanda purīra of Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 10.128
paramānanda purīra of Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 10.128
paramānanda upādhyāya Paramānanda UpādhyāyaCC Adi 11.44
paramānanda upādhyāya Paramānanda UpādhyāyaCC Adi 11.44
paramānanda-dāsa Paramānanda dāsaCC Antya 12.45
paramānanda-dāsa Paramānanda dāsaCC Antya 12.45
CC Antya 12.49
paramānanda-dāsa Paramānanda dāsaCC Antya 12.49
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Adi 10.124-126
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Adi 10.124-126
CC Antya 8.71
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 8.71
CC Antya 8.8
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 8.8
CC Madhya 1.111
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 1.111
CC Madhya 1.129
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 1.129
CC Madhya 1.253
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 1.253
CC Madhya 10.91
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 10.91
CC Madhya 9.167
paramānanda-purī Paramānanda PurīCC Madhya 9.167
paramānanda-purī-sthāne at the place of Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 2.128
paramānanda-purī-sthāne at the place of Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 2.128
paramānanda-purī-sthāne at the place of Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 2.128
paramānanda-purīre Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 8.7
paramānanda-purīre Paramānanda PurīCC Antya 8.7
paramāṇu the atomCC Madhya 25.51
paramāṇu-ādi beginning from the time of minute atomsSB 5.14.29
paramāṇu-ādi beginning from the time of minute atomsSB 5.14.29
paramārthe for spiritual advancementCC Antya 9.108
paramasya for the SupremeSB 10.77.32
paramasya for the supremeSB 10.87.29
paramasya of the SupremeSB 1.9.36
SB 2.1.29
SB 2.7.43-45
SB 2.7.47
SB 3.4.14
paramasya the SupremeSB 3.15.34
paramasya the supremeSB 4.6.49
paramasya the ultimateSB 7.6.26
paramasya vedhasaḥ of the supreme creatorSB 10.12.38
paramasya vedhasaḥ of the supreme creatorSB 10.12.38
paramātmā ParamātmāCC Adi 2.11
CC Adi 2.63
CC Madhya 20.158
CC Madhya 24.74
CC Madhya 24.81
paramātmā Paramātmā (Supersoul)CC Adi 2.10
paramātmā the localized featureCC Madhya 24.80
paramātmā the localized situation of the LordCC Madhya 19.218
paramātmā the SupersoulSB 2.10.7
paramātmā the Supersoul within the heartCC Madhya 20.161
paramātmā who is the Supersoul of all living entitiesSB 9.23.17
paramātmā iti as the SupersoulCC Madhya 25.132
paramātmā iti as the SupersoulCC Madhya 25.132
paramātmā iti known as ParamātmāSB 1.2.11
paramātmā iti known as ParamātmāSB 1.2.11
paramātma-bhūtaḥ the origin of all causesCC Madhya 25.37
paramātma-bhūtaḥ the origin of all causesCC Madhya 25.37
paramātma-sa-tattvaḥ the truth of the constitutional position of the spirit soul and the SupersoulSB 5.13.25
paramātma-sa-tattvaḥ the truth of the constitutional position of the spirit soul and the SupersoulSB 5.13.25
paramātma-sa-tattvaḥ the truth of the constitutional position of the spirit soul and the SupersoulSB 5.13.25
paramātma-tattvam the principle of primeval causeSB 2.7.47
paramātma-tattvam the principle of primeval causeSB 2.7.47
paramātma-tattvam which ascertain the truth about ParamātmāSB 8.7.29
paramātma-tattvam which ascertain the truth about ParamātmāSB 8.7.29
paramātmanaḥ of the SupersoulSB 3.12.1
SB 5.26.38
paramātmanaḥ of the Supreme LordSB 1.5.21
paramātmanaḥ the SupersoulSB 6.9.42
paramātmānam the SupersoulSB 6.13.7
paramātmane who is the Supreme PersonSB 10.6.34
paramayā by supremeSB 8.23.25
paramayā greatSB 6.18.27-28
SB 7.7.14
paramayā most excellentSB 3.23.6
paramayā sincereSB 10.81.18
paramayā superexcellentSB 10.10.28
paramayā supremeSB 1.2.22
SB 10.39.56-57
SB 10.84.41
SB 7.10.40
SB 8.6.29
paramayā transcendentalSB 11.31.4
paramayā unalloyedSB 4.29.36-37
SB 8.16.25
paramayā with severeSB 5.26.15
paramayā with transcendentalSB 11.30.11
parame in the SupremeSB 10.87.31
parame-ṣṭhin who are situated in the spiritual planetSB 6.16.25
parame-ṣṭhin who are situated in the spiritual planetSB 6.16.25
parame-ṣṭhinā by the Lord of the supreme kingdomSB 10.89.60-61
parame-ṣṭhinā by the Lord of the supreme kingdomSB 10.89.60-61
parame-sthinaḥ of the Supreme LordSB 10.81.10
parame-sthinaḥ of the Supreme LordSB 10.81.10
parame-sthinaḥ the most elevated of living beingsSB 12.6.37
parame-sthinaḥ the most elevated of living beingsSB 12.6.37
parame-sthinaḥ the most highly situated living entitySB 12.4.5
parame-sthinaḥ the most highly situated living entitySB 12.4.5
parame-sthinām of the rulers of the universeSB 10.89.57
parame-sthinām of the rulers of the universeSB 10.89.57
parame-ṣṭhinau the supreme rulersSB 6.19.14
parame-ṣṭhinau the supreme rulersSB 6.19.14
parameṇa by supremeSB 6.9.33
parameṇa by the supremeSB 2.9.37
parameṇa supremeSB 6.7.38
parameṇa with greatSB 10.66.27-28
SB 5.26.5
parameṇa with great strengthSB 4.1.3
parameṇa samādhinā with the highest form of tranceSB 5.18.1
parameṇa samādhinā with the highest form of tranceSB 5.18.1
parameṣṭhi and BrahmāSB 10.35.14-15
parameṣṭhī BrahmāSB 3.13.16
parameṣṭhī Brahmā, the creator of the universeSB 2.8.25
parameṣṭhi Lord BrahmāCC Adi 3.66
parameṣṭhī Lord BrahmāSB 10.13.61
SB 7.3.9-10
parameṣṭhī named ParameṣṭhīSB 5.15.3
parameṣṭhī the highest personality in the universeSB 3.10.9
parameṣṭhi the supreme entity (Brahmā)SB 2.1.30
parameṣṭhī the Supreme LordSB 7.3.31
parameṣṭhi-dhiṣṇye on the royal throneSB 3.2.22
parameṣṭhi-dhiṣṇye on the royal throneSB 3.2.22
parameṣṭhinā by BrahmāSB 3.20.46
parameṣṭhinā by Lord BrahmāSB 7.10.31
parameṣṭhinā by the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 10.52.36
parameṣṭhinā by the supreme teacher (Brahmā)SB 4.2.16
parameṣṭhinā the supreme teacherSB 4.3.2
parameṣṭhinaḥ Lord BrahmāSB 4.8.38
parameṣṭhinaḥ of the supreme person within this universe (Lord Brahmā)SB 7.11.3
parameṣṭhinaḥ of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.15.9-10
parameṣṭhinam Brahmā, the head of the universeSB 2.3.2-7
parameṣṭhinam of universal rulersSB 10.89.54-56
parameṣṭhinam the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.32.22
parameṣṭhinam to Lord BrahmāSB 7.10.32
parameṣṭhinam unto the supreme leader, BrahmāSB 2.9.38
parameṣṭhine unto Lord BrahmāSB 8.5.17-18
parameśvara O ParameśvaraCC Antya 12.58
parameśvara ParameśvaraCC Antya 12.54
parameśvarā ParameśvaraCC Antya 12.57
parameśvara-dāsa Parameśvara dāsaCC Adi 11.29
parameśvara-dāsa Parameśvara dāsaCC Adi 11.29
CC Antya 6.62
parameśvara-dāsa Parameśvara dāsaCC Antya 6.62
paramikām as supremeCC Madhya 20.145
paramparā by disciplic successionBG 4.2
parampara the continual succession, one after anotherSB 5.4.14
paramparām a showerCC Antya 1.142
parampara by a successionSB 10.87.36
parampara by continuous disciplic successionSB 12.6.46
paramparāya by disciplic successionCC Madhya 17.48-49
CC Madhya 7.118
paramparāya by hearsayCC Antya 8.50
parampara by the chain of successionSB 10.87.40
paramparya from traditional authoritySB 10.24.11
paraṇāma obeisancesCC Adi 10.99
parantapa O Arjuna, subduer of the enemiesBG 4.2
parantapa O chastiser of the enemies, Parīkṣit MahārājaSB 10.23.12
parantapa O chastiser of the enemyBG 4.33
parantapa O conqueror of enemiesBG 7.27
parantapa O conqueror of the enemiesBG 10.40
parantapa O great oneSB 4.1.40
parantapa O killer of the enemiesBG 9.3
parantapa O KingSB 8.13.2-3
parantapa O King, who can subdue your enemiesSB 9.1.7
parantapa O Mahārāja Parīkṣit, chastiser of enemiesSB 8.6.32
parantapa O mighty-armed oneBG 11.54
parantapa O subduer of the enemiesBG 18.41
parantapa O subduer of the enemyBG 4.5
parantapaḥ the chastiser of the enemiesBG 2.9
paraśa touchCC Madhya 12.53
CC Madhya 12.67
paraśa touchingCC Madhya 12.28
parasāda benedictionCC Adi 17.65
parasanna satisfiedCC Madhya 14.150
parasanna very pleasedCC Adi 13.101
parasanna ha-ila became cleansed and satisfiedCC Madhya 24.252
parasanna ha-ila became cleansed and satisfiedCC Madhya 24.252
parasanna ha-ila became cleansed and satisfiedCC Madhya 24.252
parasanna hañā being very pleasedCC Madhya 16.91
parasanna hañā being very pleasedCC Madhya 16.91
paraśila enteredCC Antya 18.75
paraśilā touchedCC Madhya 15.83
paraśite nāre cannot touchCC Adi 5.57
paraśite nāre cannot touchCC Adi 5.57
parasmai the SupremeSB 2.4.12
SB 4.1.56
parasmai to outsidersSB 8.17.20
parasmai to the SupremeSB 11.2.36
parasmai unto the SupremeSB 11.3.27-28
SB 4.3.22
parasmai unto the TranscendenceSB 3.9.14
SB 4.17.29
parasmai unto the transcendentalSB 4.17.33
parasmai-pada a verb form indicating things done for othersCC Madhya 24.25
parasmai-pada a verb form indicating things done for othersCC Madhya 24.25
parasmāt because of being the chiefSB 8.6.10
parasmāt from the causeSB 8.3.3
parasmin in the SupremeSB 2.9.3
parasmin in transcendenceSB 2.4.10
parasmin or in a later (produced element, such as the subtle presence of sound within its further product, air)SB 11.22.8
parasmin to the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.29.10
paraśoḥ who is like an axeSB 7.5.17
paraspara against each otherCC Adi 4.251
paraspara mutualCC Madhya 8.244
SB 11.22.7
SB 11.3.30
paraspara mutuallyCC Adi 4.127
CC Adi 4.193
paraspara of one anotherSB 5.13.17
paraspara reciprocalCC Adi 4.193
parasparam among one anotherNBS 68
SB 10.43.21-22
SB 10.68.20
parasparam among themselvesBG 10.9
parasparam amongst themselves as followsSB 4.23.24
parasparam at one anotherSB 10.15.51
parasparam between one anotherSB 1.18.44
parasparam each otherCC Adi 5.138
SB 10.44.5
parasparam each other'sSB 10.80.27
SB 10.80.38
parasparam from one to anotherSB 10.50.25-28
parasparam in the world of dualitySB 1.8.9
parasparam mutuallyBG 3.11
Bs 5.19
SB 11.22.31
parasparam on one anotherSB 10.5.14
parasparam one anotherSB 5.13.6
SB 9.1.27
parasparam to one anotherSB 10.44.6
parasparam together (grasping the feet of the Deity)SB 11.27.46
parasparam with one anotherSB 10.11.39-40
SB 3.21.17
parastāt beyondSB 4.12.35
SB 4.9.20-21
SB 5.20.34
SB 5.20.42
parastāt beyond everything superiorMM 26
parastāt transcendentalBG 8.9
paraśu-pāṇayaḥ taking axes in handSB 7.2.15
paraśu-pāṇayaḥ taking axes in handSB 7.2.15
paraśu-rāmera to Lord ParaśurāmaCC Madhya 9.198
paraśu-rāmera to Lord ParaśurāmaCC Madhya 9.198
paraśubhiḥ with the aid of axesSB 10.6.33
paraśum a chopperSB 9.15.28
paraśum axSB 12.10.11-13
paraśum the axeSB 9.16.16
paraśurāma ParaśurāmaCC Madhya 20.369
paraśurāme in ParaśurāmaCC Madhya 20.372
paraśvadha chopperSB 9.15.29
paraśvadhaḥ being expert in using his weapon, the paraśu, or chopperSB 9.15.31
paraśvadhaiḥ and lancesSB 4.10.11-12
paraśvadhaiḥ by axesSB 6.10.23
paraśvadhaiḥ with the weapons called paraśvadhaSB 8.10.36
paraśvadhena by the great chopperSB 2.7.22
paraśvaḥ the day after tomorrowSB 3.21.26
parasya belonging to the SupremeSB 10.85.6
parasya beyondSB 5.3.4-5
parasya for the transcendental soulSB 11.23.55
parasya of anotherCC Antya 1.195
SB 3.29.26
parasya of consciousness, spiritSB 3.27.18
parasya of Him who is aloofSB 10.87.29
parasya of othersSB 4.25.33
parasya of the causeSB 3.26.49
parasya of the great personalitySB 2.6.12
parasya of the LordSB 2.6.42
parasya of the Personality of Godhead, who is beyond the material worldSB 9.24.57
parasya of the pure soulSB 2.9.1
parasya of the SupremeCC Madhya 20.110
SB 10.40.13-14
parasya of the supremeSB 10.89.20
parasya of the SupremeSB 10.90.49
SB 11.3.1
SB 11.31.11
SB 2.10.45
SB 3.32.8
SB 3.7.38
SB 4.11.20
SB 4.24.79
SB 5.20.17
SB 8.11.1
parasya of the supremeSB 8.20.25-29
parasya of the Supreme LordCC Adi 5.83
CC Madhya 20.267
SB 3.25.37
SB 6.5.33
parasya of the transcendenceSB 1.3.38
parasya of the TranscendenceSB 1.5.21
parasya of the transcendentSB 7.9.9
parasya regarding the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.8.3
parasya the chiefSB 3.29.4
parasya the SupremeSB 10.88.40
parasya the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.1.25
parasya the TranscendenceSB 6.3.17
parasya to othersBG 17.19
parasya transcendentalSB 9.18.5
parasya very difficult to understandSB 8.7.34
parasya who is beyond themSB 11.6.14
parasya who is dedicatedSB 10.74.40
parasya who is the Supreme TruthSB 12.8.44
parasya api another's selfSB 4.22.29
parasya api another's selfSB 4.22.29
parasya puṃsaḥ of the Supreme PersonSB 8.12.43
parasya puṃsaḥ of the Supreme PersonSB 8.12.43
parataḥ aheadSB 1.13.57
parataḥ beyondSB 5.20.29
parataḥ beyond thatSB 5.23.1
parataḥ by any external powerSB 5.1.12
parataḥ by His inconceivable potenciesSB 4.17.32
parataḥ by othersSB 3.30.25
parataḥ by others (the damsels created by Kardama)SB 3.33.28
parataḥ due to other causesSB 6.14.21
parataḥ from anyone elseSB 5.14.46
parataḥ from othersSB 10.1.44
SB 5.9.11
parataḥ from the instructions of othersSB 7.5.30
parataḥ of othersSB 8.8.20
parataḥ on the opposite sideCC Antya 16.53
parataḥ superiorBG 3.42
parataḥ transcendentally situatedSB 8.7.34
parataḥ parasmāt higher than the highestSB 5.5.25
parataḥ parasmāt higher than the highestSB 5.5.25
parataḥ parasya who is transcendental to material natureSB 11.23.56
parataḥ parasya who is transcendental to material natureSB 11.23.56
parataḥ parāt beyond the transcendenceSB 4.30.31
parataḥ parāt beyond the transcendenceSB 4.30.31
parataḥ vā or by hearing from anotherSB 1.13.27
parataḥ vā or by hearing from anotherSB 1.13.27
paratantra dependentCC Antya 7.151
paratāpinaḥ envious of other living entitiesCC Madhya 22.147
parataraḥ greaterSB 4.22.32
parataram of greater valueCC Madhya 11.31
parateka according toCC Madhya 18.87
paratra after deathSB 4.14.24
SB 4.22.8
paratra beyondSB 10.13.57
paratra in different planetsSB 4.30.2
paratra in his next lifeSB 5.26.17
paratra in the next lifeCC Adi 9.43
SB 10.45.48
SB 10.60.43
SB 12.11.46
SB 5.26.11
SB 5.26.18
paratra in the next worldSB 10.80.42
paratra transcendentalSB 10.87.25
parau supremeSB 10.85.3
paravān subservientSB 10.39.24
paravaśa controlledCC Antya 16.146
paraveśa entranceCC Antya 17.33
paravīkṣitam being glanced over by the SupremeSB 3.5.35
paravīṇa very expertCC Madhya 2.22
paravyoma the spiritual skyCC Madhya 20.212
paravyoma-dhāme in the spiritual worldCC Madhya 20.211
paravyoma-dhāme in the spiritual worldCC Madhya 20.211
paravyoma-madhye in the paravyoma areaCC Madhya 20.192
paravyoma-madhye in the paravyoma areaCC Madhya 20.192
paravyoma-madhye in the spiritual skyCC Madhya 20.213
paravyoma-madhye in the spiritual skyCC Madhya 20.213
paravyoma-upari in the upper portion of the spiritual skyCC Madhya 20.213
paravyoma-upari in the upper portion of the spiritual skyCC Madhya 20.213
para by the topmostSB 5.24.19
para characterized by transcendental loveSB 11.13.41
para greatSB 10.56.29-30
SB 5.6.17
SB 6.7.20
SB 8.17.21
para highestSB 3.23.6
para of a high gradeBG 1.27
para supremeSB 6.19.17
SB 8.11.1
SB 8.18.28
para transcendentalBG 12.2
BG 17.17
SB 3.9.5
SB 4.8.52
para uncommonSB 1.13.16
para with greatSB 10.34.11
SB 5.15.10
para with transcendentalSB 10.69.20-22
parayoḥ and the opposite partySB 1.9.35
parayoḥ and to othersSB 6.16.42
sva-para-abhiniveśena consisting of absorption in the bodily concept of oneself and othersSB 7.2.60
dvāpara-ādau at the end of the Dvāpara-yugaSB 2.1.8
dvāpara-ādau at the end of the Dvāpara millenniumSB 12.6.46
adbhutam param it was extraordinarily wonderfulSB 8.11.32
advandva-para uninvolved in material dualitiesSB 11.29.45
apara-ahne in the afternoonSB 10.41.19
uparata-akhila completely turned backSB 4.7.26
alīka-param the most heinous liarSB 8.20.4
āmāra upara on MeCC Madhya 7.25
āmāra upara upon meCC Madhya 16.134
amat-para one who is not surrendered to MeSB 11.17.38
uparata-anātmyāya having no attachment for this material worldSB 5.19.11
uparata-anātmye wherein identification with material things was stoppedSB 5.15.7
andha-parampara by a disciplic succession of blind. ignorant peopleSB 5.6.11
ghṛta-sikta parama-anna sweet rice mixed with gheeCC Madhya 15.217
ānṛśaṃsya-para becomes completely free from envySB 9.11.23
pradhāna-parama-vyomnoḥ antare between the material world and the spiritual worldCC Madhya 21.50
apara-rātra-ante at the end of the nightSB 8.4.17-24
tvat-para-anugraheṇa by compassion like YoursSB 4.7.29
anuparata continuousSB 5.17.3
anuparata-vegā whose force is uninterruptedSB 5.17.7
tat-anuśāsana-para engaged in governing the globeSB 5.7.1
uparata-anuvṛttiḥ who was acting as if giving up His material bodySB 5.6.6
pūrva-pakṣa-apara-pakṣābhyām by the period of waxing and waningSB 5.22.9
apara-rātre in the fourth part of the nightSB 6.8.22
apara-pakṣīyam during the fortnight of the dark moonSB 7.14.19
apara-rātra-ante at the end of the nightSB 8.4.17-24
apara-pādābhyām with the hind legsSB 10.11.43
apara-ahne in the afternoonSB 10.41.19
pūrva-apara former and latterCC Madhya 18.197
apara othersSB 2.6.20
apara the latterSB 3.11.34
apara anotherSB 3.31.19
apara anotherSB 4.15.13
apara on the other handSB 4.22.56
apara elseSB 5.6.15
apara besidesSB 5.17.15
apara anotherSB 5.20.13
apara an enemySB 7.4.45
apara the otherSB 7.9.20
mat-apara other than meSB 7.9.29
apara anotherSB 8.7.9
apara different from the Nābha previously describedSB 9.9.16-17
apara anyone elseSB 9.17.7
apara anotherSB 9.18.19
apara otherSB 9.24.14
apara otherSB 10.23.27
apara otherSB 10.51.28
apara anotherSB 10.61.8-9
apara the other (brāhmaṇa)SB 10.64.21
apara anyone elseSB 10.66.5
apara not foreignSB 10.87.29
apara elseSB 11.18.10
apara any other personSB 11.22.28
apara separateSB 11.22.31
apara being the replica ofSB 12.1.34
apara otherCC Antya 6.285
na apara not anyone elseCC Antya 20.47
aparaiḥ not superiorSB 5.13.21
aparaiḥ kim then what is the use of other possessionsSB 7.8.42
aparaiḥ other than VasiṣṭhaSB 9.13.3
aparaiḥ othersSB 10.55.4
aparam juniorBG 4.4
aparam any otherBG 6.20-23
aparam inferiorSB 2.5.6
aparam not other (than her husband)SB 4.4.27
aparam elseSB 4.8.77
aparam the next bodySB 6.1.49
aparam anotherSB 6.9.22
aparam lowerSB 7.3.32
aparam what elseSB 7.10.70
aparam endSB 10.9.13-14
pūrva-aparam the beginning and the endSB 10.9.13-14
aparam otherSB 10.14.35
aparam anotherSB 10.15.33
aparam productSB 10.48.18
aparam to anotherSB 10.48.26
aparam low classSB 11.18.35
aparam anotherSB 11.21.22
aparam furtherSB 11.23.46
aparam the second thing (such as the element ahańkāra)SB 11.24.18
tvat-aparam other than Your LordshipCC Madhya 22.96
aparam anything elseMM 9
aparaśa untouchedCC Adi 10.142
aparasmin in the effectSB 3.26.49
aparaspara without causeBG 16.8
aparasya of one who was born laterSB 6.14.54
aparau othersSB 4.1.35
aparau hindSB 10.15.31
dvi-para-ardha up to the limit of 4,300,000,000 x 2 x 30 x 12 x 100 solar yearsSB 3.9.18
dvi-para-ardha the two halves of Brahmā's total life spanSB 12.4.1
uparata-ariḥ one who has vanquished the enemiesSB 3.1.38
artha-para intent upon gaining wealthSB 5.13.1
artha-para who is very attached to moneySB 5.14.1
sva-artha-para interested only in sense gratification in this life or the nextSB 6.10.6
sat-asat-para who is the cause of all causes (the supreme cause)SB 6.16.21
asva-para-dṛṣṭīnām who do not distinguish between what is their own and what is another'sSB 10.24.4
ataḥ param hereafterBG 2.12
ataḥ param thereafterSB 1.3.22
ataḥ param beyondSB 3.8.32
ataḥ param hereafterSB 3.9.3
ataḥ param after thisSB 5.20.1
ataḥ param and hereafter, in the futureSB 6.15.2
ataḥ param here afterCC Antya 5.124-125
ataḥpara hereafterCC Madhya 5.107
śuna ataḥpara just hearCC Antya 2.57
ataḥpara thereafterCC Antya 12.4
ataḥpara hereafterCC Antya 16.47
krīḍā-parau ati-calau the babies, being too restless, engaged in playSB 10.8.25
ātma-para-buddhiḥ the conception of one's own and another'sSB 7.9.31
uparata-ātmānaḥ who have control over the mind and sensesSB 5.14.39
avadhūta paramānanda Avadhūta ParamānandaCC Adi 11.49
avarohaṇataḥ param beyond the place marked for climbing downSB 10.18.25
bhagavat-param who was a great devotee of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.22.34
bhagavat-para having fully realized the Personality of GodheadSB 7.13.45
bhakti-paramāḥ those engaged in devotional serviceNoI 10
bhūmira upara on the groundCC Antya 14.36
brahma param the Supreme BrahmanSB 7.1.19
brahma param Parabrahman, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, KṛṣṇaSB 9.9.49
brahma paramam the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 10.23.10-11
brahma paramam the Absolute TruthSB 11.11.28
brahma paramam the Absolute TruthSB 11.20.37
ātma-para-buddhiḥ the conception of one's own and another'sSB 7.9.31
krīḍā-parau ati-calau the babies, being too restless, engaged in playSB 10.8.25
camatkṛti-param full of wonderCC Antya 1.164
cāńgera upara on the cāńgaCC Antya 9.134
catur-vyūha-parakāśa manifestation of quadruple expansionsCC Madhya 20.193
daiva-paratantra under the spell of māyāCC Adi 12.9
daṇḍa-paraṇāma obeisances, falling flatCC Madhya 9.287
daṇḍa-paraṇāma offering obeisancesCC Madhya 15.5
daṇḍa-paraṇāma offering obeisances and daṇḍavatsCC Antya 4.147
daṇḍa-paraṇāma kari' offering obeisances by falling down on the groundCC Antya 13.101
dayā-para being very kindSB 9.18.19
dayā-para O causelessly merciful oneMM 1
tri-dhāma-paramam to the highest planetary systemSB 3.24.20
dharma-para one who is strictly following religious principlesSB 4.17.31
tat-dharma-paraiḥ by following in the footsteps of the LordSB 4.21.39
dhyāna-yoga-para absorbed in tranceBG 18.51-53
asva-para-dṛṣṭīnām who do not distinguish between what is their own and what is another'sSB 10.24.4
sva-para-druhā which is envious of the performer and of othersSB 6.16.42
dvāpara-ādau at the end of the Dvāpara-yugaSB 2.1.8
dvāpara-ādau at the end of the Dvāpara millenniumSB 12.6.46
dvāpara DvāparaCC Adi 3.7
satya-tretā-dvāpara-kali-yugera of Satya-yuga, Tretā-yuga, Dvāpara-yuga and Kali-yugaCC Madhya 20.329
dvāparam the age of DvāparaSB 3.11.18
dvāparam DvāparaSB 11.5.20
dvāparam Dvāpara-yugaSB 12.2.39
dvāparam the age of DvāparaSB 12.3.29
dvārera upara above the doorCC Madhya 15.81
dvi-para-ardha up to the limit of 4,300,000,000 x 2 x 30 x 12 x 100 solar yearsSB 3.9.18
dvi-para-ardha the two halves of Brahmā's total life spanSB 12.4.1
gandha śabda paraśa aroma, sound and touchCC Antya 14.49
ghṛta-sikta parama-anna sweet rice mixed with gheeCC Madhya 15.217
goloka-paravyoma the spiritual planet Goloka and the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.54
grāmya-īha-uparamaḥ not taking part in so-called philanthropic activitiesSB 7.11.8-12
phāńpara ha-ilā became bewilderedCC Madhya 21.69
hailā parasanna became pleasedCC Madhya 16.225
nā haila parasanna was not happyCC Antya 3.158
strī-paraśa haile if I had touched a womanCC Antya 13.85
hañā parasanne being very pleased with MeCC Madhya 16.277
hañā tatpara being intentCC Antya 2.57
hañā tatpara with great attentionCC Antya 10.40
hastī-upara upon the backs of elephantsCC Madhya 16.117
hṛdaya-upara on the chestsCC Madhya 3.104
grāmya-īha-uparamaḥ not taking part in so-called philanthropic activitiesSB 7.11.8-12
phāńpara ha-ilā became bewilderedCC Madhya 21.69
svaḥ paraḥ iti mine and 'someone else's'SB 11.2.52
jhālira upara upon the bagsCC Antya 10.40
kaila paracāra Lord Kṛṣṇa propagatedCC Adi 5.90
satya-tretā-dvāpara-kali-yugera of Satya-yuga, Tretā-yuga, Dvāpara-yuga and Kali-yugaCC Madhya 20.329
kāndhera upara on the shoulderCC Antya 14.44
kare paracāra preachesCC Antya 5.74
daṇḍa-paraṇāma kari' offering obeisances by falling down on the groundCC Antya 13.101
uparata-karmaṇām who are no longer interested in fruitive activitiesSB 5.5.28
aparaiḥ kim then what is the use of other possessionsSB 7.8.42
kīrtanīyā-paramānanda Paramānanda, who used to perform kīrtanaCC Madhya 25.179
krīḍā-parau ati-calau the babies, being too restless, engaged in playSB 10.8.25
kūrpara an instrumentCC Madhya 1.193
uparakta-manasā due to the mind's being influencedSB 5.14.5
mat-para in relationship with MeBG 2.61
mat-paramaḥ considering Me the SupremeBG 11.55
mat-paramāḥ taking Me, the Supreme Lord, as everythingBG 12.20
mat-param subordinate to MeBG 13.13
mat-para under My protectionBG 18.57
mat-para My devoteeSB 4.7.53
mat-para My devoteeSB 5.5.21-22
mat-para whose object is MeSB 6.4.43
mat-apara other than meSB 7.9.29
mat-para just for the sake of My workSB 7.10.23
mat-para My pure devoteeSB 8.22.27
mat-paramau accepting Me as the supreme destination of lifeSB 10.10.42
mat-para one who is dedicated to MeSB 11.10.4
mat-para one who is devoted to MeSB 11.10.5
mat-para having faith in MeSB 11.15.26
mat-para the devotee dedicated to MeSB 11.28.43
mat-paramāḥ accepting Me as the Supreme or the ultimate goal of lifeCC Madhya 23.113
nā haila parasanna was not happyCC Antya 3.158
na apara not anyone elseCC Antya 20.47
nanda-nandana-para fixed upon the son of Mahārāja NandaCC Madhya 2.52
nanda-nandana-para fixed upon the son of Mahārāja NandaCC Antya 1.148
nanda-nandana-para fixed upon the son of Mahārāja NandaCC Madhya 2.52
nanda-nandana-para fixed upon the son of Mahārāja NandaCC Antya 1.148
nārāyaṇa-para just to know NārāyaṇaSB 2.5.16
nārāyaṇa-param just with an aim to achieve NārāyaṇaSB 2.5.16
nārāyaṇa-param just to realize a glimpse of NārāyaṇaSB 2.5.16
nārāyaṇa-para Lord Śiva, the great devotee of NārāyaṇaSB 4.24.32
nārāyaṇa-param fully intent on Lord NārāyaṇaSB 6.8.4-6
nārāyaṇa-para a great devotee of Lord Nārāyaṇa, the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 8.24.10
nārāyaṇa-para devoted to Lord NārāyaṇaSB 10.75.23
nārāyaṇa-para completely devoted to the Supreme Lord, NārāyaṇaSB 11.3.33
nirvāṇa-paramām cessation of material existenceBG 6.15
apara-pādābhyām with the hind legsSB 10.11.43
viṣṇoḥ paramam padam the supreme abode of Lord Viṣṇu, or the lotus feet of Lord ViṣṇuSB 5.23.1
pūrva-pakṣa-apara-pakṣābhyām by the period of waxing and waningSB 5.22.9
pūrva-pakṣa-apara-pakṣābhyām by the period of waxing and waningSB 5.22.9
apara-pakṣīyam during the fortnight of the dark moonSB 7.14.19
pañca-parakāra of five different varietiesCC Madhya 6.266
pañca parakāra five categoriesCC Madhya 19.183-184
pañca parakāra five varietiesCC Madhya 23.45
dvi-para-ardha up to the limit of 4,300,000,000 x 2 x 30 x 12 x 100 solar yearsSB 3.9.18
tvat-para-anugraheṇa by compassion like YoursSB 4.7.29
tat-para in relation with the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.22.25
sva-para-druhā which is envious of the performer and of othersSB 6.16.42
sva-para-abhiniveśena consisting of absorption in the bodily concept of oneself and othersSB 7.2.60
sva-para this is my own business, and that is someone else'sSB 7.5.13
ātma-para-buddhiḥ the conception of one's own and another'sSB 7.9.31
asva-para-dṛṣṭīnām who do not distinguish between what is their own and what is another'sSB 10.24.4
dvi-para-ardha the two halves of Brahmā's total life spanSB 12.4.1
prakṛtira para beyond this material energyCC Madhya 21.54
dayā-para O causelessly merciful oneMM 1
kaila paracāra Lord Kṛṣṇa propagatedCC Adi 5.90
smṛti-paracāra propagation of the directions of Vaiṣṇava behaviorCC Madhya 24.325
kare paracāra preachesCC Antya 5.74
mat-para in relationship with MeBG 2.61
tat-para very much attached to itBG 4.39
dhyāna-yoga-para absorbed in tranceBG 18.51-53
mat-para under My protectionBG 18.57
yat-para under whose subordinationSB 2.5.4
nārāyaṇa-para just to know NārāyaṇaSB 2.5.16
prakṛteḥ para beyond this material worldSB 3.26.3
mat-para My devoteeSB 4.7.53
dharma-para one who is strictly following religious principlesSB 4.17.31
nārāyaṇa-para Lord Śiva, the great devotee of NārāyaṇaSB 4.24.32
mat-para My devoteeSB 5.5.21-22
tat-anuśāsana-para engaged in governing the globeSB 5.7.1
artha-para intent upon gaining wealthSB 5.13.1
artha-para who is very attached to moneySB 5.14.1
sva-artha-para interested only in sense gratification in this life or the nextSB 6.10.6
sat-asat-para who is the cause of all causes (the supreme cause)SB 6.16.21
tat-para intent upon thatSB 6.18.59
mat-para just for the sake of My workSB 7.10.23
bhagavat-para having fully realized the Personality of GodheadSB 7.13.45
parāt-para He is transcendental to transcendental, or above all transcendenceSB 8.3.4
mat-para My pure devoteeSB 8.22.27
nārāyaṇa-para a great devotee of Lord Nārāyaṇa, the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 8.24.10
ānṛśaṃsya-para becomes completely free from envySB 9.11.23
dayā-para being very kindSB 9.18.19
tat-para dedicated to HimSB 10.33.36
tat-para having as its intentSB 10.68.47
nārāyaṇa-para devoted to Lord NārāyaṇaSB 10.75.23
svaḥ paraḥ iti mine and 'someone else's'SB 11.2.52
nārāyaṇa-para completely devoted to the Supreme Lord, NārāyaṇaSB 11.3.33
mat-para one who is dedicated to MeSB 11.10.4
mat-para one who is devoted to MeSB 11.10.5
mat-para having faith in MeSB 11.15.26
amat-para one who is not surrendered to MeSB 11.17.38
mat-para the devotee dedicated to MeSB 11.28.43
advandva-para uninvolved in material dualitiesSB 11.29.45
tapaḥ-svādhyāya-para dedicated to austerities and studies of the Vedic literatureSB 12.8.7-11
vicāraṇa-para who is serious about understandingSB 12.13.18
tat-para fully intent upon HimCC Adi 4.34
nanda-nandana-para fixed upon the son of Mahārāja NandaCC Madhya 2.52
nanda-nandana-para fixed upon the son of Mahārāja NandaCC Antya 1.148
parāt para the superior of all superiorsBs 5.6
tat-dharma-paraiḥ by following in the footsteps of the LordSB 4.21.39
tat-paraiḥ by those who are devoted to HimSB 12.11.24
pañca-parakāra of five different varietiesCC Madhya 6.266
pañca parakāra five categoriesCC Madhya 19.183-184
pañca parakāra five varietiesCC Madhya 23.45
catur-vyūha-parakāśa manifestation of quadruple expansionsCC Madhya 20.193
ataḥ param hereafterBG 2.12
tat param Kṛṣṇa consciousnessBG 5.16
tat param transcendentalBG 11.37
mat-param subordinate to MeBG 13.13
ataḥ param thereafterSB 1.3.22
nārāyaṇa-param just with an aim to achieve NārāyaṇaSB 2.5.16
nārāyaṇa-param just to realize a glimpse of NārāyaṇaSB 2.5.16
ataḥ param beyondSB 3.8.32
ataḥ param hereafterSB 3.9.3
bhagavat-param who was a great devotee of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 3.22.34
prakṛteḥ param transcendental to material existenceSB 3.25.17
tataḥ param thereafterSB 4.23.5
tataḥ param beyond thatSB 4.25.34
ataḥ param after thisSB 5.20.1
nārāyaṇa-param fully intent on Lord NārāyaṇaSB 6.8.4-6
ataḥ param and hereafter, in the futureSB 6.15.2
brahma param the Supreme BrahmanSB 7.1.19
puruṣam param the Supreme PersonalitySB 8.6.3-7
adbhutam param it was extraordinarily wonderfulSB 8.11.32
alīka-param the most heinous liarSB 8.20.4
brahma param Parabrahman, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, KṛṣṇaSB 9.9.49
tataḥ param whatever remainedSB 9.16.20
satya-param who is the Absolute Truth (as stated in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, satyaṃ paraṃ dhīmahi)SB 10.2.26
prāptaḥ param vismayam had become extremely astonishedSB 10.13.15
avarohaṇataḥ param beyond the place marked for climbing downSB 10.18.25
tataḥ param thereafterSB 11.29.41-44
puruṣam param the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 24.90
puruṣam param the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 24.197
satyam param the supreme Absolute TruthCC Madhya 25.147
camatkṛti-param full of wonderCC Antya 1.164
ataḥ param here afterCC Antya 5.124-125
parāt param the greatest of allBs 5.26
parāt param the Supreme Absolute TruthMM 7
ghṛta-sikta parama-anna sweet rice mixed with gheeCC Madhya 15.217
pradhāna-parama-vyomnoḥ antare between the material world and the spiritual worldCC Madhya 21.50
sei parama-pramāṇe that is the foremost proofCC Antya 20.85
mat-paramaḥ considering Me the SupremeBG 11.55
mat-paramāḥ taking Me, the Supreme Lord, as everythingBG 12.20
mat-paramāḥ accepting Me as the Supreme or the ultimate goal of lifeCC Madhya 23.113
bhakti-paramāḥ those engaged in devotional serviceNoI 10
nirvāṇa-paramām cessation of material existenceBG 6.15
tri-dhāma-paramam to the highest planetary systemSB 3.24.20
viṣṇoḥ paramam padam the supreme abode of Lord Viṣṇu, or the lotus feet of Lord ViṣṇuSB 5.23.1
brahma paramam the Supreme Absolute TruthSB 10.23.10-11
brahma paramam the Absolute TruthSB 11.11.28
brahma paramam the Absolute TruthSB 11.20.37
śāstra-paramāṇa the evidence of revealed scriptureCC Adi 4.96
śāstra-paramāṇa evidence of revealed scripturesCC Madhya 20.353
avadhūta paramānanda Avadhūta ParamānandaCC Adi 11.49
kīrtanīyā-paramānanda Paramānanda, who used to perform kīrtanaCC Madhya 25.179
mat-paramau accepting Me as the supreme destination of lifeSB 10.10.42
paśyataḥ parameṣṭhinaḥ as Lord Brahmā looked onSB 11.13.42
andha-parampara by a disciplic succession of blind. ignorant peopleSB 5.6.11
daṇḍa-paraṇāma obeisances, falling flatCC Madhya 9.287
daṇḍa-paraṇāma offering obeisancesCC Madhya 15.5
daṇḍa-paraṇāma offering obeisances and daṇḍavatsCC Antya 4.147
daṇḍa-paraṇāma kari' offering obeisances by falling down on the groundCC Antya 13.101
strī-paraśa haile if I had touched a womanCC Antya 13.85
gandha śabda paraśa aroma, sound and touchCC Antya 14.49
hailā parasanna became pleasedCC Madhya 16.225
nā haila parasanna was not happyCC Antya 3.158
hañā parasanne being very pleased with MeCC Madhya 16.277
tomāra paraśe by Your touchCC Antya 18.113
śāstra-parasiddhi determined by reference to the revealed scripturesCC Madhya 20.168
parāt-para He is transcendental to transcendental, or above all transcendenceSB 8.3.4
parāt para the superior of all superiorsBs 5.6
parāt param the greatest of allBs 5.26
parāt param the Supreme Absolute TruthMM 7
daiva-paratantra under the spell of māyāCC Adi 12.9
veda-paratantra subject to the Vedic rulesCC Madhya 10.137
prema-paratantra subordinate to loveCC Madhya 12.29
tat-paratvena by the sole purpose of serving the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 19.170
krīḍā-parau ati-calau the babies, being too restless, engaged in playSB 10.8.25
goloka-paravyoma the spiritual planet Goloka and the spiritual skyCC Madhya 21.54
mat-para whose object is MeSB 6.4.43
pradhāna-parayoḥ of nature and the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.1.23
pūrva-parayoḥ the former and the latterCC Antya 8.80
paśyataḥ parameṣṭhinaḥ as Lord Brahmā looked onSB 11.13.42
phāńpara perplexedCC Madhya 21.31
phāńpara ha-ilā became bewilderedCC Madhya 21.69
piṇḍira upara on the altarCC Antya 3.231
pitari uparate after the death of the fatherSB 5.9.8
pradhāna-parayoḥ of nature and the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 7.1.23
pradhāna-parama-vyomnoḥ antare between the material world and the spiritual worldCC Madhya 21.50
prakṛteḥ param transcendental to material existenceSB 3.25.17
prakṛteḥ para beyond this material worldSB 3.26.3
prakṛtira para beyond this material energyCC Madhya 21.54
sei parama-pramāṇe that is the foremost proofCC Antya 20.85
prāptaḥ param vismayam had become extremely astonishedSB 10.13.15
prema-paratantra subordinate to loveCC Madhya 12.29
priyera upara against her beloved husbandCC Madhya 14.139
puruṣam param the Supreme PersonalitySB 8.6.3-7
puruṣam param the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 24.90
puruṣam param the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 24.197
pūrva-pakṣa-apara-pakṣābhyām by the period of waxing and waningSB 5.22.9
pūrva-aparam the beginning and the endSB 10.9.13-14
pūrva-apara former and latterCC Madhya 18.197
pūrva-parayoḥ the former and the latterCC Antya 8.80
rajasā uparaktaḥ initiated by the mode of passionSB 3.8.33
uparata-rāsaḥ stopped its playingSB 5.8.22
apara-rātra-ante at the end of the nightSB 8.4.17-24
apara-rātre in the fourth part of the nightSB 6.8.22
gandha śabda paraśa aroma, sound and touchCC Antya 14.49
śaralā-upara on the dry barkCC Antya 13.12
śāstra-paramāṇa the evidence of revealed scriptureCC Adi 4.96
śāstra-parasiddhi determined by reference to the revealed scripturesCC Madhya 20.168
śāstra-paramāṇa evidence of revealed scripturesCC Madhya 20.353
sat-asat-para who is the cause of all causes (the supreme cause)SB 6.16.21
satya-param who is the Absolute Truth (as stated in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, satyaṃ paraṃ dhīmahi)SB 10.2.26
satya-tretā-dvāpara-kali-yugera of Satya-yuga, Tretā-yuga, Dvāpara-yuga and Kali-yugaCC Madhya 20.329
satyam param the supreme Absolute TruthCC Madhya 25.147
sei parama-pramāṇe that is the foremost proofCC Antya 20.85
ghṛta-sikta parama-anna sweet rice mixed with gheeCC Madhya 15.217
smṛti-paracāra propagation of the directions of Vaiṣṇava behaviorCC Madhya 24.325
sparaśa for touchingSB 10.16.36
sparaśa by the touchSB 10.21.18
sparaśa for touchingCC Madhya 8.147
sparaśa for touchingCC Madhya 9.114
sparaśa by the touchCC Madhya 18.34
sparaśa for touchingCC Madhya 24.54
sparaśa by the touchCC Antya 14.86
sparaśaiḥ whose touchSB 10.72.38
sparaśe in touchingCC Madhya 22.137-139
strī-paraśa haile if I had touched a womanCC Antya 13.85
śuna ataḥpara just hearCC Antya 2.57
sva-artha-para interested only in sense gratification in this life or the nextSB 6.10.6
sva-para-druhā which is envious of the performer and of othersSB 6.16.42
sva-para-abhiniveśena consisting of absorption in the bodily concept of oneself and othersSB 7.2.60
sva-para this is my own business, and that is someone else'sSB 7.5.13
tapaḥ-svādhyāya-para dedicated to austerities and studies of the Vedic literatureSB 12.8.7-11
svaḥ paraḥ iti mine and 'someone else's'SB 11.2.52
tāhāra upara upon thisCC Madhya 13.168
tāhāra upara on itCC Madhya 16.196
tāhāra upara above thatCC Madhya 21.105
tāńhāra upara upon Advaita ĀcāryaCC Madhya 14.89
tāńra upara upon himCC Antya 16.39
tapaḥ-svādhyāya-para dedicated to austerities and studies of the Vedic literatureSB 12.8.7-11
tāra upara on thatCC Madhya 4.72
tat-para very much attached to itBG 4.39
tat param Kṛṣṇa consciousnessBG 5.16
tat param transcendentalBG 11.37
tat-dharma-paraiḥ by following in the footsteps of the LordSB 4.21.39
tat-para in relation with the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 4.22.25
tat-anuśāsana-para engaged in governing the globeSB 5.7.1
tat-para intent upon thatSB 6.18.59
tat-para dedicated to HimSB 10.33.36
tat-para having as its intentSB 10.68.47
tat-paraiḥ by those who are devoted to HimSB 12.11.24
tat-para fully intent upon HimCC Adi 4.34
tat-paratvena by the sole purpose of serving the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Madhya 19.170
tataḥ param thereafterSB 4.23.5
tataḥ param beyond thatSB 4.25.34
tataḥ param whatever remainedSB 9.16.20
tataḥ param thereafterSB 11.29.41-44
hañā tatpara being intentCC Antya 2.57
hañā tatpara with great attentionCC Antya 10.40
tomāra upara upon youCC Madhya 11.52
tomāra upara above YouCC Antya 2.135
tomāra paraśe by Your touchCC Antya 18.113
satya-tretā-dvāpara-kali-yugera of Satya-yuga, Tretā-yuga, Dvāpara-yuga and Kali-yugaCC Madhya 20.329
tri-dhāma-paramam to the highest planetary systemSB 3.24.20
triveṇī-upara on the bank of the confluence of the Yamunā and the GangesCC Madhya 19.60
ṭuńgi upara vasi' sitting in an elevated placeCC Madhya 20.40
tvat-para-anugraheṇa by compassion like YoursSB 4.7.29
tvat-aparam other than Your LordshipCC Madhya 22.96
upara aboveCC Adi 7.115
upara upperCC Adi 9.38
upara uponCC Adi 14.73
upara uponCC Adi 17.180
hṛdaya-upara on the chestsCC Madhya 3.104
tāra upara on thatCC Madhya 4.72
upara uponCC Madhya 6.69
āmāra upara on MeCC Madhya 7.25
tomāra upara upon youCC Madhya 11.52
upara the ceilingCC Madhya 12.82
upara aboardCC Madhya 13.22
tāhāra upara upon thisCC Madhya 13.168
tāńhāra upara upon Advaita ĀcāryaCC Madhya 14.89
priyera upara against her beloved husbandCC Madhya 14.139
dvārera upara above the doorCC Madhya 15.81
upara upwardCC Madhya 15.82
hastī-upara upon the backs of elephantsCC Madhya 16.117
āmāra upara upon meCC Madhya 16.134
tāhāra upara on itCC Madhya 16.196
triveṇī-upara on the bank of the confluence of the Yamunā and the GangesCC Madhya 19.60
ṭuńgi upara vasi' sitting in an elevated placeCC Madhya 20.40
tāhāra upara above thatCC Madhya 21.105
upara uponCC Madhya 21.109
upara onCC Madhya 21.128
upara uponCC Madhya 25.220
tomāra upara above YouCC Antya 2.135
piṇḍira upara on the altarCC Antya 3.231
cāńgera upara on the cāńgaCC Antya 9.134
jhālira upara upon the bagsCC Antya 10.40
śaralā-upara on the dry barkCC Antya 13.12
bhūmira upara on the groundCC Antya 14.36
kāndhera upara on the shoulderCC Antya 14.44
tāńra upara upon himCC Antya 16.39
upara aboveCC Antya 16.50
upara on the bodyCC Antya 19.68
uparacita arranged in proximitySB 12.12.68
uparajya being connectedSB 4.29.69
uparakta-manasā due to the mind's being influencedSB 5.14.5
rajasā uparaktaḥ initiated by the mode of passionSB 3.8.33
viṣaya-uparaktaḥ attached to material happiness, sense gratificationSB 5.11.5
uparama freedom from false egoSB 5.19.9
uparamaḥ cessationSB 2.2.6
uparamaḥ the cessationSB 7.7.28
grāmya-īha-uparamaḥ not taking part in so-called philanthropic activitiesSB 7.11.8-12
uparamaḥ the cessationSB 10.29.12
uparamam cessationSB 1.8.36
uparamate cease (because one feels transcendental happiness)BG 6.20-23
uparamayoḥ of decreasingSB 7.13.21
uparambhati causes to relishSB 10.35.12-13
uparamet one should hold backBG 6.25
uparamet should retireSB 2.2.19
uparamet should fastSB 6.19.21
uparamet he should desist from material activitiesSB 11.29.18
uparameta one should desistSB 5.5.14
uparameta ceaseSB 11.22.34
uparandhayanti cookSB 5.26.13
uparandhayati cooksSB 5.26.13
uparañjitā being coloredSB 5.17.1
upararāma stoppedSB 1.6.25
upararāma retired fromSB 1.13.2
upararāma became released fromSB 1.15.33
upararāma retiredSB 4.28.42
upararāma got reliefSB 5.1.22
upararāma ceased His pastimes as the King of this planetSB 5.6.6
upararāma he retired from all material activitiesSB 5.20.2
upararāma ceased to enjoySB 9.20.33
upara subsidedSB 1.3.34
uparata-ariḥ one who has vanquished the enemiesSB 3.1.38
uparata disregardedSB 3.21.21
uparata-akhila completely turned backSB 4.7.26
uparata-karmaṇām who are no longer interested in fruitive activitiesSB 5.5.28
uparata-anuvṛttiḥ who was acting as if giving up His material bodySB 5.6.6
uparata being freed fromSB 5.7.11
uparata-rāsaḥ stopped its playingSB 5.8.22
uparata ceasedSB 5.10.14
uparata-ātmānaḥ who have control over the mind and sensesSB 5.14.39
uparata-anātmye wherein identification with material things was stoppedSB 5.15.7
uparata-anātmyāya having no attachment for this material worldSB 5.19.11
uparata withdrawnSB 6.9.36
uparataḥ relievedSB 1.11.34
uparataḥ having ceasedSB 11.31.11
uparataḥ ceasingSB 12.6.28
uparatam ceasedBG 2.35
uparatam passed awaySB 4.28.45
uparatam stoppedSB 7.5.33
uparatam ceasedSB 10.25.25
uparate falling downSB 1.13.34
uparate having disappearedSB 3.4.30
uparate being deadSB 4.14.39-40
pitari uparate after the death of the fatherSB 5.9.8
uparate when killedSB 5.24.25
uparate ceaseSB 6.16.21
uparate upon being relieved of the kingdomSB 9.6.11
uparate passed awaySB 9.17.14
uparate passed awaySB 9.20.23
uparate has desisted from material activitiesSB 10.20.40
uparate when he passed awaySB 10.48.33
uparate having passed awaySB 10.49.17
uparatiḥ indifference to loss and gainSB 1.16.26-30
uparatiḥ detachmentSB 3.25.13
uparatiḥ completely stoppingSB 7.13.27
ṭuńgi upara vasi' sitting in an elevated placeCC Madhya 20.40
veda-paratantra subject to the Vedic rulesCC Madhya 10.137
anuparata-vegā whose force is uninterruptedSB 5.17.7
vicāraṇa-para who is serious about understandingSB 12.13.18
viṣaya-uparaktaḥ attached to material happiness, sense gratificationSB 5.11.5
prāptaḥ param vismayam had become extremely astonishedSB 10.13.15
viṣṇoḥ paramam padam the supreme abode of Lord Viṣṇu, or the lotus feet of Lord ViṣṇuSB 5.23.1
pradhāna-parama-vyomnoḥ antare between the material world and the spiritual worldCC Madhya 21.50
catur-vyūha-parakāśa manifestation of quadruple expansionsCC Madhya 20.193
vyuparata giving upSB 10.20.40
yat-para under whose subordinationSB 2.5.4
dhyāna-yoga-para absorbed in tranceBG 18.51-53
satya-tretā-dvāpara-kali-yugera of Satya-yuga, Tretā-yuga, Dvāpara-yuga and Kali-yugaCC Madhya 20.329
Results for para170 results
para pronoun ancient (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
better or worse than (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
exceeding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
far (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
final (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
following (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
hostile opposite (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
previous (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
remote (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
worst (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 46/72933
parabhāga noun (masculine) excellence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
superior power or merit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 36623/72933
parabhū noun (feminine) a crow
Frequency rank 57142/72933
parabhṛt noun (masculine) a crow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 28851/72933
parabhṛta noun (masculine) the Kokila or Indian cuckoo (supposed to leave its eggs to be hatched by the crow) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13043/72933
parabhṛtā noun (feminine) the female Kokila (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57143/72933
paradāra noun (masculine) adultery (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
another's wife or wives (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15858/72933
paradūṣaṇa noun (masculine) (sc. saṃdhi) peace purchased by the entire produce of a country (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57135/72933
paragāmin adjective being with or relating to another (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57130/72933
parakya adjective
Frequency rank 57129/72933
parakāyapraveśana noun (neuter) entering another's body (a supernatural art) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 28850/72933
parakīya adjective belonging to another or a stranger (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
strange (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 11330/72933
parakṛti noun (feminine) an example or precedent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the action or history of another (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57127/72933
parakṛtya adjective busy for another (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
hostile (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57128/72933
paraloka noun (masculine) the other or future world (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 19573/72933
param indeclinable afterwards extremely
Frequency rank 983/72933
parama adjective (with abl.) superior or inferior to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
better or worse than (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
chief (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
extreme (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
highest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
last (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
most excellent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
most prominent or conspicuous (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
primary (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
remotest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
worst (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 102/72933
parama noun (neuter) chief part or matter or object (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
extreme limit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
highest point (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 36624/72933
paramahaṃsa noun (masculine) a religious man who has subdued all his senses by abstract meditation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
an ascetic of the highest order (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15860/72933
paramaka adjective best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
extreme (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
greatest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
highest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 6069/72933
paramapuruṣa noun (masculine) highest man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57144/72933
paramata noun (neuter) a different opinion or doctrine (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
heterodoxy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 28852/72933
paramatas indeclinable excessively (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
in the highest degree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
worst of all (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 36625/72933
paramaśiva noun (masculine) das höchste [śivaitische] Prinzip name of authors (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 16936/72933
parameśa noun (masculine) name of Viṣṇu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Supreme Being (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the supreme lord (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 7308/72933
parameśin noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 57150/72933
parameśvara noun (neuter) (sc. liṅga) name of a Liṅga sacred to Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57151/72933
parameśvara noun (masculine) a Jaina (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
God (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of any eminent prince or illustrious man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Indra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Viṣṇu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Supreme Being (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the supreme lord (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 1002/72933
parameśvaratā noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 57152/72933
parameśvarī noun (feminine) name of Durgā (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Lakṣmī name of Pārvatī
Frequency rank 3753/72933
parameśvarībhū verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to become Parameśvara
Frequency rank 36628/72933
parameśvarīkṛ verb (class 8 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 57153/72933
parameśāna noun (masculine) name of Śiva [rel.] name of Viṣṇu
Frequency rank 10407/72933
parameśānī noun (feminine) name of Pārvatī
Frequency rank 6690/72933
parameṣu noun (masculine) name of a son of Anu
Frequency rank 57154/72933
parameṣṭhi noun (masculine) a superior or a chief god of the Jainas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 28854/72933
parameṣṭhin noun (masculine) a kind of ammonite (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a son of Prajāpati (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Agni (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of any supreme being (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Brahmā (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Garuḍa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Manu Cakṣus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Prajāpati (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Viṣṇu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the teacher of the teacher of any one's teacher (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 2058/72933
parameṣṭhin adjective chief (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
highest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
principal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
standing at the head (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57155/72933
parameṣṭhinī noun (feminine) Ruta Graveolens (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
[rel.] name of Devī
Frequency rank 28855/72933
parampara adjective one following the other (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
proceeding from one to another (as from father to son) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
repeated (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
successive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 21656/72933
paramparā noun (feminine) an uninterrupted row or series (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
continuation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
hurting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
killing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
lineage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
mediation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
order (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
progeny (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
succession (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 6070/72933
paramākṣara adjective containing the syllable oṃ
Frequency rank 36626/72933
paramākṣara noun (neuter) the sacred syllable "Om" or Brahmā (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57145/72933
paramāmṛta noun (masculine) mercury
Frequency rank 57149/72933
paramānanda noun (masculine) name of several authors (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
soul of the universe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
supreme felicity (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the Supreme spirit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 10132/72933
paramānandamūrti noun (neuter) paramānadamūrtija
Frequency rank 57147/72933
paramānandamūrtija noun (neuter) a kind of alchemical apparatus
Frequency rank 57148/72933
paramānna noun (neuter) rice boiled in milk with sugar (offered to gods or deceased ancestors) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13609/72933
paramārtha noun (masculine) any excellent or important object (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
spiritual knowledge (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the best kind of wealth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the best sense (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the highest or whole truth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 4249/72933
paramātman noun (masculine) all the heart (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the Supreme spirit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 2233/72933
paramāṇu noun (masculine) an infinitesimal particle or atom (30 are said to form a mote in a sun-beam) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the passing of a sun-beam past an atom of matter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 3710/72933
paramāṇukatā noun (feminine) the state of a paramāṇu
Frequency rank 57146/72933
paramāṇuśaḥ indeclinable
Frequency rank 28853/72933
paramīkaraṇa noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 36627/72933
parantu indeclinable but
Frequency rank 36622/72933
paranāda noun (masculine) the supreme sound
Frequency rank 57136/72933
parapada noun (neuter) final emancipation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the highest position (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57138/72933
parapakṣa noun (masculine) enemy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
hostile party (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a son of Anu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the other side (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57137/72933
parapreṣyatva noun (neuter) slavery (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the service of another (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57141/72933
parapuraṃjaya adjective conquering an enemy's city (said of heroes) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 5559/72933
parapuraṃjaya noun (masculine) name of a king (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57139/72933
parapuṣṭa noun (masculine) the Kokila or Indian cuckoo (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 16935/72933
parapuṣṭamadodbhava noun (masculine) the mango tree
Frequency rank 57140/72933
parapūrvā noun (feminine) a woman who has had a former husband (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15859/72933
pararu noun (masculine) a species of pot-herb (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57156/72933
paras indeclinable (as prep. with acc.) on the other side of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
afterwards (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
beyond (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
further (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
higher or more than (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
in future (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 8809/72933
parasmaipada noun (neuter) the transitive or active verb and its terminations (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 14263/72933
paraspara adjective each other's (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
like one another (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
mutual (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 690/72933
parasparāśraya noun (masculine) circulus vitiosus (Richard Garbe (1891), 53) mutual dependence (esp. as a fault in argument) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57164/72933
parastrī noun (feminine) the wife of another or an unmarried woman depending on another (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24503/72933
parastāt indeclinable above (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
afterwards (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
apart (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
aside (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
from afar off (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
from before or behind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
further away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
further on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
hereafter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
later (opp. to pūrvam) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
towards (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 9876/72933
paratama adjective best highest
Frequency rank 57133/72933
paratantra adjective obedient (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 6901/72933
paratantrīkṛ verb (class 8 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 57132/72933
paratara adjective
Frequency rank 6238/72933
paratarkaka noun (masculine) a beggar (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57134/72933
paratas indeclinable (with prec. abl.) after (in time) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
above (in rank) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
afterwards (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
behind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
beyond (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
differently (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
far off (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
farther (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
high above (in rank) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
otherwise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 4122/72933
parataṅgaṇa noun (masculine) name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57131/72933
paratra indeclinable below i.e. in the sequel (of a book) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
elsewhere (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
hereafter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
in a future state or world (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
in another place (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 3845/72933
paratva noun (neuter) consequence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
difference (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
distance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
posteriority (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
remoteness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
strangeness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
superiority to (gen.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 6429/72933
para noun (feminine) absoluteness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
highest degree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the being quite devoted to or intent upon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 36621/72933
paravant adjective destitute (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
helpless (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
obedient (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
subject to or dependent on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
subservient (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 10994/72933
paravaśa adjective obedient (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
subdued or ruled by (comp.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
subject to another's will (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
subservient (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15861/72933
paravaśākṣepa noun (masculine) [poet.] a kind of ākṣepa
Frequency rank 57157/72933
paravācya adjective
Frequency rank 57158/72933
paravāda noun (masculine) controversy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
objection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
popular rumour or report (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
slander (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the talk of others (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57159/72933
paraśiva noun (masculine) name of an author of Mantras (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Śiva in seiner höchsten Gestalt
Frequency rank 36629/72933
paraśu noun (masculine) a hatchet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a thunderbolt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
axe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a king (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the axe of a woodcutter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 5844/72933
paraśuka noun (masculine) an ax name of a king
Frequency rank 57160/72933
paraśurāma noun (masculine) name of a prince and of several authors (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of one of the three Rāmas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24501/72933
paraśuvana noun (neuter) name of a hell (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57161/72933
paraśvadha noun (masculine) a hatchet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
axe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 3916/72933
paraśvadhin adjective furnished with an axe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 28856/72933
paraśvadhāyudha noun (masculine) name of Śiva
Frequency rank 57163/72933
paraśvas indeclinable the day after to-morrow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24502/72933
paraśvathu noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 57162/72933
paraḥkṛṣṇa adjective extremely dark (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
more than black (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57165/72933
paraḥśata adjective more than 100 (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 19574/72933
paraṃtapa adjective destroying foes (said of heroes) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 1339/72933
paraṃtapa noun (masculine) name of a prince of Magadha (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a son of Manu Tāmasa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of Śiva
Frequency rank 36630/72933
anapara adjective having no follower (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
single (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
sole (as name of Brahma) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
without another (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 31736/72933
anuparata adjective not stopped (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
uninterrupted (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 31940/72933
anuparama noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 43183/72933
apara adjective a-para non-para having no rival or superior (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
having nothing beyond or after (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 5362/72933
apara pronoun der andere
Frequency rank 286/72933
aparaka adjective other
Frequency rank 43637/72933
aparati noun (feminine) frigidity
Frequency rank 43638/72933
aparatra indeclinable in another place (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 17536/72933
aparatva noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 8922/72933
aparathā indeclinable
Frequency rank 43639/72933
aparapakṣa noun (masculine) the defendant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the latter half of the month (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the other or opposing side (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 32110/72933
aparapakṣīya adjective belonging to the latter half of the month (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 43640/72933
apararātra noun (masculine) the end of the night (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the last watch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the latter half of the night (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13952/72933
apararātraka noun (neuter) apararātra
Frequency rank 43641/72933
aparavaktrā noun (feminine neuter) a kind of metre of four lines (having every two lines the same) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23056/72933
aparavidha adjective
Frequency rank 43642/72933
aparaśiras adjective
Frequency rank 32111/72933
aparaspara adjective one after the other (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23057/72933
alpara noun (feminine) a kind of plant
Frequency rank 45059/72933
āparamāṇu indeclinable
Frequency rank 33086/72933
upara noun (masculine) cloud (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
region (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the lower part of the sacrificial post (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the lower stone on which the Soma is laid (that it may be ground by means of another stone held in the hand) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 47593/72933
uparacay verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to construct (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to effect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to form (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to make (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to prepare (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 47594/72933
uparañj verb (class 4 parasmaipada)
Frequency rank 15568/72933
uparañjana noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 47595/72933
uparañjay verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to affect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to influence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 33530/72933
uparati noun (feminine) cessation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
death (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
desisting from sensual enjoyment or any worldly action (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
quietism (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
stopping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23511/72933
uparatāri adjective being at peace with all (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
having no foe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
one whose foes are quiet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 47596/72933
uparatna noun (neuter) a secondary or inferior gem (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15569/72933
uparathyā noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 47597/72933
uparam verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to await (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to be inactive or quiet (as a quietist) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to cause to cease or stop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to cease from action (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to cease from motion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to desist (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to give up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to leave off (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to pause (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to render quiet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to renounce (with abl.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to stop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to stop (speaking or doing anything) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
to wait for (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 4564/72933
uparama noun (masculine) cessation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
death (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
desisting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
expiration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
giving up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
leaving off (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
stopping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 5743/72933
uparamaṇa noun (neuter) ceasing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
discontinuance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the abstaining from worldly actions or desires (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 47598/72933
uparasa noun (masculine) a secondary feeling or passion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a secondary flavour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a secondary mineral (as red chalk) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 2913/72933
karpara noun (masculine) a cup (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a kind of weapon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
bowl (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cranium (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
eine Schale Ficus glomerata (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a thief (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
pot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the shell of a tortoise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the skull (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 8253/72933
karpara noun (neuter) a kind of salt a pot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
potsherd (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 27421/72933
kārpara noun (neuter) mayūragrīva
Frequency rank 49230/72933
kiṃpara adjective
Frequency rank 49481/72933
kaurpara adjective being at the elbow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 50273/72933
kūrpara noun (masculine) elbow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 6776/72933
kūrparasaṃdhi noun (masculine) the joint between hand and elbow
Frequency rank 72835/72933
kṣamāśāntipara noun (masculine) dama
Frequency rank 50520/72933
khaṇḍaparaśu noun (masculine) Viṣṇu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 19239/72933
kharpara noun (masculine neuter) a beggar's bowl or dish (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a kind of earthen vessel [mṛtpātraviśeṣa] a rogue (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a thief (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
an umbrella or parasol (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cheat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the half of a skull (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the skull (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
mayūragrīva rasaka
Frequency rank 2993/72933
kharpara noun (feminine neuter) a kind of mineral substance (used as a collyrium) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
rasaka a sort of calamine
Frequency rank 6780/72933
kharparaka noun (masculine neuter) a bowl rasaka
Frequency rank 9817/72933
kharparaka noun (masculine) kharpara
Frequency rank 50859/72933
kharparamūṣā noun (feminine) a kind of crucible
Frequency rank 50860/72933
khāpara noun (masculine) a kind of metallic element name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
kharpara rasaka
Frequency rank 10928/72933
goparasa noun (masculine) myrrh (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 51555/72933
ghaṭakharpara noun (masculine neuter) a kind of pot
Frequency rank 15691/72933
ghaṭakharparaka noun (masculine) ghaṭakharpara
Frequency rank 34783/72933
tatpara adjective attending closely to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
eagerly engaged in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
following that or thereupon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
having that as one's highest object or aim (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
totally devoted or addicted to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 2417/72933
para adjective hornless (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 53871/72933
dakṣiṇāpara adjective south-western (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 54136/72933
dvāpara noun (masculine neuter) doubt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a myth. being (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of the 3rd of the 4 Yugas or ages of the world (comprising 2400 years) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
that die or side of a die which is marked with two spots (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the Die personified (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
uncertainty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 2519/72933
parātpara adjective senior to the senior (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
superior to the best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 10698/72933
parātparatara adjective totally transcendent
Frequency rank 14264/72933
parāpara adjective better and worse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
earlier and later (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
higher and lower (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
prior and posterior (as cause and effect) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
remote and proximate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 10699/72933
parāpara noun (neuter) (in logic) a community of properties in a small class under the larger or generic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a species or class between the genus and individual (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Grewia Asiatica (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
[rel.] final emancipation
Frequency rank 57181/72933
parāparatva noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 21659/72933
puṣparakta noun (masculine) Hibiscus Phoeuiceus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58298/72933
puṣparajas noun (neuter) (esp.) saffron (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
pollen (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58299/72933
puṣparatha noun (masculine) a car for travelling or for pleasure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58300/72933
puṣparasa noun (masculine) flower-juice (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the nectar or honey of flower (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 21758/72933
puṣparasāgama noun (neuter) śvāsāri
Frequency rank 58301/72933
puṣparasodbhava noun (neuter) honey
Frequency rank 58302/72933
pūrvāpara noun (neuter) connection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
east and west (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
that which is before and behind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the proof and thing to be proved (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 59822/72933
vyuparati noun (feminine) end
Frequency rank 39827/72933
vyuparam verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to cease to come to an end to desist from (abl.) to leave off or pause variously
Frequency rank 30411/72933
vyuparama noun (masculine) cessation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
close (of day) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
end (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
interruption (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
pause (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 20127/72933
 

abhīru

1. pl . śatāvari ; wild asparagus, Asparagus recemosus; 2. fearless.

abhyaṅga,abhyañjana

the process of applying and rubbing the body with unctuous preparations; oil massage; unguent; injunction .

ābhyantarakrimi

internal parasite.

advaita

non-duality; a philosophical idea that there is only one reality; the feeling of jīva and īśvara as separate entities is rejected.

agastyaharītaki

confection preparation used for respiratory health.

agnituṇḍivaṭi

herbo-mineral preparation used in digestive disorders.

ānandabhairavarasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in fevers.

anna

food; annadveṣa aversion to food; annalepa external application of rice preparation; annamada food-mania; annaprāśana first feeding to infant.

aṇutalia

penetrating oil; a medicinal preparation applied into nostrils to improve the perception of senses and in several diseases that affect the head including grey hair, facial paralysis.

apabāhu

paralysis of arms.

apara

a trait; other; inferior; ulterior; remoteness; apara ojas palm-ful substance that protects the body from diseases.

apararātra

dawn, early morning.

ariṣṭa

a medicinal preparation made by adding decoction (kaṣāya) of prescribed drugs in a solution of sugar or jaggery and preserving for a specified period to enable fermentation; liquor, ex: vāsāriṣṭa

arka

1. sun; 2. purple calatropis; madar tree; Calotropis procera, C. gigantea. 3. distillate; a liquid medicinal preparation obtained by distillation of certain liquids or of drugs with volatile constituents, soaked in water using the distillation apparatus ex: ajāmodārka.

ārogyavardhanīvaṭi

herbo-mineral preparation used in hepatic diseases

āsava

a medicinal preparation made by soaking fresh drugs, either in form of powder or adding mash (kalka) in a solution of sugar or jaggery for a specified period to enable fermentation; liquor, ex: aravindāsava.

atulya

incomparable, unequal; atulyagotrīya incomparable; genetically different.

avaleha

a semisolid preparation of drugs, prepared with addition of jaggery, sugar or sugar-candy and boiled with prescribed drug juice or decoction; ex: vāsāvaleha

avapāṭika

laceration of the prepuce (foreskin of penis), paraphymosis.

ayaskṛti

medicinal preparation from iron.

ayoga

underuse (of sensory organs); separation; disjunction.

bhaiṣajyaratnāvali

a compilation of pharmaceutical preparations authored by Govindadās (18th Century ).

bhallātakādimodaka

a solid preparation made from marking nut, myrobalan fruit, jaggery and sesame oil; indicated in hemorrhoids caused by choler (pitta).

bhasma

calx; cinder; prepared from metals and minerals by a process of calcination, ash preparation, ex: abhraka bhasma.

bhūnāga

earthworm, bhūnāgataila oil made using earthworms and used in paralysis.

bilvādilehya

a semi-solid preparation from bael fruit and ten other ingredients; indicated in problems of digestive system.

candraprabhāvaṭi

herbomineral preparation used in urinary diseases.

cavanaprāṣalehya

confection preparation used in respiratory diseases and as a toni Century

citrakaharītaki

confection preparation used in respiratory diseases and abdominal lumps.

cyavanaprāśa

rejuvenating and anti-aeging preparation with the main ingredient of myrobalan, invented by sage Cyavana. It contains 48 ingredients and indicated in debility, gout, respir diseases, loss of appetite et Century

dāḍimāṣṭakacūrṇa

powdered preparation used in digestive system complaints.

ḍamaruyantra,ḍamarukayantra

hour-glass apparatus used in medicinal alchemy; two small drums or earthen pots joined at mouths.

dardura

Go to kharpara

ḍolayantra

swinging apparatus used to detoxify mineral and herbal raw material.

ekāṅgavāta

monoplegia or paralysis of a single limb.

ekāṅgavīraras

herbo-mineral preparation used in muscular diseases.

gajapippali

Plant dried and transversely cut pieces of female spidax of Scindapsus officinalis. The inflorescence of Balanophora fungosa, a root parasite plant, that resembles Scindapsus officinalis, is marketed as gajapippali.

gandhakarasāyana

herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of skin diseases.

ghṛta

ghee (calrified butter); a pharmaceutical preparation in which ghee is boiled with prescribed decoctions (kaṣāya) and mash (kalka) of drugs according to formula; medicated ghee.

gokṣūrādiguggulu

herbo-mineral preparation used in urinary diseases.

guḍaharītaki

confection preparation used in anaemia.

hiṅgvaṣṭakacūrna

powdered preparation used in the treatment of anorexia and tympanitis.

icchābhediras

herbo-mineral preparation to treat chronic constipation.

jihva

tongue; jihvakanṭaka glossitis (inflammation or infection of the tongue); jihvasthambha paralysis of the tongue.

jvaramurāriras

herbo-mineral preparation used to treat fevers.

kadali

Plant banana; fresh rhizome of Musa paradisiaca, M. sapientum.

kaiśoraguggulu

herbo-mineral preparation used in gout.

kalpa

1. cosmic eon; 2. preparation; 3. treatment of the sick; 4. ritual (one of the vedāngas); 5. idea.

kāmadudhāras

herbo-mineral preparation used in gastritis.

kaṅkāyanaguṭika

herbo-mineral preparation used in heamorrhoids.

kaṅku

blossom headed parakeet.

kapālika

teeth broken above gums, enamel separation; thick tartar on teeth.

kaphaketuras

herbo-mineral preparation used in asthma.

kāravella

Go to kharpara

karpara

1. pot, bowl; 2. shell of tortoise; 3. cup.

kastūribhairavarasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in influenza.

khadirāriṣṭa

alcoholic preparation used in skin diseases.

khārjūra

alcoholic preparation made from dates.

kharpara

calamine (smithsonite), zinc ore, zinc carbonate.

kharpara

kind of mineral substance.

koṣṭhayantra

ironsmith furnace; producing high temparatures using an air bladder.

kravyādiras

herbo-mineral preparation used in digestive problems.

kṣāra

1. a corrosive alkaline medicinal preparation obtained from the ash produced by burning plant-parts; 2. a kind of medicine form converted to alkali, caustic soda.

kṣāra

alkali preparation.

kuṇāvi

papad-like preparation from barley.

kūpipakvarasāyana

pharmaceutical preparation made from substances of mineral and metallic origin using a glass flask (kāckūpi), ex: makaradhvaja.

kūrpara

1. elbow joint; 2. a lethal point on this joint.

kvātha

hot decoction made from coarse powders of certain drugs, kvāthacūrṇa coarse powder made from one or more dry drugs, which is kept for preparation of kaṣāya (decoction) ex: rāsnādi kvātha.

lakṣmivilāsarasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in cough, asthma.

lohāsava

alcoholic preparation used in anaemia.

mahājvarānkuṣarasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in fevers.

mahāpuruṣadanta

Go to śatāvari, wild asparagus.

makara

crocodile; makaradhvaja cupid mercurial, mercurial preparation using mercury, gold and sulfur in different ratios for rejuvenation.

malasindhūra

a herbo-mineral preparation.

maṇḍa

1. rice preparation (gruel); 2. cream of milk, 3. decoction; 4. frog; 5. castor oil plant.

marīci

onehundred and eighty smallest particles (paramāṇu).

mṛtyunjayarasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in fevers

mūṣa

crucible, an utensil that can withstand high temparatures, used to remove morbid elements (doṣa) from various metals and minerals, especially to prepare ashes (bhasma).

nāsārṣa

nasal polyp; polypoidal masses arising from the mucous membranes of the nose and paranasal sinuses.

navakaguggulu

herbal preparation used in obesity. It contains the resin of Commiphora wightii and tiriphala, trikaṭu et Century

nirguṇḍi

Plant five leaved chaste tree, Indian privet, roots and leaves of Vitex negundo; nirguṇḍitaila oilbased preparation with nirgunḍi as main ingredient used in vraṇa.

nityānandarasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of filariasis.

pakṣāghāta

paralysis, hemiplegia.

paralysis,hemiplegia.

eye lashes, paralysis,hemiplegia.kopa trichiasis, inflammation of eyelashes.

pañcāmṛtaparpaṭi

herbo-mineral preparation used in malabsorption.

para

a trait, ulterior, supreme.

parabhṛta

koel, Indian cuckoo.

parādiguṇa

distant (para), ulterior (apara), planning (yukti), categories (sankhya), combination (samyoya), disjunction (vibhāga), isolation (pṛthakkarana), measurement (parimāṇa), refining (samskāra), usage (abhyāsa).

parahitasamhita

a 15th Century compendium authored by Srinathapaṇḍita

paramada

alcoholism; highest degree of intoxication.

paramāṇu

atom, infinitesimal particle, thirtieth part of a dust particle, paramāṇuvāda concept of universe that is made of atoms

paramātma

personification; being entirely the soul of the universe.

parasparāṇupraveṣa

mutual conglomeration of atoms.

pātālayantra

underground apparatus.

pāyasa

a sweet preparation with rice and jiggery.

peya

beverage, rice is fried in oil and later boiled in water, one of the eight varieties of rice preparations, thin gruel.

pritahkrita

separated, separation, detached.

pūrṇacandrodayarasa

a herbomineral preparation used as convalescent, aphrodisiac and rejuvinator.

pūtana

one of the seizing planets (grahas), the condition similar to hypokalemia, lesser-than-normal potassium level in the blood leading to constipation, fatigue, muscle spasms, paralysis et Century

rājavallabharasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in dispepsia.

rāmabāṇaras

herbo-mineral preparation.

rasaka

Go to kharpara

rasamāṇikya

1. ruby-like-chemical, 2. mercury based preparation used in skin diseases.

ṣaḍbindutaila

oil preparation used in the nasal diseases and headache.

ṣaḍguṇabalijārsindhūra

rasasindhūra (a mercurial preparation) prepared from six parts sulfur and one part mercury.

samavāya

perpetual co-inherence; concomitance; inseparable; assemblage.

samīrapannagaras

mineral preparation used in the treatment of paralysis.

śanairmeha

dysuria, slow and painful discharge of urine; comparable to anuresis.

sannipāta

vitiation of three humors; three humors increased; severe condition of any disease, sannipātabhairavaras herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of complicated fevers.

saptāmṛtaloha

herbo-mineral preparation used in eye ailments.

sāranga

1. large Indian parakeet; 2. bee; 3. an antelope.

sarvāngaroga

paraplegia; impairment of motor and sensory functions of lower extremeties.

śatāvari

Plant asparagus, tuberous roots of Asparagus racemosus.

siddhaprānesvararas

herbo-mineral preparation used in the diseases of alimentary tract.

simhanādaguggulu

herbo-mineral preparation used in arthritis diseases.

smṛtisāgararas

herbo-mineral preparation used in loss of memory.

snāyuka

dracunculiasis; Dracunculus medinensis, a parasitical worm eruption on the skin of the extremities.

snuhi

Plant milkhedge, stem of Euphorbia neriifolia , snuhikshāra alkali preparation from snuhi.

sthambha

paralysis, stiffness, stupefaction, pillar.

sūcikābharanaras

herbo-mineral preparation used in treatment of fevers.

śuka

parrot or green parakeet.

sūtaśekhararas

herbo-mineral preparation used in gastritis.

svaraghna

paralysis of larynx, pharyngitis.

taila

1. oil; 2. sesame oil; 3. medicated preparation in which taila is boiled with prescribed decoctions (kaṣāya) and mash (kalka) of drugs according to formula, ex: bhṛṇgarāja taila

tālisādicūrna

powdered preparation used in productive cough.

tāpyādilauha

herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of anaemia and jaundice.

trasareṇu

a weight measurement, thirty paramāṇu.

tribhuvanakīrtiras

(tri.bhuvana.kīrti.ras) herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of commoncold.

uparasa

secondary mineral, secondary alchemical reagents.

uparati

cease, desist from sexual enjoyment.

uparatna

kāca (glass), karpūrāśma (crystal), muktāśukti (pearl-oyster), śankha (conch) et Century

ūrdhvapātanayantra

(ūrdhva.pātana.yantra) sublimating apparatus.

urugraha

paralysis of the thigh.

ūrustambha

stiffness in the thighs, paraplegia; spastic thighs.

vālukā

sand, vālukāpuṭa, heating device using sand; vālukāyantra sandy apparatus to prepare rasauṣadhās.

vanda

1. parasitic plant; 2. medicant; 3. Plant Dendrophthoe falcate; Saccolabium papolosum.

vaṅga

tin, vaṅgabhasma ash preparation from tin metal.

vāritara,vāritaratva

float on water; a test for improperly processed metal. This is one of the physical analytical parameters for bhasma, and is applied to study the lightness and fineness of prepared bhasma.

vāsā

Plant Malabar nut tree, vasaka, leaves of Adhatoda vasica, vāsāvalehya confection preparation used in the treatment of respiratory diseases.

vasantakusumākararasa

(vasanta.kusumākara.ras) herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of diabetes mellitus.

vasantamālatirasa

herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of fevers.

vātagajānkuṣarasa

(vāta.gaja.ankusa.ras) herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of arthritis and muscular diseases.

vilepi

semisolid preparation of rice, rice gruel.

yantra

1. apparatus, instrument; 2. blunt surgical instruments including tubular instruments; 3. any appliance.

yasada

zinc, yasadabhasma ash preparation of zin Century

yoga

1. union; 2. pharmaceutical preparation; 3. union of words, 4. one of tantrayuktis; 5. planetary combination.

yogarājaguggulu

herbomineral preparation used in the treatment of arthritis.

yogendrarasa

herbomineral preparation used in the treatment of paralysis.

yoṣāpasmāra

(yoṣa.apasmāra) hysteria; A mental disorder characterized by emotional excitability and sometimes by amnesia or a physical deficit, such as paralysis, or a sensory deficit, without an organic cause.

Wordnet Search
"para" has 155 results.

para

īśvaraḥ, parameśvaraḥ, pareśvaraḥ, paramātmā, devaḥ, amaraḥ, vibudhaḥ, animiṣaḥ, ajaraḥ, cirāyuḥ, sucirāyuḥ, bhagavān, sarvasraṣṭā, dhātā, vidhātā, jagatkartā, viśvasṛk, bhūtādiḥ, parabrahma, brahma, jagadātmā, ham, skambhaḥ, sūkṣmaḥ, sarveśaḥ, sarvasākṣī, sarvavid, śvaḥśreyasam, śabdātītaḥ   

dharmagranthaiḥ akhilasṛṣṭeḥ nirmātṛrūpeṇa svāmirūpeṇa vā svīkṛtā mahāsattā।

īśvaraḥ sarvavyāpī asti।

para

ananyarūpa, abhinnarūpa, sama, samāna, samasamāna, tulya, ananya, abhinna, avibhinna, abheda, apara, aviparīta, nirastabheda, nirviśeṣa   

yad rūpādiṣu sadṛśam।

tena ananyarūpāḥ tisraḥ mūrtayaḥ krītāḥ।

para

anya, apara, ekatara, para, itara   

kaścit bhinnaḥ।

mayā saha anye api janāḥ santi।

para

anyaḥ, paraḥ, pārakyaḥ, anāptaḥ, parajanaḥ, anyajanaḥ, aparicitaḥ   

kuṭumbāt samājāt vā bahiḥ vyaktiḥ।

parajanaḥ samādartavyaḥ।

para

parakīya   

parasambandhi।

eṣā parakīyā sampattiḥ।

para

videśīya, parakīya, anyadeśīya, pārakya   

anyat deśasthaḥ।

pratidine bhārate naike videśīyāḥ paryaṭakāḥ āgacchanti।

para

paropakāraḥ, parahitam   

anyasambandhi hitam।

paropakāraḥ khalu dharmasādhanam।

para

sthānāntare, anyatra, itaratra, paratra, anyatas, aparatas, itaratas, anyasthāne, bhinnasthāne   

anyat sthāne।

śyāmaḥ rāmeṇa saha sthānāntare gataḥ।

para

khalu, nūnam, satyam, arthataḥ, tatvataḥ, vastutaḥ, avyalīkam, yathārtham, tattvena, yathātatham, yathārthataḥ, paramārthataḥ, anuṣatyam, añjasā, addhā   

prakṛtam eva।

bhoḥ, vismṛtavān khalu bhavataḥ nāma।

para

svārthapara, svārthabuddhi, svārthaparāyaṇa, svārthīn, svārthaparāyaṇa   

yaḥ svalābhaparāyaṇaḥ।

svārthaparaiḥ mitratā na karaṇīyā।

para

śvaḥ, paredyuḥ, paradinam   

anāgatadineṣu adyatanāt paraḥ prathamaḥ ahaḥ।

yena kena prakāreṇa śvaḥ kāryaṃ sampūrṇatām neṣyāmi।

para

puṣpahīna, apuṣpita, puṣparahita, apuṣpa, kusumarahita   

puṣpaiḥ vihīnaḥ।

eṣaḥ puṣpahīnaḥ kṣupaḥ।

para

āksījana-paramāṇuḥ   

prāṇavāyoḥ paramāṇuḥ।

dvau hāiḍrojana-paramāṇū tathā ca ekaḥ āksījana-paramāṇuḥ militvā jalaṃ prāpyate।

para

hāiḍrojana-paramāṇuḥ   

hāiḍrojana ityasya paramāṇuḥ।

raṇagolārthe hāiḍrojana-paramāṇoḥ viśeṣatvena āvaśyakatā bhavati।

para

pikaḥ, kokīlaḥ, vasantadūtaḥ, parabhṛtaḥ, parapuṣṭā, paraidhitaḥ, madālāpī, cātakaḥ, śāraṅgaḥ, vanapriyaḥ   

khagaviśeṣaḥ- kṛṣṇavarṇamadhurasvarapakṣī।

pikasya kūjanaṃ manohāri asti।

para

prasannatā, paramānandam, pulakitatvam, atyānandaḥ, paramaharṣaḥ, atyantaharṣaḥ, harṣasaṃmohaḥ, ānandamohaḥ, mohāvasthā, ānandaveśaḥ, ālhādaneśaḥ, harṣāveśaḥ, paramasukham, brahmasukham, brahmānandaḥ, praharṣaḥ, pramadaḥ, unmadaḥ, mādaḥ, harṣonmattatā, harṣonmādaḥ, romaharṣaḥ   

prasannasya bhāvaḥ।

rāmasya mukhe prasannatā dṛśyate।

para

phenaḥ, maṇḍaḥ, hiṇaḍiraḥ, abdhikaphaḥ, jalahāsaḥ, phenakaḥ, maṇḍam, kārottaraḥ, kārūjaḥ, parañjaḥ   

taraladravyasya uparisamutthitaḥ vudvudākārāḥ।

bālakaḥ phenaiḥ khelati।

para

daivapara, daivādhīna, daivāyatta, daivaparāyaṇa, daivacintaka, daivavādin   

yaḥ daive viśvasati।

asmin karmapradhānayuge daivaparaḥ vyaktiḥ paścātāpadagdhaḥ bhavati।

para

vijātīya, parajātīya, asavarṇa, asajātīya   

anyad jātīyaḥ।

adhunā asmākaṃ rāṣṭre naikāḥ vijātīyāḥ vivāhāḥ bhavanti।

para

allā, khudā, kha़ुdā, allāha, karīma, paravaradigāra, mālika, maulā, raba, rahamāna, raja़्ja़ाka़, rajjāka   

islāmadharme īśvarārthe prayuktaṃ nāma।

īśvaraḥ tathā ca allā iti anayoḥ dvayoḥ madhye abhedaḥ asti।

para

udvigna, cintāpara, vyagra, uttapta, utsuka, vidhura, samanyu   

yaḥ cintayā vyākulaḥ asti।

udvignān bālakān adhyāpakaḥ vyākhyāti।

para

śaṭha, chalanāpara, bahucchala, bahumāya, bhaṅgasārtha, māyāśīla, vakradhī, vivañciṣu, riṣaṇyu   

yaḥ vañcati।

mohanaḥ śaṭhaḥ asti ataḥ saḥ parihartavyaḥ।

para

paralokaḥ   

lokāntaram।

anicchayā api paralokasya yātrā karaṇīyā eva।

para

satyam, tathyam, ṛtam, samyak, avitatham, tattvam, tattvārtham, yathārthavacaman, yāthārthyam, sattvam, sattā, paramārthaḥ, pūtam   

tad vacanam yad yathārtham nyāyasaṅgatam dharmasaṅgataṃ ca;

satyasya rakṣaṇāya taiḥ svasya prāṇāḥ arpitāḥ। / varaṃ kūpaśatādvāpī varaṃ vāpīśatāt kratuḥ varaṃ kratuśatāt putraḥ satyaṃ putraśatāt kila।

para

kapaṭikaḥ, kūṭachadmā, kharparaḥ, ḍiṅgara, dhavaḥ, dhūrtakaḥ, vamiḥ, śaraṇḍaḥ, harakaḥ   

yaḥ atīva dhūrtaḥ asti।

kapaṭikāt dūrameva varam।

para

parahyaḥ   

gatadināt pūrvadinam।

ā parahyaḥ saḥ asvasthaḥ।

para

anya, itara, para, apara, anyadīya, anyatara, parakīya, vyatirikta   

prakṛtāt dvitīyaḥ।

vardhamānayā janasaṃkhyayā saha anyāḥ samasyāḥ udbhavanti।

para

ekāgratā, aikāgryam, niṣṭhā, niṣṭhitatvam, ekaniṣṭhatā, ananyavṛttiḥ, ekacittā, ekacittatvam, ananyacittatā, abhiniveśaḥ, cittābhiniveśaḥ, abhiyuktatā, abhiniviṣṭatā, āsaktiḥ, āsaktatā, niveśaḥ, praveśaḥ, niviṣṭatā, āviṣṭatvam, paratā, manoyogaḥ   

ekacittasya bhāvaḥ।

saritā pratyekaṃ kāryaṃ ekāgratayā karoti।

para

uparatnam   

alpamūlyavat ratnam।

navāni uparatnāni santi।

para

sat, sādhu, puṇyavat, sāttvika, satyapara, satyarata, satyavṛtta, sadharma, śuddhakarman, śucicarit, viśuddha, śīlin, sthitimat, prāñjala, praguṇa, sarala, ajihma, aśaṭha, āli, udāra, ṛjūyu, nirvyāja, niścakrika, niṣkaitava, niṣprapañca, niśaṭha, rajiṣṭha, vaktṛ, ślakṣṇa, supratīka   

akapaṭī satśīlaḥ।

santaḥ sadā pūjārhāḥ santi।

para

virāmaḥ, viratiḥ, vyanadhānam, avaratiḥ, uparatiḥ, nivṛttiḥ, vinivṛttiḥ, nirvṛttiḥ, nivarttanam, nirvarttanam, chedaḥ, vicchedaḥ, upaśamaḥ, apaśamaḥ, kṣayaḥ   

samupasthitāyām athavā pravartamānāyām kriyāyām santaticchedaḥ।

kartuḥ vṛthā virāmāt kālakṣepaḥ bhavati।

para

paramāṇuḥ   

padārthasya laghuttamaḥ kayāpi prakriyayā avibhājyaḥ bhāgaḥ।

paramāṇuḥ iti kasyāpi tatvasya laghuttamaḥ bhāgaḥ।

para

śivaḥ, śambhuḥ, īśaḥ, paśupatiḥ, pinākapāṇiḥ, śūlī, maheśvaraḥ, īśvaraḥ, sarvaḥ, īśānaḥ, śaṅkaraḥ, candraśekharaḥ, phaṇadharadharaḥ, kailāsaniketanaḥ, himādritanayāpatiḥ, bhūteśaḥ, khaṇḍaparaśuḥ, girīśaḥ, giriśaḥ, mṛḍaḥ, mṛtyañjayaḥ, kṛttivāsāḥ, pinākī, prathamādhipaḥ, ugraḥ, kapardī, śrīkaṇṭhaḥ, śitikaṇṭhaḥ, kapālabhṛt, vāmadevaḥ, mahādevaḥ, virūpākṣaḥ, trilocanaḥ, kṛśānuretāḥ, sarvajñaḥ, dhūrjaṭiḥ, nīlalohitaḥ, haraḥ, smaraharaḥ, bhargaḥ, tryambakaḥ, tripurāntakaḥ, gaṅgādharaḥ, andhakaripuḥ, kratudhvaṃsī, vṛṣadhvajaḥ, vyomakeśaḥ, bhavaḥ, bhaumaḥ, sthāṇuḥ, rudraḥ, umāpatiḥ, vṛṣaparvā, rerihāṇaḥ, bhagālī, pāśucandanaḥ, digambaraḥ, aṭṭahāsaḥ, kālañjaraḥ, purahiṭ, vṛṣākapiḥ, mahākālaḥ, varākaḥ, nandivardhanaḥ, hīraḥ, vīraḥ, kharuḥ, bhūriḥ, kaṭaprūḥ, bhairavaḥ, dhruvaḥ, śivipiṣṭaḥ, guḍākeśaḥ, devadevaḥ, mahānaṭaḥ, tīvraḥ, khaṇḍaparśuḥ, pañcānanaḥ, kaṇṭhekālaḥ, bharuḥ, bhīruḥ, bhīṣaṇaḥ, kaṅkālamālī, jaṭādharaḥ, vyomadevaḥ, siddhadevaḥ, dharaṇīśvaraḥ, viśveśaḥ, jayantaḥ, hararūpaḥ, sandhyānāṭī, suprasādaḥ, candrāpīḍaḥ, śūladharaḥ, vṛṣāṅgaḥ, vṛṣabhadhvajaḥ, bhūtanāthaḥ, śipiviṣṭaḥ, vareśvaraḥ, viśveśvaraḥ, viśvanāthaḥ, kāśīnāthaḥ, kuleśvaraḥ, asthimālī, viśālākṣaḥ, hiṇḍī, priyatamaḥ, viṣamākṣaḥ, bhadraḥ, ūrddharetā, yamāntakaḥ, nandīśvaraḥ, aṣṭamūrtiḥ, arghīśaḥ, khecaraḥ, bhṛṅgīśaḥ, ardhanārīśaḥ, rasanāyakaḥ, uḥ, hariḥ, abhīruḥ, amṛtaḥ, aśaniḥ, ānandabhairavaḥ, kaliḥ, pṛṣadaśvaḥ, kālaḥ, kālañjaraḥ, kuśalaḥ, kolaḥ, kauśikaḥ, kṣāntaḥ, gaṇeśaḥ, gopālaḥ, ghoṣaḥ, caṇḍaḥ, jagadīśaḥ, jaṭādharaḥ, jaṭilaḥ, jayantaḥ, raktaḥ, vāraḥ, vilohitaḥ, sudarśanaḥ, vṛṣāṇakaḥ, śarvaḥ, satīrthaḥ, subrahmaṇyaḥ   

devatāviśeṣaḥ- hindūdharmānusāraṃ sṛṣṭeḥ vināśikā devatā।

śivasya arcanā liṅgarūpeṇa pracalitā asti।

para

mṛtyuḥ, maraṇam, nidhanam, pañcattvam, pañcatā, atyayaḥ, antaḥ, antakālaḥ, antakaḥ, apagamaḥ, nāśaḥ, nāśa, vināśaḥ, pralayaḥ, saṃsthānam, saṃsthitiḥ, avasānam, niḥsaraṇam, uparatiḥ, apāyaḥ, prayāṇam, jīvanatyāgaḥ, tanutyāgaḥ, jīvotsargaḥ, dehakṣayaḥ, prāṇaviyogaḥ, mṛtam, mṛtiḥ, marimā, mahānidrā, dīrghanidrā, kālaḥ, kāladharmaḥ, kāladaṇḍaḥ, kālāntakaḥ, narāntakaḥ, diṣṭāntakaḥ, vyāpadaḥ, hāndram, kathāśeṣatā, kīrtiśeṣatā, lokāntaratā   

bhavanasya nāśaḥ- athavā śarīrāt prāṇanirgamanasya kriyā।

dhruvo mṛtyuḥ jīvitasya।

para

aparaḥ, aparam, apare, aparañca, apica   

uktād jñātād vā adhikaḥ।

mātaraṃ vinā aparaḥ kaḥ asti bhavataḥ gṛhe।

para

parādhīnataḥ, paravaśataḥ   

anyasya adhīnatayā।

parādhīnataḥ kāryaṃ kartuṃ na śaknomi।

para

meghaḥ, abhramam, vārivāhaḥ, stanayitnuḥ, balābakaḥ, dhārādharaḥ, jaladharaḥ, taḍitvān, vāridaḥ, ambubhṛt, ghanaḥ, jīmūtaḥ, mudiraḥ, jalamuk, dhūmayoniḥ, abhram, payodharaḥ, ambhodharaḥ, vyomadhūmaḥ, ghanāghanaḥ, vāyudāruḥ, nabhaścaraḥ, kandharaḥ, kandhaḥ, nīradaḥ, gaganadhvajaḥ, vārisuk, vārmuk, vanasuk, abdaḥ, parjanyaḥ, nabhogajaḥ, madayitnuḥ, kadaḥ, kandaḥ, gaveḍuḥ, gadāmaraḥ, khatamālaḥ, vātarathaḥ, śnetanīlaḥ, nāgaḥ, jalakaraṅkaḥ, pecakaḥ, bhekaḥ, darduraḥ, ambudaḥ, toyadaḥ, ambuvābaḥ, pāthodaḥ, gadāmbaraḥ, gāḍavaḥ, vārimasiḥ, adriḥ, grāvā, gotraḥ, balaḥ, aśnaḥ, purubhojāḥ, valiśānaḥ, aśmā, parvataḥ, giriḥ, vrajaḥ, caruḥ, varāhaḥ, śambaraḥ, rauhiṇaḥ, raivataḥ, phaligaḥ, uparaḥ, upalaḥ, camasaḥ, arhiḥ, dṛtiḥ, odanaḥ, vṛṣandhiḥ, vṛtraḥ, asuraḥ, kośaḥ   

pṛthvīstha-jalam yad sūryasya ātapena bāṣparupaṃ bhūtvā ākāśe tiṣṭhati jalaṃ siñcati ca।

kālidāsena meghaḥ dūtaḥ asti iti kalpanā kṛtā

para

brahmā, ātmabhūḥ, surajyeṣṭhaḥ, parameṣṭhī, pitāmahaḥ, hiraṇyagarbhaḥ, lokeśaḥ, svayaṃbhūḥ, caturānanaḥ, dhātā, abjayoniḥ, druhiṇaḥ, brahmadevaḥ, viriñciḥ, kamalāsanaḥ, paṅkajāsanaḥ, sraṣṭā, prajāpatiḥ, vedhāḥ, vidhātā, viścasṛṭ, vidhiḥ, nābhijanmā, aṇḍajaḥ, pūrvaḥ, nidhanaḥ, kamalodbhavaḥ, sadānandaḥ, rajomūrtiḥ, satyakaḥ, haṃsavāhanaḥ, hariḥ, pūrṇānandaḥ   

devatāviśeṣaḥ yaḥ sṛṣṭeḥ janakaḥ asti।

nāradaḥ brahmaṇaḥ putraḥ asti।

para

abhiṣṭhā, āram, viśram, āsthā, uparam, samāsthā, sthā, antarvas, abhibādh, abhisaṃsthā, avasthā, āyam, niram   

gatyavarodhātmakaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

vegena gamyamānā mama yantradvicakrikā sahasā eva abhyaṣṭhāt।

para

aṭṭaḥ, aṭṭālaḥ, upararikoṣṭhaḥ   

uparisthaḥ prakoṣṭhaḥ।

bālakāḥ aṭṭe khelanti।

para

vairam, vairitā, śatrutā, riputā, aritā, śātravam, vipakṣatā, dveṣaḥ, vidveṣaḥ, virodhaḥ, vairabhāvaḥ, pratidvandvam, pratipakṣatā, paratā, virodhaḥ   

yatra śatrubhāvanā vartate।

dānena vairāṇyapi yānti nāśanam।

para

paraśvaḥ   

āgāmidināt paradinam।

ā paraśvaḥ ahaṃ tatra na gacchāmi।

para

kāmuka, kāmin, kāmavṛtti, kāmapravaṇa, kāmāsakta, sakāma, kāmana, kamana, kamra, kamitṛ, kāmayitā, ratārthin, maithunārthin, suratārthin, maithunābhilāṣin, sambhogābhilāśin, maithunecchu, vyavāyin, anuka, abhīka, abhika, lāpuka, abhilāṣuka, vyavāyaparāyaṇa, lampaṭa, strīrata, strīpara, kāmārta, kāmātura, kāmāndha, kāmānvita, kāmāviṣṭa, kāmagrasta, kāmādhīna, kāmayukta, kāmākrānta, kāmajita, jātakāma, kāmopahata   

yaḥ strīsambhogābhilāṣī asti।

saḥ kāmukaḥ vyaktiḥ asti।

para

vyabhicārī, paradāra   

yaḥ vyabhicāraṃ karoti।

vyabhicārinaṃ janāḥ hīnaṃ manyante।

para

parādhīna, paratantra, adhīna, anyādhīna, paravaśa   

yaḥ anyasya vaśaṃ gataḥ।

parādhīnaḥ vyaktiḥ pañjare sthitasya śukasya iva asti।

para

adhīnatā, adhīnasthatā, adhīnatva, paravaśatā, pāravaśya   

adhīnasya avasthā bhāvo vā।

sā atīva kopāviṣṭā ataḥ tasya adhīnatāyāṃ na sulabhatayā kāryaṃ kartuṃ śakyate।

para

parādhīnatā, paratantratā, dāsyatā   

parādhīnasya avasthā bhāvo vā।

parādhīnatāyāḥ śṛṅkhalayā baddhaḥ bhāratadeśaḥ 1947 saṃvatsare muktaḥ jātaḥ।

para

paścāt, tatpaścāt, tadanantaram, anantaram, tataḥ param, param, aparam, parastāt, uttarataḥ, tataḥ   

nirdhārita-samayoparāntam।

asya kāryasya siddheḥ paścāt ahaṃ gṛhaṃ gacchāmi।

para

ṭoparaḥ, ṭoparam   

dhanaṃ sthāpayituṃ kaṭyāṃ baddhaḥ ekaḥ syūtaḥ।

yadā śreṣṭhī rāmānandaḥ vaṇikkāryārthe bahiḥ gacchati tadā ṭopare dhanaṃ sthāpayitvā gacchati।

para

paramparā, rītiḥ, prathā   

sā paddhatiḥ yā dīrghakālaṃ yāvat akṣuṇṇatayā pracalati।

asmākaṃ samājasya vivāhasya paramparā bhinnā asti।

para

paramparāgata, pāramparika   

yaḥ paramparayā āgataḥ।

sā vivāhasamaye paramparāgatāyāṃ veśabhūṣāyāṃ cāru dṛṣṭā।

para

kapālaḥ, karpara   

śirasaḥ asthi।

basayānasya apaghāte tasya kapālaḥ kṣatigrastaḥ abhavat। / dvau śaṅkhakau kapālāni catvāri śirastathā।

para

parapatnī, paranārī, parakalatram   

anyasya patnī।

sajjanaḥ parapatnīṃ mātṛsamānāṃ manyate। / avarṇanīyaṃ parakalatram ।

para

phalam, patram, phalakaḥ, dhārā, parañjaḥ, puṣkaram   

śastrasya dhārā।

tarjitaḥ paraśudhārayā mama।

para

paraśuḥ, parśuḥ, paraśvadhaḥ, parśvadhaḥ, svadhitiḥ, kuṭhāraḥ   

śastraviśeṣaḥ।

tena śatruḥ paraśunā hataḥ।

para

agnisikhaḥ, agnisekharaḥ, ambaram, asṛk, kanakagauram, kaśmīrajanma, kāntam, kāveram, kāśmīram, kāśmīrajanmā, kāśmīrasambhavam, kucandanam, kusumātmaka, kesaravaram, goravaḥ, gauram, ghasram, ghusṛṇam, ghoraḥ, javā, jāguḍam, dīpakaḥ, dīpakam, nakulī, pāṭalam, piṇyākaḥ, piṇyākam, piśunam, pītakāveram, pītacandanam, pītikā, pītakam, pītanam, puṣparajaḥ, priyaṅgum, bālhikam, bāhlika, raktam, raktacandanam, raktasaṃjñam, raktāṅgam, rañjanaḥ, rudhiram, rohitam, lohitacandanam, vareṇyam, varṇam, varṇyam, vahniśikham, vahniśekharam, veram, śaṭham, śoṇitam, saṃkocam, saṃkocapiśunam, surārham, sūryasaṃjñam, saurabham, haricandanam   

puṣpe vartamānaḥ strīliṅgī avayavaviśeṣaḥ yaḥ keśa sadṛśaḥ asti।

agnisikhaḥ kṣapasya jananāṅgena sambadhitaḥ asti।

para

bhramaraḥ, dvirephaḥ, madhuvrataḥ, madhukaraḥ, madhuliṭ, madhupaḥ, aliḥ, alī, puṣpaliṭ, bhṛṅgaḥ, ṣaṭpadaḥ, kalālāpakaḥ, śilīmukhaḥ, puṣpandhayaḥ, madhukṛt, dvipaḥ, bhasaraḥ, cañcarikaḥ, sukāṇḍī, madhulolupaḥ, madhumārakaḥ, indindiraḥ, madhuparaḥ, lambaḥ, puṣpakīṭaḥ, madhusūdanaḥ, bhṛṅgarājaḥ, madhulehī, reṇuvāsaḥ, kāmukaḥ, kaliṅgapakṣī, mārkavaḥ, bhṛṅgarajaḥ, aṅgārkaḥ, bhṛṅgāraḥ   

kīṭaviśeṣaḥ, pratikusumaṃ bhrāmyan kṛṣṇakīṭaḥ।

bhramarāṇāṃ kadambaḥ priyaḥ asti।

para

vismita, paramavismita, vismayin, kṛtavismaya, camatkārita, sādbhuta, hṛṣita, hṛṣṭa   

yaḥ vismayānvitaḥ।

tasya kāryaṃ dṛṣṭvā sarve vismitāḥ।

para

adhaḥcaraḥ, apahārakaḥ, apahārikā, apahārakam, avahāraḥ, avāvan, avāvarī, ākhanikaḥ, ākhuḥ, āmoṣī, āmoṣi, kapāṭaghnaḥ, kapāṭaghnā, kapāṭaghnam, kambū, kalamaḥ, kavāṭaghnaḥ, kumbhīrakaḥ, kusumālaḥ, kharparaḥ, coraḥ, cauraḥ, corī, corakaḥ, caurī, caurikā, taḥ, takvān, taskaraḥ, tāyu, tṛpuḥ, dasmaḥ, dasmā, dasraḥ, drāvakaḥ, dhanaharaḥ, dhanahṛt, dhanahṛd, naktacāriḥ, naktacārī, nāgarakaḥ, parāskandī, parāskandi, parimoṣī, parimoṣiḥ, paṭaccaraḥ, pāṭṭacaraḥ, puraṃdaraḥ, pracuraḥ., pracurapuruṣaḥ, pratirodhakaḥ, pratirodhī, bandīkāraḥ, malimluḥ, malimluc, mallīkara, mācalaḥ, mīḍhuṣtamaḥ, mumuṣiṣuḥ, muṣkaḥ, mūṣakaḥ, moṣaḥ, moṣakaḥ, moṣṭā, rajanīcaraḥ, rātricaraḥ, rātryāṭaḥ, rikvān, ritakvān, ribhvān, rihāyaḥ, rerihāṇaḥ, laṭaḥ, luṇṭākaḥ, vaṭaraḥ, vanarguḥ, viloḍakaḥ, viloptā, stenaḥ, stainyaḥ, stāyuḥ, steyakṛt, steyakṛd, steyī, staunaḥ, styenaḥ, styainaḥ, srotasyaḥ, harikaḥ, hartā, hārakaḥ, hārītaḥ   

adatsya paradhanasya apahārakaḥ।

rakṣakaḥ corān daṇḍayati।

para

varuṇaḥ, pracetāḥ, pāśī, yādasāṃpatiḥ, appatiḥ, yādaḥpatiḥ, apāṃpatiḥ, jambukaḥ, meghanādaḥ, jaleśvaraḥ, parañjayaḥ, daityadevaḥ, jīvanāvāsaḥ, nandapālaḥ, vārilomaḥ, kuṇḍalī, rāmaḥ, sukhāśaḥ, kaviḥ, keśaḥ   

ekā vaidikī devatā yā jalasya adhipatiḥ asti iti manyate।

vedeṣu varuṇasya pūjanasya vidhānam asti।

para

chatram, ātapatram, utkūṭaḥ, kāvārī, kharparaḥ, kharparikā, jalatrā, varṣatram   

varṣāyāḥ tathā ca ātapāt trāṇārthaṃ vastrādibhiḥ ācchāditaṃ sadaṇḍaṃ vartulākāraṃ sādhanam।

varṣāyāḥ svarakṣaṇārthaṃ janaiḥ chatrāṇi upayujyante।

para

saṃhan, samāhan, abhihan, han, paraspara saṃghaṭṭ, paraspara saṅghaṭṭ   

vegena parasparaṃ samāghātānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

mahāmārge ṭrakayānaṃ tathā ca basayānaṃ parasparaṃ samavadhiṣṭām।

para

śatruḥ, ripuḥ, vairiḥ, sapatnaḥ, ariḥ, dviṣaḥ, dveṣaṇaḥ, durhṛd, dviṭ, vipakṣaḥ, ahitaḥ, amitraḥ, dasyuḥ, śātravaḥ, abhighātī, paraḥ, arātiḥ, pratyartho, paripanthī, vṛṣaḥ, pratipakṣaḥ, dviṣan, ghātakaḥ, dveṣī, vidviṣaḥ, hiṃsakaḥ, vidviṭ, apriyaḥ, abhighātiḥ, ahitaḥ, dauhṛdaḥ   

yena saha śatrutā vartate।

śatruḥ agniśca durbalaḥ nāsti।

para

parajīvivanaspatiḥ   

kṣupaviśeṣaḥ - yaḥ anyavṛkṣe sthitvā tasya rasaṃ pītvā vardhate।

ākāśalatā iti parajīvivanaspatiḥ asti।

para

parajīvī, anyajīvī   

saḥ jīvaḥ yaḥ anyasya śarīre sthitvā tasya rasaṃ cūṣitvā jīvati।

pipsū iti ekaḥ parajīvī asti।

para

videśaḥ, paradeśaḥ, pararāṣṭram   

svasya deśāt bhinnaḥ deśaḥ।

mohanaḥ videśe kāryaṃ karoti।

para

parasparam, mithaḥ, anyonyam   

anyonyena saha।

tau parasparaṃ kalahāyete।

para

svargaḥ, suralokaḥ, nākaḥ, tridivaḥ, tridaśālayaḥ, suralokaḥ, dyoḥ, dyau, triviṣṭapam, mandaraḥ, avarohaḥ, gauḥ, ramatiḥ, phalīdayaḥ, svaḥ, aparalokaḥ, amaralokaḥ, indralokaḥ, devalokaḥ, devanikāyaḥ, paruḥ, puruḥ, ṣaḥ, sukhādhāraḥ, saurikaḥ, haḥ   

hindumatānusāreṇa saptalokeṣu tat sthānaṃ yatra puṇyātmā nivasati।

satkarmaṇā manuṣyaḥ svarge gacchati।

para

bandiḥ, bandī, kārāsāthaḥ, kārāgārasāthaḥ, kārāguptaḥ, upagrahaḥ, grahaṇaḥ, kaparakī, karamarī, vāriḥ, goraṅkuḥ   

yaḥ kārāgāre asti vā yasmai kārāvāsasya daṇḍaḥ dattaḥ।

bandiḥ kārāgārāt palāyate।

para

brāhmī, somalatā, sarasvatī, saumyā, suraśreṣṭhā, śāradā, suvarcalā, kapotavagā, vaidhātrī, divyatejāḥ, mahauṣadhī, svayaṃbhuvī, saumyalatā, sureṣṭā, brahmakanyakā, maṇaḍūkamātā, maṇḍukī, surasā, medhyā, vīrā, bhāratī, varā, parameṣṭhinī, divyā, śāradā   

kṣupaviśeṣaḥ-yaḥ bheṣajarupeṇa upayujyate yasya guṇāḥ vātāmlapittanāśitvaṃ tathā ca buddhiprajñāmedhākārītvam।

brāhmī prāyaḥ gaṅgātaṭe haridvāranagarasya samīpe dṛśyate।

para

param, parataḥ, pārataḥ, pareṇa, parācīnam, ati   

adhikāraṃ prabhāvaṃ vā atikramya।

etat karma mama vaśāt paraṃ vartate।

para

vajram, kuliśam, bhaduram, paviḥ, śatakoṭiḥ, svaruḥ, śambaḥ, dambholiḥ, aśaniḥ, kulīśam, bhidiram, bhiduḥ, svarus, sambaḥ, saṃvaḥ, aśanī, vajrāṃśaniḥ, jambhāriḥ, tridaśāyudham, śatadhāram, śatāram, āpotram, akṣajam, girikaṇṭakaḥ, gauḥ, abhrottham, meghabhūtiḥ, girijvaraḥ, jāmbaviḥ, dambhaḥ, bhidraḥ, ambujam, hlādinī, didyut, nemiḥ, hetiḥ, namaḥ. sṛkaḥ, vṛkaḥ, vadhaḥ, arkaḥ, kutasaḥ , kuliśaḥ, tujaḥ, tigmam, meniḥ, svadhitiḥ sāyakaḥ, paraśuḥ   

indrasya pradhānaṃ śastram।

ekadā indreṇa hanumān vajreṇa prahṛtaḥ।

para

pātram, kapālaḥ, kapālakaḥ, karparaḥ, kuṇḍaḥ, kuṇḍī, pātrakam, pātrikā   

laghupātram।

mātā pātre piṣṭaṃ mardayati।

para

vraścanaḥ, patraparaśuḥ   

svarṇalohādayaḥ yena chidyate takṣate vā।

suvarṇakāraḥ vraścanena suvarṇaṃ takṣati

para

videśī, paradeśī, vaideśikaḥ, videśīyaḥ   

anyadeśasya nivāsī।

asmākaṃ deśam āgatāḥ videśinaḥ asmābhiḥ samādartavyāḥ।

para

videśin, videśīya, vaideśya, paradeśin   

anyadeśasambandhī।

asmin hāṭe prāyaḥ sarvāṇi videśīni vastūni santi।

para

adhīna, nighna, āyatta, asvacchanda, gṛhyaka, paravaśa   

parasya vaśaṃ gataḥ।

bhāratadeśaḥ bahukālaṃ yāvat āṅgladeśīyānām adhīnaḥ āsīt।

para

paraśurāmaḥ, bhārgavaḥ, jāmadagnyaḥ, bhṛgupatiḥ, bhṛgūlāpatiḥ   

jamadagniṛṣeḥ patiḥ yaḥ ṣaṣṭhaḥ avatāraḥ asti iti manyate।

paraśurāmeṇa ekaviṃśativāraṃ kṣatriyāṇāṃ nāśaḥ kṛtaḥ।

para

saṃśayaḥ, saṃśītiḥ, sandehaḥ, saṃdehaḥ, śaṅkā, vitarkaḥ, āśaṅkā, vikalpaḥ, bhrāntiḥ, vibhramaḥ, dvaidhībhāvaḥ, anupanyāsaḥ, vicikitsā, dvāpara   

ekadharmmikaviruddhabhāvābhāvaprakārakaṃ jñānam।

rāmasya vacane mama saṃśayaḥ asti।

para

madhu, kṣaudram, puṣpaniryāsaḥ, puṣparasaḥ, puṣpasāraḥ, puṣpasavam, puṣpāsavam, kusumāsavam, mākṣikam, chātram, chātrakam, sāragham, kāpiśāyanam   

makṣikābhiḥ madhukoṣe saṅkalitaṃ puṣpāṇāṃ savam।

madhu bahūpayogi asti।

para

dvāparam, dvāparayugam, dvāparaṃ yugam   

hindūnāṃ mate kālasya caturvibhāgeṣu tṛtīyaḥ dvāparayugasaṃjñakaḥ । sa ca tretāyugād anantaraṃ 864000 varṣaparyantaḥ। kṛṣṇaḥ dvāparayuge jātaḥ। /

dharmādharmarato lokaḥ pralāpī capalaḥ sadā। jñānaniṣṭhaḥ kapaṭavāk dvāpare rājavistaraḥ॥

para

makarandaḥ, puṣpāsavaḥ, puṣparasaḥ, marandaḥ, madhuḥ   

puṣpeṣu vartamānaḥ rasaḥ।

madhumakṣikāḥ makarandena eva madhu nirmāti।

para

kulācāraḥ, kularītiḥ, kulaparamparā   

kasminnapi vaṃśe dīrghakālāt pracalitā rītiḥ।

kulācārāḥ anyathākartuṃ na śakyante।

para

dūratā, antaram, dūratvam, aparatā, apasaraḥ, dūrabhāvaḥ, velā, viprakarṣaḥ, vikarṣaḥ, dūram   

dvayoḥ bindvoḥ vastunaḥ vā madhye vartamānaṃ sthānam।

gṛhāt kāryālayaparyantasya dūratā prāyaḥ ekakilomīṭaraṃ yāvat asti।

para

viprakarṣaḥ, viprakṛṣṭatvam, paratvam   

dūrasya avasthā bhāvaḥ vā।

kalahasya kāraṇāt dvayoḥ bhrātroḥ viprakarṣaḥ vardhate।

para

praparaśvaḥ   

adyārabhya tṛtīyaṃ dinaṃ vā paraśvaḥsya anantaraṃ dinam।

praparaśvaḥ asmākaṃ gṛhe pūjā vartate।

para

parapuruṣaḥ   

pativyatirikto anyapumān।

asūryampaśyāḥ rājadārāḥ parapuruṣasya darśanaṃ parihṛtavantaḥ।

para

parama   

yasmāt kimapi adhikaṃ nāsti।

mahātmā yogasya paramāṃ avasthāṃ gataḥ।

para

paramāṇavīya, paramāṇaka, paramāṇvika   

paramāṇusambandhī।

saḥ prāṇavāyoḥ paramāṇavīyāṃ saṃracanām adhyeti।

para

paramahaṃsaḥ   

saṃnyāsīviśeṣaḥ। yaḥ jātirūpavero nirdvando nirāgrahastattvabrahmamārge samyak sampannaḥ śuddhamānasaḥ, prāṇasaṃdhāraṇārthaṃ yathoktakāle bhaikṣamācaran lābhālābhau samau kṛtvā śūnyāgāra-devagṛha-tṛṇa-kūṭa-valmīka-vṛkṣamūla-kulāla-śālāgnihotra-nadīpulina-giri-kuhara-kandara-koṭara-nikara-sthaṇḍileṣaśvaniketavāsī niṣprayatno nirmamaḥ śukladhyānaparāyaṇaḥ adhyātmaniṣṭhaḥ śubhāśubhakarmanirmūlanāya saṃnyāsena dehatyāgaṃ karoti।

paramahaṃsena hi yajñopavītādicihnāni parityajya kaupīnādikaṃ dhāraṇīyam।

para

paramāṇu-yuddham   

tad yuddhaṃ yasmin paramāṇu-astrāṇi upayujyante।

pākisthānaḥ vāraṃ vāraṃ bhāratāya paramāṇu-yuddhasya bhāpanaṃ dadāti।

para

sarvotkṛṣṭakarma, uttamakarma, atyuttamakarma, anupamakarma, atyutkṛṣṭakarma, paramakarma, pradhānakarma, śobhā   

kalākārasya uttamā racanā।

tājamahala iti ekaḥ sarvotkṛṣṭakarma asti।

para

paraśuḥ, paraśvadhaḥ, chidiḥ, vṛkṣabhid, vṛkṣabhedī, svadhitiḥ   

śastraviśeṣaḥ laghukuṭhāraḥ।

saḥ paraśunā kāṣṭhaṃ chinatti।

para

pūrvāparam, niścapracam   

purataḥ pṛṣṭhataśca।

ciraṃ saḥ mantriṇā saha bhāṣituṃ pūrvāparaṃ calati।

para

para   

svasya kuṭumbāt samājāt vā bahisthaḥ।

saḥ pareṣāṃ janānāṃ sāhāyyaṃ karoti।

para

uttara, apara   

paścād āgataḥ utpannaḥ vā।

hindī saṃskṛtabhāṣāyāḥ tathā ca prākṛtabhāṣāyāḥ uttarā bhāṣā asti।

para

madhye sthā, madhye pat, parakāryeṣu vyāpṛ   

parakārye anadhikāritve api madhyastharūpeṇa vyavaharaṇānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

pitāputrayoḥ vivāde tvaṃ kimarthaṃ madhye tiṣṭhasi।

para

tatpara, utsuka, udyata, udyukta, sajja, sajjita   

yaḥ kimapi kāryaṃ kartum icchukaḥ asti।

madhumatiḥ kimapi kāryaṃ kartuṃ tatparā asti।

para

manda, śithila, apratibha, atatpara   

yaḥ kasmād api kāraṇāt mandāyate।

udvignaḥ saḥ mandayā gatyā agre gacchati।

para

parama, para, atyanta   

sīmānaṃ yāvat।

candraḥ paurṇimāyāḥ rātrau parame utkarṣe gacchati।

para

bhṛśam, atīvam, atitarām, ativelam, atiśayanam, udgāḍham, uccakaiḥ, atyantam, nikāmam, param, paramataḥ   

atyadhikamātrayā।

śarīravedanā rugṇaṃ bhṛśam apīḍayat।

para

akampita, akampāyamāna, kamparahita   

kampena vinā।

saḥ akampitaṃ stambhaṃ paśyati।

para

parajīvin   

yaḥ anyasya jīvasya sāhāyyena jīvati vā bhojanaṃ prāpyate।

amaravela iti parajīvī kṣupaḥ asti।

para

praparahyaḥ   

parahyaḥ pūrvaṃ dinam।

praparahyaḥ ārabhyaḥ te janāḥ gṛhe na santi।

para

āratiḥ, nīrājanam, uparamaḥ   

kasyāpi devatāyāḥ pūjanīyavyakteḥ purataḥ prajvālitān dīpādīn vṛttākāraṃ paribhrāmya nirājayanam।

mātā devālaye āratiṃ karoti।

para

prābhikartā, vyavahārasacivaḥ, vyavahārapaṇḍitaḥ, parakāryasampādakaḥ, parakāryasādhakaḥ, pratipuruṣaḥ, pratihastaḥ   

yaḥ kasya api anyasya kṛte daṇḍānuśāsanasambandhi kāryaṃ karoti।

adya prābhikartā kāryālaye na āgataḥ।

para

paradharmaḥ   

bhinnaḥ dharmaḥ।

tasmai paradharme kāpi ruciḥ nāsti।/ svadharme nidhanaṃ śreyaḥ paradharmo bhayāvahaḥ।

para

paropakārī, parahitaiṣī   

pareṣāṃ hitaṃ karoti yaḥ tathā ca tadeva tasya śīlaṃ vartate।

ādhunike yuge paropakāriṇaḥ nyūnāḥ na santi।

para

parakīyatā, aparatā, aparatvam   

parakīyasya avasthā।

parakīyatāyāḥ kāraṇāt tena mayi avadhānaṃ na dattam।

para

paramāṇusaṅkhyā   

rāsāyanikatattvasāraṇyāṃ pradattā kasyacana tattvasya saṅkhyā yā tasya tattvasya paramāṇukendre vartamānānāṃ proṭānānāṃ vā udāsīnelekṭrānānāṃ saṅkhyayā samā bhavati।

kaukilīyasya paramāṇusaṅkhyā ṣaṭ vartate।

para

parapurañjayaḥ   

purāṇeṣu varṇitaḥ kaścit rājā।

parapurañjayasya putryāḥ vivāhaḥ agastyamuninā saha jātaḥ।

para

parahyaḥ   

hyastanāt pūrvaḥ divasaḥ।

saḥ parahyaḥ aṭituṃ gataḥ।

para

paraśvaḥ   

śvastanāt paraḥ divasaḥ।

ahaṃ paraśvaḥ gamiṣyāmi।

para

aparicitaḥ, anabhyastaḥ, ajñātaḥ, parapuruṣaḥ, pārakyaḥ, anyajanaḥ   

yaḥ na paricitaḥ।

asmābhiḥ aparicitānāṃ saha sādhuḥ vyavahāraḥ kartavyaḥ।

para

paramahaṃsopaniṣad, paramahaṃsa   

ekā upaniṣad।

paramahaṃsopaniṣad yajurvedasya bhāgaḥ।

para

paramahaṃsa-parivrājaka upaniṣad, paramahaṃsa-parivrājakaḥ   

ekā upaniṣad।

paramahaṃsa-parivrājaka-upaniṣad atharvavedasya bhāgaḥ।

para

parabrahma-upaniṣad, parabrahma   

ekā upaniṣad।

parabrahma-upaniṣad atharvavedena sambandhitā।

para

avasaravāditā, svārthaparatā, svārthaḥ, ātmahitam   

avasāravādinaḥ avasthā bhāvaḥ vā।

netṝṇām asatyāni vacanāni teṣāṃ svārthaparatāyāḥ paricayaṃ dadāti।

para

paraṃparāvādaḥ   

samāje ādhunikavicārāṇām apekṣayā purātanāḥ sāṃpradāyikāḥ rītayaḥ mukhyāḥ iti viśvāsaḥ।

asmākaṃ sarveṣāṃ gṛhajanānāṃ paraṃparāvāde viśvāsaḥ vartate।

para

paraṃparāvādī, paraṃparāvādinī   

paraṃparāvāde yasya niṣṭhā asti।

paraṃparāvādibhiḥ saha mama na kopi vivādaḥ।

para

paramparāvādin   

yaḥ niṣṭhayā paramparām anusarati।

ahaṃ paramparāvādini kule jātā।

para

ataḥparam, ataḥ, ata ūrdhvam, prāṅ   

vartamānasamayāt ūrdhvam।

ataḥparam etādṛśaḥ pramādaḥ na kariṣyate।

para

uttaracaubīsaparaganāmaṇḍalam   

paścimabaṅgālarājye vartamānam ekaṃ maṇḍalam।

uttaracaubīsaparaganāmaṇḍalasya mukhyālayaḥ bārāsātanagare asti।

para

dakṣiṇacaubīsaparaganāmaṇḍalam   

paścimabaṅgālarājye vartamānam ekaṃ maṇḍalam।

dakṣiṇacaubīsaparaganāmaṇḍalasya mukhyālayaḥ alipuranagare asti।

para

daiṣṭikatvam, daivaparatā, daivādhīnatā   

yad kimapi bhavati tad daivāyattameva evaṃrūpaḥ siddhāntaḥ।

adya vaijñānike yuge daiṣṭikatvaṃ manyamānāḥ janāḥ santi।

para

daivaparaḥ, daivaparā, daivāyattaḥ, daivāyattā, daivaparāyaṇaḥ, daivaparāyaṇā, daivādhīnaḥ, daivādhīnā, daiṣapramāṇakaḥ, daiṣapramāṇakā, diṣṭaparaḥ, diṣṭaparā, daiṣṭikaḥ, daiṣṭikā, daivavādī, daivavādinī   

daivameva ālambanaṃ yasya yasyāḥ vā।

adyāpi daivaparāḥ alpāḥ na santi।

para

niyativādī, daivavādī, daivaparaḥ, daivāyattaḥ, daivaparāyaṇaḥ, daivādhīnaḥ, yadbhaviṣyaḥ   

yaḥ niyativādaṃ svīkaroti।

niyativādinaḥ anusāreṇa sarvameva bhagavatkṛpayā bhavati ।

para

bhagālam, kapālaḥ, kapālam, karparaḥ, kharparaḥ, nārakapālam   

narakapālam।

bhagālasya dhāraṇatvāt bhagālī ityapi śivasya anyatamaṃ nāma।

para

rājyam, paramādhikāraḥ, rājyādhikāraḥ   

* śāsakīyamaṇḍalasya mantriṇāṃ samūhaḥ yaḥ rājyasya vyavasthāyāḥ anuyogādhīnaḥ asti।

rājyena karaḥ vardhitaḥ।

para

api, api tu, tathāpi, param, tu, kim, kintu, ca, nanu, vā, atha vā, punaḥ   

evambhūto'pi।

jvaraḥ san api saḥ vṛthā eva itastataḥ aṭati।

para

sukhadevaḥ, sukhadevathāpara   

bhāratīyasya svatantratāsaṅgrāmasya pramukhaḥ krāntikārī।

sukhadevasya janma memāsasya 15 dināṅke 1907 tame varṣe abhavat।

para

paramāraḥ   

mālavākṣetrasya rājavaṃśasya sadasyaḥ।

mālavākṣetre paramārāṇām api śāsanam āsīt।

para

paravananadī   

bhāratīyā nadī।

paravananadyāḥ taṭe vartamānaḥ rājñā bhīmadevena nirmitasya durgasya avaśeṣāḥ darśanīyāḥ santi।

para

śatrughna, arimardana, ripunipātin, irya, parabhedaka, ripusūdana, śatrunāśakṛt, arindama   

śatrūn damayati iti। śatrughnasya rājñaḥ rājye ekādhipatitvam āsīt।

para

virāmaḥ, avakāśaḥ, uparamaḥ, nirvṛttiḥ, vinivṛttiḥ   

anujñā-pūrvaka-kāryatyāgasya kriyā।

matkṛte etasmāt kāryāt virāmasya avasaraḥ nāsti।

para

parasmaipadam   

saṃskṛtabhāṣāyāḥ vyākaraṇaśāstrānusāreṇa dhātoḥ dvayoḥ pratyayasamūhayoḥ ekaḥ yaḥ kartāram abhidhatte।

nam dhātoḥ ti pratyatena namati iti parasmaipadaṃ rūpaṃ prāpyate।

para

andhaparamparā   

kasyāpi prācīnāyāḥ prathāyāḥ avicāreṇa eva anukaraṇam।

asmābhiḥ andhaparamparāyāḥ rakṣitavyam।

para

paramāṇvika   

paramāṇusambandhī।

paramāṇvikānāṃ śastrāṇāṃ prayogāt rakṣitavyam।

para

paradeśaḥ   

svasya grāmaprāntanagarādīn vihāya anyat sthānam।

mama pitā paradeśaṃ gatavān।

para

apararātraḥ, amāntaḥ   

rātreḥ antimaḥ bhāgaḥ।

apararātre kasmāt sahāyyaṃ prāpsyati bhavān।

para

paramapadam   

atyuccaṃ padam।

uttamānāṃ guṇānāṃ kāraṇāt eva tena paramapadaṃ prāptam।

para

paragrahīya   

anyena graheṇa sambaddhaḥ।

eliyanasadṛśaṃ paragrahīyāṇāṃ jīvānāṃ viṣaye saṃśodhanaṃ pracalati।

para

karpara   

ekaḥ coraḥ ।

karparasya varṇanaṃ kathāsaritsāgare vartate

para

kharpara   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

kharparasya ullekhaḥ vīracarite vartate

para

paraśuḥ   

ekaḥ rājā ।

paraśoḥ ullekhaḥ mahābhārate vartate

para

kūrpara   

grāmaviśeṣaḥ ।

kūrparasya varṇanaṃ kośe samupalabhyate

para

kūrpara   

grāmaviśeṣaḥ ।

kūrparasya varṇanaṃ kośe samupalabhyate

para

khāpara   

ekaḥ janasamūhaḥ ।

khāparasya varṇanaṃ romakasiddhānte vartate

para

satyabodhaparamahaṃsaparivrājakaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

satyabodhaparamahaṃsaparivrājakasya ullekhaḥ vivaraṇapustikāyām asti

para

satyānandaparamahaṃsaparivrājakācāryaḥ   

ekaḥ vidvān ।

satyānandaparamahaṃsaparivrājakācāryasya ullekhaḥ vivaraṇapustikāyām asti

para

khāpara   

ekaḥ janasamūhaḥ ।

khāparasya varṇanaṃ romakasiddhānte vartate

para

ghaṭakarparakulakavṛttiḥ   

ekaḥ ṭīkāgranthaḥ ।

ghaṭakarparakulakavṛtteḥ ullekhaḥ kośe vartate

para

karparakaḥ   

ekaḥ coraḥ ।

karparakasya ullekhaḥ kathāsaritsāgare asti

para

karpara   

ekaḥ coraḥ ।

karparasya ullekhaḥ kathāsaritsāgare asti

para

paraṇam   

ekaṃ nagaram ।

paraṇasya ullekhaḥ vivaraṇapustikāyām asti

Parse Time: 3.074s Search Word: para Input Encoding: Devanagari IAST: para